System Release 8.

DIMETRA™
Dimetra IP Scalable (DIPS)
Dimetra IP Compact (DIPC)/Scalable Dimetra IP (SDIP)

USER CONFIGURATION
MANAGER

March 2014

*MN000462A01*
MN000462A01-A

© 2014 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved

Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs. Laws in
the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer
programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described
in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
© 2014 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language
or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication,
estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the
normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Disclaimer
Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or
licensed for use on a particular system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a particular mobile subscriber
unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola contact for further information.

Trademarks
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property
of their respective owners.

European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

directive

The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out
trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases).
As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries
should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste.
Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre
for information about the waste collection system in their country.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

CMM Labeling and Disclosure Table
The People’s Republic of China requires that our products comply with China Management Methods (CMM)
environmental regulations. (China Management Methods refers to the Regulation Management Methods for
Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products.) Two items are used to demonstrate compliance; the Label
and the Disclosure Table.
The label is placed in a customer visible position on the product. The first of the following examples means that the
product contains no hazardous substances; the second means that the product contains hazardous substances, and has
an Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) of fifty years.

The Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is the period (in years) during which the Toxic and Hazardous
Substances (T&HS) contained in the Electronic Information Product (EIP) will not leak or mutate causing
environmental pollution, or bodily injury from the use of the EIP.
The Disclosure Table, printed in simplified Chinese, is included with each customer order. An example of a
Disclosure Table (in Chinese) follows:

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

Service Information
Government Technical Support, EA Solutions Support Centre (ESSC)
The Government Technical Support, EA Solutions Support Centre (ESSC) provides a remote Technical Support
Service to help customers resolve technical issues and quickly restore networks and systems. This team of highly
skilled professionals is available to customers with current service agreements in place that include the Technical
Support Service. The ESSC technical experts may be accessed through the EMEA Integrated Call Center either
electronically or using the telephone numbers listed below. If you are unsure whether your current service agreement
entitles you to benefit from this service, or if you would like more information about the Technical Support Service,
contact your local customer support or account manager for further information.

Contact Details
Email: essc@[Link]

Table 1: List of Telephone Numbers

Country In Country Number to Dial

AUSTRIA 01206091087
DENMARK 043682114
FRANCE 0157323434
GERMANY 06950070204
ITALY 0291483230
LITHUANIA 880 030 828
NETHERLANDS 0202061404
NORWAY 24159815
PORTUGAL 0217616160
RUSSIA 810 800 228 41044
(Alternative 810 800 120 1011)
SAUDI ARABIA 800 844 5345
SOUTH AFRICA 0800981900
SPAIN 0912754787
UNITED KINGDOM 02030 277499
All Other Countries +44 2030 277499

European Systems Component Centre (ESCC)

The European Systems Component Centre provides a repair service for infrastructure equipment. Customers requiring
repair service should contact the Customer Information Desk to obtain a Return Material Authorization number. The
equipment should then be shipped to the following address unless advised otherwise.
Motorola GmbH, European Systems Component Centre, Am Borsigturm 130,13507 Berlin, Germany

Contact Details
• E-Mail: [Link]@[Link]

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

8 | Service Information

• Telephone: +49 (0) 30 66861404

• Telefax: +49 (0) 30 66861426
• Monday – Friday 08:00 am to 06:00 pm (CET)

Parts Identification and Ordering

Request for help in identification of non-referenced spare parts should be directed to the Customer Care Organization
of Motorola’s local area representation. Orders for replacement parts, kits, and assemblies should be placed directly
on Motorola’s local distribution organization or through the Extranet site Motorola Online at https://
[Link].

Updated Versions of Manuals

Verify the current version of the manual at our Extranet site, Motorola Online: https://
[Link].

Your Input
Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@[Link]
We welcome your feedback on this and other Motorola manuals. To take a short, confidential survey on Motorola
Customer Documentation, go to [Link] or scan the following QR code with your mobile
device to access the survey.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

Document History
Edition Description Date
MN000462A01-A Initial Version Mar. 2014

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

 Contents | 11

Contents
Copyrights........................................................................................................................................ 3
CMM Labeling and Disclosure Table............................................................................................5
Service Information......................................................................................................................... 7
Document History............................................................................................................................ 9
List of Figures................................................................................................................................ 21
List of Tables.................................................................................................................................. 31
List of Processes............................................................................................................................. 37
List of Procedures.......................................................................................................................... 39
About User Configuration Manager............................................................................................ 43
What Is Covered In This Manual?...................................................................................................................... 43
Useful Background Information..........................................................................................................................43
Related Information.............................................................................................................................................43
Icon Conventions.................................................................................................................................................45
Style Conventions................................................................................................................................................45

Chapter 1: UCM Description................................................................................ 47

Introduction to UCM........................................................................................................................................... 47
Role of the UCM..................................................................................................................................... 47
Configuring System and Zone Information.................................................................................47
Performing Tasks in the UCM.................................................................................................... 48
Organization of the UCM........................................................................................................................49
System Configuration..................................................................................................................50
Consoles...................................................................................................................................... 51
Subscribers.................................................................................................................................. 51
Security........................................................................................................................................54
ZoneWatch Configuration...........................................................................................................55
External Configuration................................................................................................................ 56
UCM Window Elements..................................................................................................................................... 56
UCM Main Window Elements................................................................................................................56
UCM Main Window Structure.................................................................................................... 57
Navigation................................................................................................................................... 58
Commands...................................................................................................................................62
Status Bar.................................................................................................................................... 64
Configuration Window Elements............................................................................................................64
Configuration Window Structure................................................................................................ 64
Tabs............................................................................................................................................. 65
Configuration Window Action Buttons...................................................................................... 65
Report Window Elements....................................................................................................................... 67
Report Window Structure............................................................................................................67
Fields and Check Boxes.............................................................................................................. 68
Report Window Drop-Down Lists.............................................................................................. 68
Report Window Action Buttons.................................................................................................. 68
Report Results............................................................................................................................. 69
Find Window Elements........................................................................................................................... 69
Find Window Structure............................................................................................................... 70
Find Window Drop-Down Lists..................................................................................................70
Find Window Action Buttons......................................................................................................71
Find Results.................................................................................................................................71
Values Window Elements....................................................................................................................... 72
12 | Contents

Similarities Between the Values Window and the Find Window............................................... 72

Differences Between the Values Window and the Find Window...............................................73
Values Window Structure........................................................................................................... 73
Values Window Drop-Down Lists.............................................................................................. 73
Values Window Action Buttons..................................................................................................74
Values Results............................................................................................................................. 74
Security Groups Selection WindowElements......................................................................................... 75
Changing Preferences..................................................................................................................75
Security Groups Selection Window Structure.............................................................................75
Check Boxes................................................................................................................................76
Home Zone Map Processing Status Window Elements..........................................................................76
Zone Database Server State.........................................................................................................77
Home Zone Map Processing State for Subscriber Agents.......................................................... 77

Chapter 2: Configuration...................................................................................... 81
System Objects Configuration.............................................................................................................................81
Configuring System Object Parameters.................................................................................................. 81
Configuring Data System Object Parameters..........................................................................................84
Radio Command Configuration Requirements................................................................................................... 88
Importance of Talkgroup Attachments and Primary Talkgroups............................................................88
Talkgroup Attachment List for an RCM User.........................................................................................88
Primary Talkgroups.................................................................................................................................89
Installing and Configuring Unicode Font Support.............................................................................................. 90
Installing License Keys from the Installation Menu........................................................................................... 91

Chapter 3: Operation.............................................................................................93
User Configuration Manager Procedures............................................................................................................ 93
Opening the UCM Main Window........................................................................................................... 93
Switching Between Class and Instance Based Navigation..................................................................... 95
Creating a New Record Using System Defaults..................................................................................... 96
Creating A New Record Using Existing Records................................................................................... 97
Modifying a Single Record..................................................................................................................... 98
Modifying All Records............................................................................................................................99
Deleting a Record..................................................................................................................................101
Committing Changes.............................................................................................................................101
Committing Changes to a Group of Console Site Records....................................................... 102
Rolling Back to Previously Committed Values........................................................................ 102
Reporting Group Status............................................................................................................. 102
Creating a Default Report......................................................................................................................103
Creating a Narrowed Report..................................................................................................................105
Displaying More Than 100 Records..................................................................................................... 107
Finding a Record................................................................................................................................... 109
Finding a Value in the Database............................................................................................................110
Selecting Security Group Preferences...................................................................................................112
Viewing the Home Zone Map Processing State....................................................................................113
Mapping Zones to Alias Server in Zone to AS Map.............................................................................114
Mapping Zones to Short Data Router in Zone to SDR Map................................................................. 115
Updating Home Zone Mappings....................................................................................................................... 117
Overview of Home Zone Mappings......................................................................................................117
Effect of Improper Mappings................................................................................................................ 117
Versionized Home Zone Mappings in Multicluster Systems................................................................118
Creating a Home Zone Map.................................................................................................................. 118
Creating a Home Zone Map - Basic Tab...................................................................................119
Creating a Home Zone Map – Individual Maps Tab.................................................................120
 Contents | 13

Creating a Home Zone Map – Group Maps Tab.......................................................................121

Creating a Home Zone Map – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab..................................121
Home Zone Mapping XML File Creation.................................................................................122
Submitting a Home Zone Map.............................................................................................................. 122
Submitting a Home Zone Map – Basic Tab.............................................................................. 123
Modifying a Home Zone Map...............................................................................................................125
Modifying a Home Zone Map – Basic Tab...............................................................................125
Modifying a Home Zone Map – Individual Maps Tab............................................................. 126
Modifying a Home Zone Map – Group Maps Tab................................................................... 127
Modifying a Home Zone Map – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab.............................. 127
Accessing Home Zone Mapping Views................................................................................................128
Accessing Home Zone Mappings Views.............................................................................................. 129
Accessing IHLR/GHLR Views for a Home Zone Map........................................................................ 130
Configuring Profiles.......................................................................................................................................... 131
Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile.................................................................................................131
Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab................................................................ 131
Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab...................................................131
Configuring the User Group for a TG/MG Capabilities Profile............................................... 134
Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile.................................................................................................. 134
Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Basic Tab.....................................................................134
Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Configuration Tab....................................................... 135
Creating Status Set................................................................................................................................ 136
Creating a Status Set Basic Tab................................................................................................ 137
Creating a Status Set Configuration Tab...................................................................................137
Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile........................................................................................... 138
Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile Basic Tab.............................................................. 138
Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab.................................................139
Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile User Group Tab.................................................... 142
Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile.............................................................................................142
Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile Basic Tab................................................................142
Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile Configuration Tab.................................................. 143
Creating an Exclusion Class..................................................................................................................144
Creating an Exclusion Class Basic tab...................................................................................... 144
Creating an Exclusion Class Configuration Tab....................................................................... 145
Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile.......................................................................................... 146
Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile Basic Tab............................................................. 146
Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile Configuration Tab................................................147
Configuring Consoles and Console Users.........................................................................................................149
Configuring Control Room Head Number (CRHN)............................................................................. 149
Creating a Control Room Head Number...................................................................................149
Creating Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile, Talkgroups, and Multigroups.................................... 152
Creating a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile in UCM........................................................ 152
Creating Console Users......................................................................................................................... 156
Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile in UCM..............................................................156
Configuring Alert Tones in UCM............................................................................................. 160
Creating a Console User in UCM..............................................................................................163
Creating a Console Private Call Resource in UCM.................................................................. 165
Configuring User Groups.................................................................................................................................. 166
Creating a User Group Basic Tab..........................................................................................................166
Creating a User Group Configuration Tab............................................................................................ 167
Configuring Radio Users, Groups, Storm Plans and Load Classes...................................................................168
Creating a Talkgroup or Multigroup..................................................................................................... 168
Talkgroup IDs Definition.......................................................................................................... 168
Talkgroup ID Ranges................................................................................................................ 168
Creating a Multigroup............................................................................................................... 169
Creating a Radio or Radio User............................................................................................................ 172
14 | Contents

Radio to Radio User Relationship............................................................................................. 172

Creating a Radio........................................................................................................................172
Creating a Radio User............................................................................................................... 174
Creating a Radio by Entering the Radio Serial Number, ID, Reference ID, and Security Group........ 177
Creating Storm Plans and Storm Plan Commands................................................................................179
Creating a Storm Plan................................................................................................................179
Creating Storm Plan Commands............................................................................................... 181
Creating a Load Class............................................................................................................................182
Creating a Load Class – Basic Tab........................................................................................... 183
Creating a Load Class – Configuration Tab..............................................................................184
Configuring a Barring Profile................................................................................................................185
Creating and Configuring a Barring Profile.............................................................................. 185
Configuring Object Group Definition................................................................................................... 188
Configuring Preemptive Priority Calls..................................................................................................189
Setting Up Preemptive Priority Calls.................................................................................................... 189
Priority of Preemptive Priority Calls.........................................................................................189
Setting Priority Levels...............................................................................................................190
Enabling a Multigroup for PPC.................................................................................................191
Enabling a Radio User Capabilities Profile for PPC.................................................................191
Enabling a ConsoleUser Capabilities Profile for PPC.............................................................. 192
Provisioning Radio Users with PPC..........................................................................................193
Provisioning Console Users with PPC...................................................................................... 194
Enabling Private Calls at the Dispatch Console........................................................................195
Setting Up Ambient Listening...............................................................................................................197
Enabling Radio Users for Ambience Listening.........................................................................197
Enabling Console Users for Ambience Listening..................................................................... 198
Enabling Ambience Listening at the Dispatch Console............................................................198
Configuring the System for Full Duplex Private Calls......................................................................... 200
Enabling Radio Users for Full Duplex Private Calls................................................................ 200
Enabling Console Users for Full Duplex Private Calls.............................................................201
Enabling Private Calls at the Dispatch Console........................................................................201
Configuring Status Transfer Service..................................................................................................... 203
Creating Status Sets in UCM.....................................................................................................203
Enabling Status Transfer Service at the Dispatch Console....................................................... 204
Site Wide Call....................................................................................................................................... 205
Configuring the Site Wide Call in UCM...................................................................................205
Configuring the Tetra Site Controller for Site Wide Calls........................................................208
Deleting Records............................................................................................................................................... 208
Deleting a Radio................................................................................................................................................209
Considerations for Deleting a Talkgroup or Multigroup...................................................................................209
Considerations for Deleting a Radio User.........................................................................................................209
Considerations for Deleting a User Group........................................................................................................ 210
Disabling Records............................................................................................................................................. 210
Disabling a Talkgroup or Multigroup................................................................................................... 210
Disabling a Talkgroup............................................................................................................... 210
Disabling a Multigroup............................................................................................................. 211
Disabling a Radio or Radio User.......................................................................................................................212
Disabling a Radio User..........................................................................................................................212
Removing a Talkgroup from a Multigroup....................................................................................................... 213
Replacing a Radio............................................................................................................................................. 214

Chapter 4: Reference........................................................................................... 215

System Configuration Reference.......................................................................................................................216
System................................................................................................................................................... 216
System – Basic Tab................................................................................................................... 217
 Contents | 15

System – Configuration Tab......................................................................................................218

Data System...........................................................................................................................................225
Advanced Link.......................................................................................................................... 225
Tabs in the Data System Configuration Window......................................................................226
Data System – Basic Tab...........................................................................................................226
Data System – Settings Tab.......................................................................................................228
Data System – Advanced Settings Tab..................................................................................... 230
Data System – GGSN List Tab................................................................................................. 232
Data System – GGSN Mapping Tab......................................................................................... 233
Console System..................................................................................................................................... 234
Console System – Basic Tab..................................................................................................... 234
Console System – Configuration Tab....................................................................................... 235
Analog Conventional System................................................................................................................236
Analog Conventional System – Basic Tab................................................................................236
Analog Conventional System – Configuration Tab.................................................................. 237
Source Site Adjacent Control Channel (ACC)......................................................................................238
Using the Source Site ACC Object........................................................................................... 238
Radio Configuration.................................................................................................................. 239
Site Configuration..................................................................................................................... 239
Source Site ACC Configuration................................................................................................ 239
Source Site ACC – Basic Tab................................................................................................... 239
Source Site ACC – Configuration Tab......................................................................................240
InterZone (IZ) Control Path.................................................................................................................. 241
InterZone Control Path Overview............................................................................................. 241
InterZone (IZ) Control Path Configuration Window................................................................ 241
Key Variable Loader............................................................................................................................. 242
Key Variable Loader – Basic Tab............................................................................................. 242
Key Variable Loader – Configuration Tab................................................................................243
Authentication Center............................................................................................................................243
Authentication Center – Basic Tab........................................................................................... 244
Authentication Center – Configuration Tab..............................................................................245
Zone to Alias Server Map..................................................................................................................... 245
Zone to Alias Server Map – Basic Tab..................................................................................... 246
Zone to Alias Server Map – Configuration Tab........................................................................247
Zone to Short Data Router Map............................................................................................................ 247
Zone to Short Data Router Map – Basic Tab............................................................................ 248
Zone to Short Data Router Map – Configuration Tab...............................................................249
Analog Conventional Configuration................................................................................................................. 249
TRC Command......................................................................................................................................249
TRC Command – Basic Tab..................................................................................................... 250
TRC Command – Configuration Tab........................................................................................251
TRC Segment........................................................................................................................................ 251
TRC Segment – Basic Tab........................................................................................................ 252
TRC Segment – Configuration Tab...........................................................................................253
TRC Sequence.......................................................................................................................................254
TRC Sequence – Basic Tab.......................................................................................................255
TRC Sequence – Configuration Tab......................................................................................... 256
TRC Table............................................................................................................................................. 256
TRC Table – Basic Tab............................................................................................................. 257
TRC Table – Configuration Tab............................................................................................... 258
Consoles Reference........................................................................................................................................... 258
Control Room Head Number................................................................................................................ 259
Control Room Head Number – Basic Tab................................................................................ 259
Control Room Head Number – Configuration Tab...................................................................260
Control Room Head Number – Console User Member List Tab..............................................261
Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile.................................................................................................... 262
16 | Contents

Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab....................................................................262

Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab...................................................... 263
Console User Capabilities Profile......................................................................................................... 266
Console User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab......................................................................... 266
Console User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab............................................................267
Console User Capabilities Profile – Private Call Tab............................................................... 270
Console Private Call Resource.............................................................................................................. 271
Console Private Call Resource – Basic Tab..............................................................................271
Console Private Call Resource – Configuration Tab................................................................ 272
Alert Tone..............................................................................................................................................272
Alert Tone – Basic Tab............................................................................................................. 273
Alert Tone – Configuration Tab................................................................................................273
Alert Tone – Notes Tab............................................................................................................. 274
Subscribers Reference....................................................................................................................................... 274
Using Default Records and Profiles...................................................................................................... 274
Using Default Records.............................................................................................................. 274
Using Profile Objects................................................................................................................ 278
Home Zone Mapping.............................................................................................................................278
Impact of Home Zones.............................................................................................................. 279
Impact on InterZone Trunking.................................................................................................. 279
Versionized Home Zone Mappings in Multicluster Systems....................................................279
Tabs in the Home Zone Mapping Configuration Window........................................................279
Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab............................................................................................ 280
Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab........................................................................... 282
Home Zone Mapping – Group Maps Tab................................................................................. 283
Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab............................................ 284
IHLR Occupancy Window........................................................................................................286
GHRL Occupancy Window...................................................................................................... 287
Radio..................................................................................................................................................... 288
Radio to Radio User Relationship............................................................................................. 288
Radio Configuration Window................................................................................................... 288
Radio User.............................................................................................................................................289
Radio User to Radio Relationship............................................................................................. 290
Radio User – Basic Tab.............................................................................................................290
Radio User – Configuration Tab............................................................................................... 291
Console User......................................................................................................................................... 296
Console User – Basic Tab......................................................................................................... 297
Console User – Configuration Tab............................................................................................298
User Group............................................................................................................................................ 300
User Group – Basic Tab............................................................................................................ 300
User Group – Configuration Tab...............................................................................................301
Radio User Capabilities Profile.............................................................................................................301
Radio User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab.............................................................................302
Radio User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab............................................................... 303
Radio User Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab...................................................................306
Radio User Valid Sites Profile.............................................................................................................. 306
Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab.............................................................................. 306
Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab.................................................................308
Exclusion Class..................................................................................................................................... 308
Exclusion Class – Basic Tab..................................................................................................... 309
Exclusion Class – Configuration Tab........................................................................................310
Radio User Interconnect Profile............................................................................................................ 310
Radio User Interconnect Profile – Basic Tab............................................................................311
Radio User Interconnect Profile – Configuration Tab.............................................................. 312
Talkgroup.............................................................................................................................................. 313
Talkgroup – Basic Tab.............................................................................................................. 313
 Contents | 17

Talkgroup – Configuration Tab.................................................................................................314

Multigroup.............................................................................................................................................315
Multigroup – Basic Tab.............................................................................................................316
Multigroup – Configuration Tab............................................................................................... 317
TG/MG Capabilities Profile.................................................................................................................. 318
TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab.................................................................................. 319
TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab.................................................................... 320
TG/MG Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab........................................................................ 323
TG/MG Valid Sites Profile....................................................................................................................323
TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab................................................................................... 324
TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab......................................................................325
Status Set............................................................................................................................................... 326
Status Set – Basic Tab............................................................................................................... 326
Status Set – Configuration Tab................................................................................................. 327
Storm Plan............................................................................................................................................. 327
Storm Plan – Basic Tab............................................................................................................. 328
Storm Plan – Configuration Tab............................................................................................... 329
Storm Plan Commands..........................................................................................................................329
Storm Plan Commands – Basic Tab..........................................................................................330
Storm Plan Commands – Configuration Tab............................................................................ 331
Load Class............................................................................................................................................. 331
Load Class – Basic Tab............................................................................................................. 332
Load Class – Configuration Tab............................................................................................... 333
Barring Profile.......................................................................................................................................333
Barring Profile – Basic Tab.......................................................................................................334
Barring Profile – Configuration Tab......................................................................................... 335
Object Group Definition........................................................................................................................336
Object Group Definition – Basic Tab........................................................................................336
Object Group Definition – Configuration Tab.......................................................................... 337
Object Group Subject............................................................................................................................ 338
Object Group Subject – Basic Tab............................................................................................ 339
Object Group Subject – Configuration Tab.............................................................................. 340
Object Group Instance...........................................................................................................................341
Object Group Instance – Basic Tab...........................................................................................341
Object Group Instance – Configuration Tab............................................................................. 342
Security Reference............................................................................................................................................ 343
Security Group...................................................................................................................................... 343
Refreshing the Security Group List...........................................................................................344
User....................................................................................................................................................... 344
Tabs in the User Configuration Window.................................................................................. 344
User – Basic Tab....................................................................................................................... 345
User – Configuration Tab..........................................................................................................346
User – Zone Access Tab............................................................................................................348
User – Application Access Tab................................................................................................. 349
User – Security Group Access Tab........................................................................................... 350
User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab...................................................................352
CAD User.............................................................................................................................................. 354
Tabs in the CAD User Configuration Window......................................................................... 354
CAD User – Basic Tab..............................................................................................................355
CAD User – Security Group Access Tab..................................................................................356
CAD User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab......................................................... 357
User Password....................................................................................................................................... 358
ZoneWatch Configuration Reference................................................................................................................359
How to Use ZoneWatch Filters............................................................................................................. 359
Levels of Data....................................................................................................................................... 359
ZW Message Qualifier Filter.................................................................................................................360
18 | Contents

ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Basic Tab.................................................................................360

ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Configuration Tab................................................................... 361
ZW Message Set Filter.......................................................................................................................... 361
ZW Message Set Filter – Basic Tab..........................................................................................362
ZW Message Set Filter – Subscriber Tab..................................................................................363
ZW Message Set Filter – Dispatcher Tab................................................................................. 365
ZW Message Set Filter – Infrastructure Tab............................................................................. 367
ZW Raw Data Filter.............................................................................................................................. 368
ZW Raw Data Filter – Basic Tab.............................................................................................. 368
ZW Raw Data Filter – Subscriber Tab......................................................................................369
ZW Raw Data Filter – Infrastructure Tab................................................................................. 371
ZW Site Filter........................................................................................................................................372
Exception...................................................................................................................................372
ZW Site Filter – Basic Tab........................................................................................................372
ZW Site Filter – Configuration Tab.......................................................................................... 373
ZW Channel Filter.................................................................................................................................373
ZW Channel Filter – Basic Tab.................................................................................................374
ZW Channel Filter – Configuration Tab................................................................................... 375
ZW Radio ID Filter............................................................................................................................... 375
ZW Radio ID Filter – Basic Tab............................................................................................... 376
ZW Radio ID Filter – Configuration Tab..................................................................................377
ZW Radio Range Filter......................................................................................................................... 377
ZW Radio Range Filter – Basic Tab......................................................................................... 378
ZW Radio Range Filter – Configuration Tab............................................................................379
ZW TG/MG ID Filter............................................................................................................................ 379
ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Basic Tab............................................................................................380
ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Configuration Tab.............................................................................. 381
ZW TG/MG Range Filter...................................................................................................................... 381
ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Basic Tab......................................................................................381
ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Configuration Tab........................................................................ 382
ZW Watch Window Definition............................................................................................................. 382
Displaying Windows in ZoneWatch......................................................................................... 383
Changing Definitions................................................................................................................ 383
Tabs in the ZW Watch Window Definition Configuration Window........................................ 383
ZW Watch Window Definition – Basic Tab............................................................................. 384
ZW Watch Window Definition – Configuration Tab............................................................... 385
ZW Watch Window Definition – Message/Raw Data Tab.......................................................386
ZW Watch Window Definition – Single Site Scroll Tab..........................................................387
ZW Watch Window Definition – Raw Data Display Tab.........................................................388
ZW Watch Window Definition – Site Filters Tab.................................................................... 389
ZW Watch Window Definition – Channel Filters Tab............................................................. 390
ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio ID Filters Tab............................................................391
ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio Range Filters Tab......................................................392
ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG ID Filters Tab.........................................................393
ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG Range Filters Tab...................................................394
ZW Watch Profile................................................................................................................................. 394
ZW Watch Profile – Basic Tab................................................................................................. 395
ZW Watch Profile – Configuration Tab....................................................................................396
ZW Global Configuration..................................................................................................................... 396
ZW Global Configuration – Basic Tab..................................................................................... 397
ZW Global Configuration – Configuration Tab........................................................................398
External Configuration Reference.....................................................................................................................399
External Zones.......................................................................................................................................399
Creating and Deleting................................................................................................................399
External Zones Configuration Window.................................................................................... 399
External RF Sites...................................................................................................................................400
 Contents | 19

Creating and Deleting................................................................................................................400

External RF Sites Configuration Window.................................................................................400
External Call Routes..............................................................................................................................401
Creating and Deleting................................................................................................................401
External Call Routes – Basic Tab..............................................................................................402
External Call Routes – Configuration Tab................................................................................ 403
External Short Data Router................................................................................................................... 404
Creating and Deleting................................................................................................................404
External Short Data Router Configuration Window................................................................. 404
20 | Contents
 List of Figures | 21

List of Figures
Figure 1: UCM Cluster-Level and Zone-Level Configuration .......................................................48
Figure 2: Classes of Objects ........................................................................................................... 49
Figure 3: System Configuration Objects ........................................................................................ 50
Figure 4: Consoles Objects ............................................................................................................. 51
Figure 5: Subscriber Objects .......................................................................................................... 52
Figure 6: Security Objects .............................................................................................................. 54
Figure 7: ZoneWatch Configuration Objects ..................................................................................55
Figure 8: External Configuration Objects .......................................................................................56
Figure 9: UCM Main Window Structure ........................................................................................57
Figure 10: Class Based Navigation Example ................................................................................. 60
Figure 11: Instance Based Navigation Example .............................................................................61
Figure 12: Example of a Configuration Window ........................................................................... 65
Figure 13: Values Button ................................................................................................................65
Figure 14: Change Indicator ........................................................................................................... 67
Figure 15: Required Field Indicator ............................................................................................... 67
Figure 16: Example of a Report Window .......................................................................................67
Figure 17: Example of Report Results ............................................................................................69
Figure 18: Example of a Find Window .......................................................................................... 70
Figure 19: Warning Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 71
Figure 20: Example of Find Results ............................................................................................... 72
Figure 21: Example of a Values Window .......................................................................................73
Figure 22: Example of Values Results ........................................................................................... 75
Figure 23: Warning Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 75
Figure 24: Example of a Security Groups Selection Window ........................................................76
Figure 25: Example of a Home Zone Processing Status Window ..................................................77
Figure 26: System Object ............................................................................................................... 81
Figure 27: System Configuration Window .....................................................................................82
Figure 28: System - Configuration Tab .......................................................................................... 83
Figure 29: Data System Object .......................................................................................................84
Figure 30: Data System Configuration Window ............................................................................ 84
Figure 31: Data System – Settings Tab .......................................................................................... 85
Figure 32: Data System Advanced Settings Tab ............................................................................ 86
22 | List of Figures

Figure 33: Data System GGSN List Tab ........................................................................................ 86

Figure 34: Data System GGSN Mapping Tab ................................................................................ 87
Figure 35: User Configuration Manager Window ..........................................................................87
Figure 36: Example of the User Configuration Manager ............................................................... 89
Figure 37: Primary Talkgroup Assignment .................................................................................... 90
Figure 38: Windows Explorer ........................................................................................................ 94
Figure 39: UCM Main Window ..................................................................................................... 95
Figure 40: New Configuration Window ......................................................................................... 96
Figure 41: Save As Configuration Window ................................................................................... 98
Figure 42: Open Configuration Window ........................................................................................ 99
Figure 43: Example of a Select All Configuration Window ........................................................ 100
Figure 44: Example of Applying Changes to Specific Parameters in the Radio User Object ......101
Figure 45: Confirmation Dialog Box ............................................................................................101
Figure 46: Report Window – Default Example ............................................................................ 104
Figure 47: Report Results Window – Default Example ............................................................... 105
Figure 48: Report Result Printing Version ................................................................................... 105
Figure 49: Report Window – Narrowed Example ........................................................................ 106
Figure 50: Report Window – Default Example ............................................................................ 107
Figure 51: Report Results Window – Default Example ............................................................... 108
Figure 52: Result Report – Printing Version ................................................................................ 108
Figure 53: Find Window ...............................................................................................................109
Figure 54: Find Results Window .................................................................................................. 110
Figure 55: Values Window ........................................................................................................... 111
Figure 56: Values Results Window .............................................................................................. 112
Figure 57: Security Groups Selection Window ............................................................................ 112
Figure 58: Security Groups Selection Window – Selected Example ........................................... 113
Figure 59: Home Zone Map Processing State Window ............................................................... 113
Figure 60: Zone to AS Map – Basic Tab ...................................................................................... 114
Figure 61: Zone to AS Map – Configuration Tab ........................................................................ 115
Figure 62: Zone to SDR Map – Basic Tab ................................................................................... 116
Figure 63: Zone to SDR Map – Configuration Tab ......................................................................116
Figure 64: Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab .............................................................................. 119
Figure 65: Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab .............................................................120
Figure 66: Home Zone Mapping – Group Maps Tab ................................................................... 121
Figure 67: Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab .............................. 122
 List of Figures | 23

Figure 68: Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab .............................................................................. 123

Figure 69: Map Version for Maps being Submitted Window ...................................................... 124
Figure 70: Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab .............................................................................. 125
Figure 71: Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab .............................................................126
Figure 72: Home Zone Mapping – Group Maps Tab ................................................................... 127
Figure 73: Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab .............................. 128
Figure 74: Example of a Home Zone Mapping Views in UCM Main Window .......................... 129
Figure 75: Example of a Generated HLR Report ......................................................................... 130
Figure 76: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab ....................................................................131
Figure 77: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab ...................................................... 132
Figure 78: TG/MG Capabilities Profile User Group Tab ............................................................. 134
Figure 79: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab ..................................................................... 135
Figure 80: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab ........................................................136
Figure 81: Status Set Basic Tab ....................................................................................................137
Figure 82: Status Set Configuration Tab ...................................................................................... 138
Figure 83: Radio User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab ...............................................................139
Figure 84: Radio User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab ................................................. 140
Figure 85: Radio User Capabilities Profile User Group Tab ........................................................142
Figure 86: Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab ................................................................ 143
Figure 87: Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab .................................................. 144
Figure 88: Exclusion Class – Basic Tab ....................................................................................... 145
Figure 89: Exclusion Class – Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 146
Figure 90: Radio User Interconnect Profile – Basic Tab ..............................................................147
Figure 91: Radio User Interconnect Profile – Configuration Tab ................................................ 148
Figure 92: Control Room Head Number – Basic Tab .................................................................. 150
Figure 93: Control Room Head Number – Configuration Tab .....................................................150
Figure 94: Control Room Head Number – Console User Member List Tab ................................152
Figure 95: Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Basic Tab .........................................................153
Figure 96: Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab ........................................... 154
Figure 97: Console User Capabilities Profile Basic Tab .............................................................. 156
Figure 98: Console User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab ................................................ 157
Figure 99: Console User Capabilities Profile Private Call Tab .................................................... 159
Figure 100: Alert Tone – Basic Tab ............................................................................................. 161
Figure 101: Alert Tone – Configuration Tab ................................................................................161
Figure 102: Alert Tone – Notes Tab .............................................................................................161
24 | List of Figures

Figure 103: Console User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab .............................................. 162
Figure 104: Console User Basic Tab ............................................................................................ 163
Figure 105: Console User Configuration Tab .............................................................................. 164
Figure 106: Console Private Call Resource Basic Tab .................................................................165
Figure 107: Console Private Call Resource Configuration Tab ................................................... 166
Figure 108: User Group Basic Tab ............................................................................................... 167
Figure 109: User Group Configuration Tab ................................................................................. 168
Figure 110: Multigroup – Basic Tab ............................................................................................ 170
Figure 111: Multigroup – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 171
Figure 112: Radio Configuration Window ................................................................................... 173
Figure 113: Radio User – Basic Tab .............................................................................................174
Figure 114: Radio User – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 175
Figure 115: Radio Configuration Window ................................................................................... 178
Figure 116: Storm Plan – Basic Tab .............................................................................................179
Figure 117: Storm Plan – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 180
Figure 118: Storm Plan Commands - Basic Tab .......................................................................... 181
Figure 119: Storm Plan Commands – Configuration Tab ............................................................ 182
Figure 120: Load Class – Basic Tab .............................................................................................184
Figure 121: Load Class – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 184
Figure 122: BIC/BOC Profile Creation ........................................................................................ 185
Figure 123: Barring Profile – Basic Tab .......................................................................................185
Figure 124: Barring Profile – Basic Tab .......................................................................................186
Figure 125: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 186
Figure 126: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 187
Figure 127: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab – Add Row Options ........................................ 188
Figure 128: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 188
Figure 129: Radio User Capabilities Profile Window – Configuration Tab ................................ 190
Figure 130: Radio User Capabilities Profile Window – Configuration Tab ................................ 192
Figure 131: Console User Capabilities Profile Window – Configuration Tab .............................193
Figure 132: Radio User Window – Configuration Tab ................................................................ 194
Figure 133: Console User Window – Configuration Tab .............................................................195
Figure 134: Set Up Resources Window ........................................................................................196
Figure 135: Set Up Features Window .......................................................................................... 196
Figure 136: Radio User Window – Configuration Tab ................................................................ 197
Figure 137: Console User Window – Configuration Tab .............................................................198
 List of Figures | 25

Figure 138: Set Up Resources Window ........................................................................................199

Figure 139: Set Up Features Window .......................................................................................... 199
Figure 140: Radio User Window – Configuration Tab ................................................................ 200
Figure 141: Console User Window – Configuration Tab .............................................................201
Figure 142: Set Up Resources Window ........................................................................................202
Figure 143: Set Up Features Window .......................................................................................... 202
Figure 144: Status Set Window – Basic Tab ................................................................................ 203
Figure 145: Status Set Window – Configuration Tab .................................................................. 204
Figure 146: Set Up Resources Window ........................................................................................204
Figure 147: Set Up Features Window .......................................................................................... 205
Figure 148: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Window – Configuration Tab ....................................... 206
Figure 149: TG/MG Capabilities Profile Window – Configuration Tab ..................................... 207
Figure 150: Talkgroup Window – Configuration Tab ..................................................................208
Figure 151: Delete Record ............................................................................................................209
Figure 152: Talkgroup – Configuration Tab ................................................................................ 211
Figure 153: Multigroup – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 212
Figure 154: Radio User – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 213
Figure 155: Multigroup – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 214
Figure 156: User Configuration Manager Main Window ............................................................ 216
Figure 157: System – Basic Tab ................................................................................................... 217
Figure 158: System – Configuration Tab ..................................................................................... 218
Figure 159: Advanced Link .......................................................................................................... 226
Figure 160: Data System – Basic Tab .......................................................................................... 227
Figure 161: Data System – Settings Tab ...................................................................................... 228
Figure 162: Data System – Advanced Settings Tab ..................................................................... 230
Figure 163: Data System – GGSN List Tab ................................................................................. 232
Figure 164: Data System – GGSN Mapping Tab ......................................................................... 233
Figure 165: Console System – Basic Tab .....................................................................................234
Figure 166: Console System – Configuration Tab ....................................................................... 235
Figure 167: Analog Conventional System – Basic Tab ................................................................236
Figure 168: Analog Conventional System – Configuration Tab .................................................. 237
Figure 169: Source Site ACC – Basic Tab ................................................................................... 239
Figure 170: Source Site ACC – Configuration Tab ......................................................................240
Figure 171: InterZone Control Path Configuration Window ....................................................... 241
Figure 172: Key Variable Loader – Basic Tab ............................................................................. 242
26 | List of Figures

Figure 173: Key Variable Loader – Configuration Tab ............................................................... 243

Figure 174: Authentication Center – Basic Tab ........................................................................... 244
Figure 175: Authentication Center – Configuration Tab ..............................................................245
Figure 176: Zone to Alias Server Map – Basic Tab ..................................................................... 246
Figure 177: Zone to Alias Server Map – Configuration Tab ........................................................247
Figure 178: Zone to Alias Server Map – Basic Tab ..................................................................... 248
Figure 179: Zone to Short Data Router Map – Configuration Tab .............................................. 249
Figure 180: TRC Command – Basic Tab ..................................................................................... 250
Figure 181: TRC Command – Configuration Tab ........................................................................251
Figure 182: TRC Segment – Basic Tab ........................................................................................ 252
Figure 183: TRC Segment – Configuration Tab .......................................................................... 253
Figure 184: TRC Sequence – Basic Tab .......................................................................................255
Figure 185: TRC Sequence – Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 256
Figure 186: TRC Table – Basic Tab .............................................................................................257
Figure 187: TRC Table – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 258
Figure 188: CRHN – Basic Tab ....................................................................................................259
Figure 189: CRHN – Configuration Tab ...................................................................................... 260
Figure 190: CRHN – Console User Member List Tab ................................................................. 261
Figure 191: Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab ....................................................262
Figure 192: Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab ...................................... 263
Figure 193: Console User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab ......................................................... 266
Figure 194: Console User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab ........................................... 267
Figure 195: Console User Capabilities Profile – Private Call Tab ............................................... 270
Figure 196: Console Private Call Resource – Basic Tab ..............................................................271
Figure 197: Console Private Call Resource – Configuration Tab ................................................ 272
Figure 198: Alert Tone – Basic Tab ............................................................................................. 273
Figure 199: Alert Tone – Configuration Tab ................................................................................273
Figure 200: Alert Tone – Notes Tab .............................................................................................274
Figure 201: Default Record Example ........................................................................................... 275
Figure 202: Subscriber Objects Mapped to Profiles .....................................................................278
Figure 203: Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab ............................................................................ 280
Figure 204: Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab ...........................................................282
Figure 205: Home Zone Mapping Group Maps Tab .................................................................... 283
Figure 206: Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab ............................ 284
Figure 207: IHLR Occupancy Window ........................................................................................286
 List of Figures | 27

Figure 208: GHLR Occupancy Window ...................................................................................... 287

Figure 209: Radio Configuration Window ................................................................................... 288
Figure 210: Radio User – Basic Tab .............................................................................................290
Figure 211: Radio User – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 291
Figure 212: Console User – Basic Tab ......................................................................................... 297
Figure 213: Console User – Configuration Tab ........................................................................... 298
Figure 214: User Group Basic Tab ............................................................................................... 300
Figure 215: User Group – Configuration Tab .............................................................................. 301
Figure 216: Radio User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab .............................................................302
Figure 217: Radio User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab ............................................... 303
Figure 218: Radio User Capabilities Profile User Group Tab ......................................................306
Figure 219: Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab .............................................................. 307
Figure 220: Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab ................................................ 308
Figure 221: Exclusion Class – Basic Tab ..................................................................................... 309
Figure 222: Exclusion Class – Configuration Tab ....................................................................... 310
Figure 223: Radio User Interconnect Profile – Basic Tab ............................................................311
Figure 224: Radio User Interconnect Profile – Configuration Tab .............................................. 312
Figure 225: Talkgroup – Basic Tab .............................................................................................. 313
Figure 226: Talkgroup – Configuration Tab ................................................................................ 314
Figure 227: Multigroup – Basic Tab ............................................................................................ 316
Figure 228: Multigroup – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 317
Figure 229: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab ..................................................................319
Figure 230: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab .................................................... 320
Figure 231: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab ........................................................ 323
Figure 232: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab ................................................................... 324
Figure 233: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab ......................................................325
Figure 234: Status Set – Basic Tab ...............................................................................................326
Figure 235: Status Set – Configuration Tab ................................................................................. 327
Figure 236: Storm Plan – Basic Tab .............................................................................................328
Figure 237: Storm Plan – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 329
Figure 238: Storm Plan Commands – Basic Tab ..........................................................................330
Figure 239: Storm Plan Commands – Configuration Tab ............................................................ 331
Figure 240: Load Class – Basic Tab .............................................................................................332
Figure 241: Load Class – Configuration Tab ............................................................................... 333
Figure 242: Barring Profile – Basic Tab .......................................................................................334
28 | List of Figures

Figure 243: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab ......................................................................... 335

Figure 244: Object Group Definition – Basic Tab ....................................................................... 336
Figure 245: Object Group Definition – Configuration Tab ..........................................................337
Figure 246: Object Group Subject – Basic Tab ............................................................................339
Figure 247: Object Group Subject – Configuration Tab .............................................................. 340
Figure 248: Object Group Instance – Basic Tab ...........................................................................341
Figure 249: Object Group Instance – Configuration Tab ............................................................. 342
Figure 250: Security Group Configuration Window .................................................................... 344
Figure 251: User – Basic Tab ....................................................................................................... 345
Figure 252: User – Configuration Tab ..........................................................................................346
Figure 253: User – Zone Access Tab ........................................................................................... 348
Figure 254: User – Application Access Tab .................................................................................349
Figure 255: User – Security Group Access Tab ........................................................................... 350
Figure 256: User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab ...................................................352
Figure 257: CAD User – Basic Tab ..............................................................................................355
Figure 258: CAD User – Security Group Access Tab ..................................................................356
Figure 259: CAD User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab ......................................... 357
Figure 260: User Password Configuration Window .....................................................................358
Figure 261: ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Basic Tab ................................................................ 360
Figure 262: ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Configuration Tab ...................................................361
Figure 263: ZW Message Set Filter – Basic Tab ..........................................................................362
Figure 264: ZW Message Set Filter – Subscriber Tab ................................................................. 363
Figure 265: ZW Message Set Filter – Dispatcher Tab ................................................................. 365
Figure 266: ZW Message Set Filter – Infrastructure Tab .............................................................367
Figure 267: ZW Raw Data Filter – Basic Tab .............................................................................. 368
Figure 268: ZW Raw Data Filter – Subscriber Tab ......................................................................369
Figure 269: ZW Raw Data Filter – Infrastructure Tab ................................................................. 371
Figure 270: ZW Site Filter – Basic Tab ........................................................................................372
Figure 271: ZW Site Filter – Configuration Tab .......................................................................... 373
Figure 272: ZW Channel Filter – Basic Tab ................................................................................ 374
Figure 273: ZW Channel Filter – Configuration Tab ................................................................... 375
Figure 274: ZW Radio ID Filter – Basic Tab ............................................................................... 376
Figure 275: ZW Radio ID Filter – Configuration Tab ................................................................. 377
Figure 276: ZW Radio Range Filter – Basic Tab ......................................................................... 378
Figure 277: ZW Radio Range Filter – Configuration Tab ........................................................... 379
 List of Figures | 29

Figure 278: ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Basic Tab ............................................................................380

Figure 279: ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Configuration Tab .............................................................. 381
Figure 280: ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Basic Tab ......................................................................381
Figure 281: ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Configuration Tab ........................................................ 382
Figure 282: ZW Watch Window Definition – Basic Tab .............................................................384
Figure 283: ZW Watch Window Definition – Configuration Tab ............................................... 385
Figure 284: ZW Watch Window Definition – Message/Raw Data Tab .......................................386
Figure 285: ZW Watch Window Definition – Single Site Scroll Tab ..........................................387
Figure 286: ZW Watch Window Definition – Raw Data Display Tab ........................................ 388
Figure 287: ZW Watch Window Definition – Site Filters Tab .................................................... 389
Figure 288: ZW Watch Window Definition – Channel Filters Tab ............................................. 390
Figure 289: ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio ID Filters Tab ............................................391
Figure 290: ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio Range Filters Tab ......................................392
Figure 291: ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG ID Filters Tab ........................................ 393
Figure 292: ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG Range Filters Tab .................................. 394
Figure 293: Watch Profiles ........................................................................................................... 395
Figure 294: ZW Watch Profile – Basic Tab ................................................................................. 395
Figure 295: ZW Watch Profile – Configuration Tab ....................................................................396
Figure 296: ZW Global Configuration – Basic Tab ..................................................................... 397
Figure 297: ZW Global Configuration – Configuration Tab ........................................................398
Figure 298: External Zones – Basic Tab ...................................................................................... 399
Figure 299: External RF Sites Configuration Window ................................................................ 400
Figure 300: External Call Route – Basic Tab ............................................................................... 402
Figure 301: External Call Routes – Configuration Tab ................................................................403
Figure 302: External Short Data Router Configuration Window ................................................. 404
30 | List of Figures
 List of Tables | 31

List of Tables
Table 1: List of Telephone Numbers ................................................................................................ 7
Table 2: Role of the UCM .............................................................................................................. 48
Table 3: System Configuration Objects ..........................................................................................50
Table 4: Consoles Objects .............................................................................................................. 51
Table 5: Subscriber Objects ............................................................................................................52
Table 6: Security Objects ................................................................................................................54
Table 7: ZoneWatch Configuration Objects ...................................................................................55
Table 8: External Configuration Objects ........................................................................................ 56
Table 9: User-Configurable Objects ............................................................................................... 58
Table 10: Instance Based Navigation – List Pane Information ...................................................... 61
Table 11: UCM Main Window Menu Options ...............................................................................63
Table 12: Action Buttons ................................................................................................................65
Table 13: Dynamic Table Buttons .................................................................................................. 66
Table 14: Extended Table Buttons – Add Row Options ................................................................ 66
Table 15: Report Window Check Boxes ........................................................................................ 68
Table 16: Drop-Down List for Report Window ............................................................................. 68
Table 17: Action Buttons ................................................................................................................69
Table 18: Drop-Down List for Find Window .................................................................................71
Table 19: Action Buttons ................................................................................................................71
Table 20: Drop-Down List for Values Window ............................................................................. 74
Table 21: Action Buttons ................................................................................................................74
Table 22: Security Groups Selection Window Check Boxes ......................................................... 76
Table 23: Parameters for the Zone Database Server State Table ................................................... 77
Table 24: Values for the Map Processing State Field .....................................................................77
Table 25: Tasks Involved in Adding a User Group ...................................................................... 166
Table 26: ID Ranges ..................................................................................................................... 169
Table 27: Tasks Involved in Adding a Multigroup ...................................................................... 169
Table 28: Tasks Involved in Adding a Radio ............................................................................... 172
Table 29: Tasks Involved in Adding a Radio User .......................................................................174
Table 30: Types of Predefined Load Classes ................................................................................183
Table 31: Tasks Involved in Replacing a Radio ........................................................................... 214
Table 32: Parameters for the System – Basic Tab ........................................................................ 217
32 | List of Tables

Table 33: Parameters for the System – Configuration Tab .......................................................... 219
Table 34: Tabs in the Data System Configuration Window .........................................................226
Table 35: Parameters for the Data System – Basic Tab ............................................................... 227
Table 36: Parameters for the Data System – Settings Tab ........................................................... 228
Table 37: Parameters for the Data System – Advanced Settings Tab .......................................... 231
Table 38: Parameters for the Data System – GGSN List Tab ...................................................... 232
Table 39: Parameters for the Data System – GGSN Mapping Tab .............................................. 233
Table 40: Parameters for the Console System – Basic Tab ..........................................................234
Table 41: Parameters for the Console System – Configuration Tab ............................................ 235
Table 42: Parameters for the Analog Conventional System – Basic Tab .....................................237
Table 43: Parameters for the Analog Conventional System – Configuration Tab ....................... 237
Table 44: Parameters for the Source Site ACC – Basic Tab ........................................................ 239
Table 45: Parameters for the Source Site ACC – Configuration Tab ...........................................240
Table 46: Parameters for the InterZone Control Path Configuration Window .............................241
Table 47: Parameters for the Key Variable Loader – Basic Tab .................................................. 242
Table 48: Parameters for the Key Variable Loader – Configuration Tab .................................... 243
Table 49: Parameters for Authentication Center – Basic Tab ...................................................... 244
Table 50: Parameters for the Authentication Center – Configuration Tab ...................................245
Table 51: Parameters for Zone to Alias Server Map – Basic Tab ................................................ 246
Table 52: Parameters for the Zone to Alias Server – Configuration Tab ..................................... 247
Table 53: Parameters for Zone to Short Data Router Map – Basic Tab .......................................248
Table 54: Parameters for the Zone to Short Data Router – Configuration Tab ............................249
Table 55: Parameters for the TRC Command – Basic Tab .......................................................... 250
Table 56: Parameters for the TRC Command – Configuration Tab .............................................251
Table 57: Parameters for the TRC Segment – Basic Tab ............................................................. 252
Table 58: Parameters for the TRC Segment – Configuration Tab ............................................... 253
Table 59: Parameters for the TRC Sequence – Basic Tab ............................................................255
Table 60: Parameters for the TRC Sequence – Configuration Tab .............................................. 256
Table 61: Parameters for the TRC Table – Basic Tab ..................................................................257
Table 62: Parameters for the TRC Table – Configuration Tab .................................................... 258
Table 63: Parameters for the CRHN – Basic Tab .........................................................................259
Table 64: Parameters for the CRHN – Configuration Tab ........................................................... 260
Table 65: Parameters for the CRHN – Console User Member List Tab ...................................... 261
Table 66: Parameters for the Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab .........................262
Table 67: Parameters for the Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab ........... 264
 List of Tables | 33

Table 68: Parameters for the Console User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab .............................. 266
Table 69: Parameters for the Console User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab .................267
Table 70: Parameters for the Console User Capabilities Profile – Private Call Tab .................... 270
Table 71: Parameters for the Console Private Call Resource – Basic Tab ...................................272
Table 72: Parameters for the Console Private Call Resource – Configuration Tab ..................... 272
Table 73: Parameters for the Alert Tone – Basic Tab .................................................................. 273
Table 74: Parameters for the Alert Tone – Configuration Tab .....................................................273
Table 75: Parameters for the Alert Tone – Notes Tab ..................................................................274
Table 76: List of Objects with Default Records ........................................................................... 275
Table 77: Default Records ............................................................................................................ 276
Table 78: Tabs in the Home Zone Mapping Configuration Window ...........................................280
Table 79: Parameters for the Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab ................................................. 280
Table 80: Parameters for the Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab ................................282
Table 81: Parameters for the Home Zone Mapping – Group Maps Tab ...................................... 283
Table 82: Parameters for the Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab . 285
Table 83: Parameters for the IHLR Occupancy Window .............................................................286
Table 84: Parameters for the GHLR Occupancy Window ........................................................... 287
Table 85: Parameters for the Radio Configuration Window ........................................................ 289
Table 86: Parameters for the Radio User – Basic Tab ..................................................................290
Table 87: Parameters for the Radio User – Configuration Tab .................................................... 291
Table 88: Parameters for the Console User – Basic Tab .............................................................. 297
Table 89: Parameters for the Console User – Configuration Tab .................................................299
Table 90: Parameters for the User Group – Basic Tab ................................................................. 301
Table 91: Parameters for the User Group – Configuration Tab ................................................... 301
Table 92: Parameters for the Radio User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab ..................................302
Table 93: Parameters for the Radio User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab .................... 303
Table 94: Parameters for the Radio User Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab ........................306
Table 95: Parameters for the Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab ................................... 307
Table 96: Parameters for the Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab ......................308
Table 97: Parameters for the Exclusion Class – Basic Tab .......................................................... 309
Table 98: Parameters for the Exclusion Class – Configuration Tab .............................................310
Table 99: Parameters for the Radio User Interconnect Profile – Basic Tab .................................311
Table 100: Parameters for the Radio User Interconnect Profile – Configuration Tab ................. 312
Table 101: Parameters for the Talkgroup – Basic Tab ................................................................. 313
Table 102: Parameters for the Talkgroup – Configuration Tab ....................................................314
34 | List of Tables

Table 103: Parameters for the Multigroup – Basic Tab ................................................................316

Table 104: Parameters for the Multigroup – Configuration Tab .................................................. 317
Table 105: Parameters for the TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab .....................................319
Table 106: Parameters for the TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab ....................... 320
Table 107: Parameters for the TG/MG Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab ........................... 323
Table 108: Parameters for the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab ...................................... 324
Table 109: Parameters for the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab .........................325
Table 110: Parameters for the Status Set – Basic Tab ..................................................................326
Table 111: Parameters for the Status Set – Configuration Tab .................................................... 327
Table 112: Parameters for the Storm Plan – Basic Tab ................................................................328
Table 113: Parameters for the Storm Plan – Configuration Tab .................................................. 329
Table 114: Parameters for the Storm Plan Commands – Basic Tab .............................................330
Table 115: Parameters for the Storm Plan Commands – Configuration Tab ............................... 331
Table 116: Parameters for the Load Class – Basic Tab ................................................................332
Table 117: Parameters for the Load Class – Configuration Tab .................................................. 333
Table 118: Parameters for the Barring Profile – Basic Tab ..........................................................334
Table 119: Parameters for the Barring Profile – Configuration Tab ............................................ 335
Table 120: Parameters for the Object Group Definition – Basic Tab .......................................... 336
Table 121: Parameters for the Object Group Definition – Configuration Tab .............................337
Table 122: Parameters for the Object Group Subject – Basic Tab ...............................................339
Table 123: Parameters for the Object Group Subject – Configuration Tab ................................. 340
Table 124: Parameters for the Object Group Instance – Basic Tab ..............................................341
Table 125: Parameters for the Object Group Instance – Configuration Tab ................................ 343
Table 126: Parameters for the Security Group Configuration Window ....................................... 344
Table 127: Tabs in the User Configuration Window ....................................................................345
Table 128: Parameters for the User – Basic Tab .......................................................................... 345
Table 129: Parameters for the User – Configuration Tab .............................................................347
Table 130: Parameters for the User – Zone Access Tab ...............................................................348
Table 131: Parameters for the User – Application Access Tab ....................................................349
Table 132: Parameters for the User – Security Group Access Tab .............................................. 350
Table 133: Parameters for the User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab ......................352
Table 134: Tabs in the CAD User Configuration Window .......................................................... 354
Table 135: Parameters for the CAD User – Basic Tab .................................................................355
Table 136: Parameters for the CAD User – Security Group Access Tab .....................................356
Table 137: Parameters for the CAD User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab ............ 357
 List of Tables | 35

Table 138: Parameters for the User Password Configuration Window ........................................358
Table 139: Profile Levels of Data .................................................................................................359
Table 140: Parameters for the ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Basic Tab ................................... 360
Table 141: Parameters for the ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Configuration Tab ......................361
Table 142: Parameters for the ZW Message Set Filter – Basic Tab .............................................362
Table 143: Parameters for the ZW Message Set Filter – Subscriber Tab .....................................363
Table 144: Parameters for the ZW Message Set Filter – Dispatcher Tab .................................... 365
Table 145: Parameters for the ZW Message Set Filter – Infrastructure Tab ................................367
Table 146: Parameters for the ZW Raw Data Filter – Basic Tab ................................................. 368
Table 147: Parameters for the ZW Raw Data Filter – Subscriber Tab .........................................369
Table 148: Parameters for the ZW Raw Data Filter – Infrastructure Tab .................................... 371
Table 149: Parameters for the ZW Site Filter – Basic Tab ...........................................................372
Table 150: Parameters for the ZW Site Filter – Configuration Tab ............................................. 373
Table 151: Parameters for the ZW Channel Filter – Basic Tab ....................................................374
Table 152: Parameters for the ZW Channel Filter – Configuration Tab ...................................... 375
Table 153: Parameters for the ZW Radio ID Filter – Basic Tab .................................................. 376
Table 154: Parameters for the ZW Radio ID Filter – Configuration Tab .....................................377
Table 155: Parameters for the ZW Radio Range Filter – Basic Tab ............................................ 378
Table 156: Parameters for the ZW Radio Range Filter – Configuration Tab ...............................379
Table 157: Parameters for the ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Basic Tab ...............................................380
Table 158: Parameters for the ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Configuration Tab ................................. 381
Table 159: Parameters for the ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Basic Tab .........................................382
Table 160: Parameters for the ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Configuration Tab ........................... 382
Table 161: Tabs on the ZW Watch Window Definition Configuration Window ........................ 383
Table 162: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Basic Tab ................................384
Table 163: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Configuration Tab .................. 385
Table 164: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Message/Raw Data Tab ..........386
Table 165: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Single Site Scroll Tab .............387
Table 166: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Raw Data Display Tab ........... 388
Table 167: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Site Filters Tab ....................... 389
Table 168: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Channel Filters Tab ................ 390
Table 169: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio ID Filters Tab ...............391
Table 170: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio Range Filters Tab .........392
Table 171: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG ID Filters Tab ........... 393
Table 172: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG Range Filters Tab ..... 394
36 | List of Tables

Table 173: Parameters for the ZW Watch Profile - Basic Tab .....................................................395
Table 174: Parameters for the ZW Watch Profile – Configuration Tab .......................................396
Table 175: Parameters for the ZW Global Configuration – Basic Tab ........................................ 397
Table 176: Parameters for the ZW Configuration – Configuration Tab .......................................398
Table 177: Parameters for the External Zones – Basic Tab ......................................................... 399
Table 178: Parameters for the External RF Sites Configuration Window ................................... 400
Table 179: Parameters for the External Call Route – Basic Tab .................................................. 402
Table 180: Parameters for the External Call Routes – Configuration Tab ...................................403
Table 181: Parameters for the External Short Data Router Configuration Window .................... 404
List of Processes
Radio Command Configuration Requirements .............................................................................. 88
Committing Changes .................................................................................................................... 101
Committing Changes to a Group of Console Site Records .......................................................... 102
Rolling Back to Previously Committed Values ............................................................................102
Reporting Group Status ................................................................................................................ 102
Versionized Home Zone Mappings in Multicluster Systems ....................................................... 118
Accessing Home Zone Mappings Views ......................................................................................129
Configuring Consoles and Console Users .................................................................................... 149
Creating Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile, Talkgroups, and Multigroups ............................152
Creating Console Users ................................................................................................................ 156
Creating Storm Plans and Storm Plan Commands ....................................................................... 179
Setting Up Preemptive Priority Calls ........................................................................................... 189
Setting Up Ambient Listening ...................................................................................................... 197
Configuring the System for Full Duplex Private Calls .................................................................200
Configuring Status Transfer Service ............................................................................................ 203
Site Wide Call ...............................................................................................................................205

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

List of Procedures
Configuring System Object Parameters ..........................................................................................81
Configuring Data System Object Parameters ................................................................................. 84
Installing and Configuring Unicode Font Support ......................................................................... 90
Opening the UCM Main Window .................................................................................................. 93
Switching Between Class and Instance Based Navigation .............................................................95
Creating a New Record Using System Defaults .............................................................................96
Creating A New Record Using Existing Records ...........................................................................97
Modifying a Single Record .............................................................................................................98
Modifying All Records ................................................................................................................... 99
Deleting a Record ......................................................................................................................... 101
Creating a Default Report ............................................................................................................. 103
Creating a Narrowed Report ......................................................................................................... 105
Displaying More Than 100 Records .............................................................................................107
Finding a Record ...........................................................................................................................109
Finding a Value in the Database ................................................................................................... 110
Selecting Security Group Preferences .......................................................................................... 112
Viewing the Home Zone Map Processing State ........................................................................... 113
Mapping Zones to Alias Server in Zone to AS Map .................................................................... 114
Mapping Zones to Short Data Router in Zone to SDR Map ........................................................ 115
Creating a Home Zone Map - Basic Tab ...................................................................................... 119
Creating a Home Zone Map – Individual Maps Tab .................................................................... 120
Creating a Home Zone Map – Group Maps Tab .......................................................................... 121
Creating a Home Zone Map – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab ..................................... 121
Submitting a Home Zone Map – Basic Tab ................................................................................. 123
Modifying a Home Zone Map – Basic Tab .................................................................................. 125
Modifying a Home Zone Map – Individual Maps Tab .................................................................126
Modifying a Home Zone Map – Group Maps Tab .......................................................................127
Modifying a Home Zone Map – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab ..................................127
Accessing IHLR/GHLR Views for a Home Zone Map ................................................................130
Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab ....................................................................131
Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab ...................................................... 131
Configuring the User Group for a TG/MG Capabilities Profile ...................................................134

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

40 | List of Procedures

Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Basic Tab ........................................................................ 134

Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Configuration Tab ...........................................................135
Creating a Status Set Basic Tab ....................................................................................................137
Creating a Status Set Configuration Tab ...................................................................................... 137
Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile Basic Tab ..................................................................138
Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab .................................................... 139
Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile User Group Tab ........................................................142
Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile Basic Tab ................................................................... 142
Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile Configuration Tab ......................................................143
Creating an Exclusion Class Basic tab ......................................................................................... 144
Creating an Exclusion Class Configuration Tab .......................................................................... 145
Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile Basic Tab .................................................................146
Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile Configuration Tab ................................................... 147
Creating a Control Room Head Number Basic Tab ..................................................................... 149
Creating a Control Room Head Number Configuration Tab ........................................................150
Control Room Head Number Console User Member List Tab .................................................... 151
Creating a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Basic Tab .........................................................152
Creating a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab ........................................... 153
Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile Basic Tab .............................................................. 156
Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab .................................................157
Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile Private Call Tab .................................................... 159
Configuring Alert Tones ...............................................................................................................160
Adding Alert Tones to a Console User Capabilities Profile .........................................................162
Creating a Console User Basic Tab .............................................................................................. 163
Creating a Console User Configuration Tab ................................................................................ 164
Creating a Console Private Call Resource Basic Tab ...................................................................165
Creating a Console Private Call Resource Configuration Tab ..................................................... 166
Creating a User Group Basic Tab ................................................................................................. 166
Creating a User Group Configuration Tab ................................................................................... 167
Creating a Multigroup – Basic Tab .............................................................................................. 170
Creating a Multigroup – Configuration Tab ................................................................................. 170
Creating a Radio ........................................................................................................................... 172
Creating a Radio User – Basic Tab ...............................................................................................174
Creating a Radio User – Configuration Tab ................................................................................. 174

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 List of Procedures | 41

Creating a Radio by Entering the Radio Serial Number, ID, Reference ID, and Security
Group ....................................................................................................................................... 177
Creating a Storm Plan Basic Tab ..................................................................................................179
Creating a Storm Plan Configuration Tab .................................................................................... 180
Creating Storm Plan Commands Basic Tab ................................................................................. 181
Creating Storm Plan Commands Configuration Tab ....................................................................181
Creating a Load Class – Basic Tab ...............................................................................................183
Creating a Load Class – Configuration Tab ................................................................................. 184
Creating and Configuring a Barring Profile ................................................................................. 185
Enabling a Multigroup for PPC .................................................................................................... 191
Enabling a Radio User Capabilities Profile for PPC .................................................................... 191
Enabling a ConsoleUser Capabilities Profile for PPC ..................................................................192
Provisioning Radio Users with PPC ............................................................................................. 193
Provisioning Console Users with PPC ......................................................................................... 194
Enabling Private Calls at the Dispatch Console ........................................................................... 195
Enabling Radio Users for Ambience Listening ............................................................................ 197
Enabling Console Users for Ambience Listening ........................................................................ 198
Enabling Ambience Listening at the Dispatch Console ............................................................... 198
Enabling Radio Users for Full Duplex Private Calls ....................................................................200
Enabling Console Users for Full Duplex Private Calls ................................................................ 201
Enabling Private Calls at the Dispatch Console ........................................................................... 201
Creating Status Sets in UCM ........................................................................................................ 203
Enabling Status Transfer Service at the Dispatch Console ...........................................................204
Configuring the Site Wide Call in UCM ...................................................................................... 205
Configuring the Tetra Site Controller for Site Wide Calls ........................................................... 208
Deleting Records .......................................................................................................................... 208
Deleting a Radio ........................................................................................................................... 209
Disabling a Talkgroup .................................................................................................................. 210
Disabling a Multigroup .................................................................................................................211
Disabling a Radio User ................................................................................................................. 212
Removing a Talkgroup from a Multigroup .................................................................................. 213

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

About User Configuration Manager
This document provides detailed information about the User Configuration Manager (UCM) application, a part of the
Motorola Private Network Management (PRNM) Suite. It contains a detailed description of the user interface, as well
as operation procedures on how to create radio, console, user objects, talkgroups and multigroups using the UCM.

What Is Covered In This Manual?

This booklet covers the following chapters:
• UCM Description on page 47. This chapter provides a description of the User Configuration Manager (UCM)
application and the objects within the application.
• Configuration on page 81. This chapter presents the procedures for the system level configuration.
• Operation on page 93. This chapter contains procedures which describe updating Home Zone Mappings. Also
creation of profiles, consoles, console users, radio users, groups, storm plans, and also deletion of these records in
the UCM.
• Reference on page 215. This chapter provides parameter tables for all object classes in the UCM.

Useful Background Information

Motorola offers a variety of courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For information, go to http://
[Link]/training to view the current course offerings and technology paths.

Related Information

Related Information Description

Glossary The glossary provides a list of abbreviations, acronyms and terms used in the
Dimetra IP system documentation.
Documentation Overview The document provides a list of all documents delivered with your Dimetra
IP system. Its primary purpose is to help you to find the information you are
looking for.
System Overview This manual provides basic radio system concepts, call processing basics,
and an introduction to the various components and processes associated with
the Dimetra IP system. The manual provides the background needed to
comprehend the theory of operation and it provides equipment/subsystem
functional descriptions. It also describes the role of the numerous network
management software applications used for managing the system.
Configuring Features This manual describes radio features and their configuration. The manual
contains a configuration checklist as well as configuration procedures for the
key features of the system.
Zone Configuration This manual describes the Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM) which is a
Manager Private Radio Network Management (PRMN) Suite application. The ZCM is
used to configure and maintain operational parameters for equipment in a
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

44 | About User Configuration Manager

Related Information Description

system. To configure a system, both the ZCM and the User Configuration
Manager (UCM) are needed.
Telephone Interconnect This manual provides the information necessary to install, configure, operate,
and maintain the components in a Telephone Interconnect subsystem. The
Telephone Interconnect subsystem provides an interface between the
Dimetra IP radio network and an external telephone network, allowing
telephone interconnect calls to be made between Dimetra IP radios and
external telephones.
Network Management This manual describes the Network Management (NM) Servers used in the
Servers Dimetra IP system. Included are detailed procedures for installation,
configuration and maintenance. The NM servers comprise the User
Configuration Server (UCS), System Statistics Server (SSS), Zone Database
Server (ZDS), Air Traffic Router Server (ATR), Zone Statistics Server (ZSS)
and Unified Event Manager (UEM) Server.
Backup and Restore This manual describes the system backup and restoration procedures and
Including FRU/FRE their impact on the services as well as pre and post-restoration checks. The
manual also describes how to perform FRU/FRE procedures.
Network Transport This manual describes how to backup and restore the system LAN switches,
Restoration routers, gateways, CWR Patch Panel, Terminal Server, and Network Time
Server.
MCC 7500-series Console This manual describes the hardware and software components associated
Sites with the MCC 7500-series console sites. It provides overviews of subsystem
functions such as communications with the Zone Controller, different types
of call setups, and descriptions of status and events.
Authentication and This manual gives an overview of the authentication and air interface
Encryption Overview encryption features in the Dimetra IP system including:
• Description of the authentication and air interface encryption features
• Description of the different aspects of secure encryption key management
• Procedures for configuring these features in your system

Fault Management This manual provides an overview of Fault Management features.

Radio Control Manager This manual describes the Radio Control Manager (RCM) which is a Private
Radio Network Management (PRNM) Suite application used primarily by
dispatchers to monitor and manage radio events, issue and monitor
commands, and make informational queries of the system database.
Online Help
Application Launcher This online help describes how to operate the Application Launcher software.
Online Help
User Configuration This online help describes how to operate the User Configuration Manager
Manager (UCM) Online application.
Help
Zone Configuration This online help describes how to operate the Zone Configuration Manager
Manager (ZCM) Online application.
Help
ZoneWatch Online Help This online help describes how to operate the ZoneWatch application.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 About User Configuration Manager | 45

Icon Conventions
The documentation set is designed to give the reader more visual clues. The following graphic icons are used
throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are described below.
Danger: The signal word DANGER with the associated safety icon implies information that, if
disregarded, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning: The signal word WARNING with the associated safety icon implies information that, if
disregarded, could result in death or serious injury, or serious product damage.
Caution: The signal word CAUTION with the associated safety icon implies information that, if
disregarded, may result in minor or moderate injury, or serious product damage.
Caution: The signal word CAUTION may be used without the safety icon to state potential damage or
injury that is not related to the product.
Important: IMPORTANT statements contain information that is crucial to the discussion at hand, but is
not CAUTION or WARNING. There is no warning level associated with the IMPORTANT statement.

Note: NOTE contains information more important than the surrounding text, such as exceptions or
preconditions. They also refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader how to
complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the reader where
something is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a note.
Suggestion: SUGGESTION implies a recommendation or tip from Motorola that does not require to be
followed, but might be helpful. There is no warning level associated with SUGGESTION.

Style Conventions
The following style conventions are used:

Convention Description
Bold This typeface is used for names of, for instance, windows, buttons, and labels when
these names appear on the screen (example: the Alarms Browser window). When
it is clear that we are referring to, for instance, a button, the name is used alone
(example: Click OK).
Monospacing font in This typeface is used for words to be typed in exactly as they are shown in the text
bold (example: In the Address field, type [Link]
Monospacing font This typeface is used for messages, prompts, and other text displayed on the
computer screen (example: A new trap destination has been
added).
<Monospacing font in This typeface is used with angle brackets for words to be substituted by a specific
bold Italic> member of the group that the words represent (example: <router number>).
Note: In sequences to be typed in, the angle brackets are omitted to
avoid confusion as to whether the angle brackets are to be included in
the text to be typed.

CAPITAL LETTERS This typeface is used for keyboard keys (example: Press Y, and then press
ENTER).
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

46 | About User Configuration Manager

Convention Description
Italic This typeface is used citations. This can be the name of a document or a phrase
from another document (example: Dimetra IP System Overview).
→ An → (arrow pointing right) is used for indicating the menu or tab structure in
instructions on how to select a certain menu item (example: File → Save) or a
certain sub-tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

Chapter

1
UCM Description

Introduction to UCM
This part covers Dimetra IP user management. User Configuration Manager (UCM) is part of the Motorola Private
Radio Network Management Suite. It provides the information, and specific procedures on how to configure
information for the users. This part does not cover installation of the UCM nor how to configure the sites or consoles.
Instead, references to the relevant books for that information are provided.

Role of the UCM

The User Configuration Manager (UCM) is a tool that is used to configure information for users during various stages
of the systems life.

Configuring System and Zone Information

When you initially configure or make changes in the UCM, the configuration information is updated on the User
Configuration Server (UCS). That information is replicated to the Zone Database Server (ZDS) at each zone to ensure
that all zones share the same configuration information.
The User Configuration Manager main window is the primary interface for this application. The UCM main window
contains a list of object classes and objects used to enter and maintain system-level and zone-level configuration
information (see the following figure). The following object classes can be found in the User Configuration Manager
main window:
• System Configuration - Configuration of cluster-level parameters, such as Adjacent Control Channels (ACCs) and
Key Variable Loader.
• Consoles Configuration Configuration of zone-level parameters for the MCC 7500 console.
• Subscribers - Configuration of zone-level parameters, such as talkgroups and radio user information.
• Security - Configuration of cluster-level parameters for management users, such as security information.
• ZoneWatch Configuration - Configuration of zone-level parameters for ZoneWatch, such as filters, watch window
definitions, and watch profiles.
• External Configuration - Registration and configuration of all zones, Enhanced Base Transceiver System/Mini
Base Transceiver System/Motorola TETRA Station (BTS) sites and call routes that have been configured in other
clusters of the system. Not applicable to single-cluster systems.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

48 | UCM Description

Figure 1: UCM Cluster-Level and Zone-Level Configuration

Cluster

User
Configuration
Manager (UCM)
Zone

Site

Unit

Performing Tasks in the UCM

The following table shows when you are likely to use the User Configuration Manager (UCM) to perform your job
functions.

Table 2: Role of the UCM

Tasks When You Perform theTasks Related Information in

This Part
Configure Dimetra IP cluster During the initial phase of system See System Configuration on
parameters for call capability, operation. Later, you may need to page 50
including the Consoles, Adjacent update information as capabilities of
Control Channels (ACCs) and Key the system change.
Variable Loader.
Configure cluster-level parameters Occasionally during the life of the See Consoles on page 51
that are related to the MCC 7500 system to add or update Console
console. information.
Configure radios, radio users, Any time during the life of the system See Subscribers on page 51
console users, talkgroups, and to add or update information as users
multigroups. change.
Configure security access for users Occasionally during the life of the See Security on page 54
in the Dimetra IP system. system to add or update security
information.
Configure the type of ZoneWatch Occasionally during the life of the See ZoneWatch Configuration
windows that users want to system to add or update ZoneWatch on page 55
monitor. information.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 49

Tasks When You Perform theTasks Related Information in

This Part
Register all zones, BTS sites, and Any time during the life of the system See External Configuration
call routes that have been to add or update information as users on page 56
configured in the other clusters of change.
the system.

Organization of the UCM

The User Configuration Manager (UCM) Main Window contains the object classes. An object is a representation of a
system device (such as a radio) or device connectivity (such as the Interzone Control Path).
As you gain experience in using the UCM, you can refer directly to Reference on page 215. This part describes these
object classes in more detail, down to the field level for each object.
The following figure shows the UCM Main Window with the classes of objects labeled.

Figure 2: Classes of Objects

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

50 | UCM Description

System Configuration
System Configuration information defines the objects used for setting up the infrastructure of the cluster. The
following figure shows the list of objects in the navigation pane, and the following table contains a list of objects and
their descriptions.

Figure 3: System Configuration Objects

Table 3: System Configuration Objects

Object Description
System Configures cluster-level parameters that are common for every zone in the
cluster.
Data System Configures cluster-level parameters that are related to the packet data service.
Console System Configures cluster-level parameters that are related to the MCC 7500 console
users. The console hardware is configured via the ZCM.
Analog Conventional Configures cluster-level parameters for analog conventional channels
System between the MCC 7500 PTT switch, microphone, and speaker at one end and
the MCC 7500 4wire CCGW/base stations at the other end, for example tone
signalling schemes.
The analog conventional capabilities are used to provide interoperability
between systems during the migration of users from CentraCom consoles to
MCC 7500 consoles.

Source Site ACC Configures the Source Site Adjacent Control Channel (ACC).
InterZone Control Path Configures the zone controller interface to the interzone network via an
Ethernet connection.
Key Variable Loader Each Key Variable Loader is assigned specific zones and BTS sites to update
the cluster.
Authentication Center Displays available AuC Server.
Zone to AS Map Each Zone to AS Map configures assignments of Zones to an Alias Server.
Zone to SDR Map Each Zone to SDR Map configures assignments of Zones to a Short Data
Router.
Analog Conventional Configuration
TRC Segment Configures the Tone Remote Control (TRC) Segment which is used to define
a single tone.
TRC Sequence Configures the Tone Remote Control (TRC) Sequence which defines the
tones needed to execute a command.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 51

Object Description
TRC Table Configures the Tone Remote Control (TRC) Table which is used to define
tone sequences used for each station control command.
TRC Command Configures the Tone Remote Control (TRC) Command which is defined by a
tone sequence that consists of an unlimited number of tone segments.

Note: For more information about these objects, see System Configuration Reference on page 216. For the
procedures to initially configure the system, Backup and Restore Including FRU/FRE manual.

Consoles
The Consoles class of objects defines cluster-level parameters that are related to the MCC 7500 console. The console
hardware is configured via the ZCM.
The following figure shows the list of objects in the navigation pane, and the following table contains a list of objects
and their descriptions.

Figure 4: Consoles Objects

Table 4: Consoles Objects

Object Description
Control Room Head Maps Head Number ISSI and Console ISSI during call setup.
Number
Console TG/MG Defines the general capabilities that are common to a specific talkgroup or
Capabilities Profile multigroup. You can map multiple talkgroups and multigroups to the
specified profile.
Console User Capabilities Defines the common capabilities of the MCC 7500 console user and consists
Profile of privilege information associated with particular console users in the
system. You can map multiple console users to a specified profile.
Console Private Call Configures the characteristics of a private call resource in the console.
Resource
Alert Tone Configures predefined alert tones. This feature allows a Console operator to
transmit an audible tone to all currently selected resources.

Note: For more information about these objects, see Consoles Reference on page 258.

Subscribers
The Subscriber class of objects defines user configuration capabilities of subscribers, such as radio users or talkgroups
in the system. This class of objects includes the calling features assigned to an individual radio or talkgroup and the
sites an individual or talkgroup may access. You can enter the parameters for individual, talkgroup, and multigroup
radio users, as well as console operators.
Profile objects provide a method of mapping a group of attributes or data. It is common to some users who perform a
particular function.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

52 | UCM Description

The following figure shows the list of objects in the navigation pane, and the following table contains a list of objects
and their descriptions.

Figure 5: Subscriber Objects

Table 5: Subscriber Objects

Object Description
Home Zone Mapping Maps the zone in which a radio or talkgroup is primarily located and dictates
the controlling zone controller for talkgroup calls that span zones.
Important: Home Zone Mappings are critical to system
operation, so you must plan and configure this object carefully.

Home Zone Mapping contains read-only views presenting particular aspects

like map ranges and provisioning. The following ones are included:
• Individual Maps Report
• Group Maps Report
• Short Subscriber Identity Maps Report
• IHLR Occupancy
• GHLR Occupancy

Radio Identifies the physical radio units in the system by their serial numbers and
IDs.
Radio User Consists of data associated with a particular radio user on the system,
including access rights. The following profile objects define the parameters
that are common to a specific group of radio users:
• Radio User Capabilities Profile
• Radio User Valid Sites Profile
• Radio User Interconnect Profile
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 53

Object Description
Console User Consists of data associated with a particular MCC 7500-series console user
on the system, including access rights. The following profile objects define
the parameters that are common to a specific group of console users:
• Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile
• Console User Capabilities Profile

User Group Defines which channels can be used by which radio users and talkgroups. All
Talkgroup/Multigroup Capabilities Profiles and Radio User Capabilities
Profiles in a system must be assigned to a User Group. This record consists
of two tabs, Basic and Configuration.
Radio User Capabilities Defines the common capabilities of the radio user and consists of privilege
Profile information associated with particular radio users in the system. You can
map multiple radio users to a specified profile.
Radio User Valid Sites Defines the sites that the radio user can access in the system and consists of
Profile information about the site at which the radio is valid. You can map multiple
radio users to the specified profile.
Exclusion Class The exclusion class defines telephone numbers that a Radio User cannot
receive calls from, or make calls to.
Radio User Interconnect Defines the telephone interconnect capabilities of the radio user. You can
Profile map multiple radio users to the specified profile.
Talkgroup Consists of all necessary information that a trunking system requires for a
talkgroup on the system. The following profile objects define the parameters
that are common to a specific talkgroup:
• TG/MG Capabilities Profile
• TG/MG Valid Sites Profile

Multigroup Consists of all necessary information that a trunking system requires for a
multigroup on the system. A multigroup is a large group that is composed of
several talkgroups. The following profile objects define the parameters that
are common to a specific multigroup:
• TG/MG Capabilities Profile
• TG/MG Valid Sites Profile

TG/MG Capabilities Profile Defines the general capabilities that are common to a specific talkgroup or
multigroup. You can map multiple talkgroups and multigroups to the
specified profile.
TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Defines the sites that the talkgroup or multigroup can access in the system.
You can map multiple talkgroups and multigroups to the specified profile.
Status Set Creates status messages which the radio user can reference.
Storm Plan Regroups talkgroups for special situations, such as disasters or crowd
control, by initiating a predefined storm plan operation.
Storm Plan Commands Associates each storm plan with up to four storm plan commands and
configures the talkgroup to which the radios are associated with when this
storm plan is executed. Storm Plan Commands can lock radios to talkgroups
or unlock radios, so they can change talkgroups.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

54 | UCM Description

Object Description
Load Class Defines a class (type) of radios which have a given expected contribution to
the load on the Common Control Channel (CCCH) and is associated with a
specific radio.
Barring Profile Specifies a subset of SSI numbers for which calls are barred. You can
associate the profiles with a specific Console User Capabilities Profile, Radio
User Capabilities Profile, and TG/MG Capabilities Profile.
Object Group Definition Allows to create dynamic talkgroups or multigroups identified as Object
Group and defines Object Group configuration parameters. You cannot
create nor delete the Object Group Definition.
Object Group Subject The Object Group Subject identifies a part of the Object Group defined in a
two-dimensional structure, in this case the subject (for example a flight
number or a bus line). The Object Group Subject consists of all necessary
information that a trunking system requires for a talkgroup/multigroup on the
system.
Object Group Instance The Object Group Instance identifies a part of the Object Group defined in a
two-dimensional structure, in this case the instance (for example, a certain
workgroup within a flight or certain tour of a bus line).

Note: For more information about these objects, see Subscribers Reference on page 274.

Security
The Security class of objects defines management user configuration information, including all security information.
You can create security groups, configure other management users, and assign passwords.
The following figure shows the list of objects in the navigation pane, and the following table contains a list of objects
and their descriptions.

Figure 6: Security Objects

Table 6: Security Objects

Object Description
Security Group Creates the names of the logical groups used for system partitioning of radio users and
infrastructure components. Partitioning controls access to the system and segregates
data so that each group can only access objects for which they are responsible. All
objects belong to a security group.
User Determines who has access to any network management application in the Dimetra IP
system, and what kind of privileges are associated with a particular user. Initially, the
database creates a super user, the supermgr record, that cannot be deleted. The
supermgr must create the first user. Users can create other users with a subset of the
privileges that they have themselves.
CAD User Creates and manages all Computer Aided Dispatch (CAD) users who have access to
the system, including assigning access rights and responsibilities to such users.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 55

Object Description
User Password Changes the password that uniquely identifies the user on the system.
Important: Do not confuse this password with the Windows password.

Note: For more information about these objects, see Security Reference on page 343.

ZoneWatch Configuration
The ZoneWatch Configuration class of objects defines the filters, watch window definitions, and watch profiles for
ZoneWatch.
The following figure shows the list of objects in the navigation pane, and the following table contains a list of objects
and their descriptions.

Figure 7: ZoneWatch Configuration Objects

Table 7: ZoneWatch Configuration Objects

Object Description
ZoneWatch Filters
ZW Message Qualifier Filter Filters the data to display Secure, Dimetra IP, and Emergency messages.
ZW Message Set Filter Filters the data to display sets of messages that you select.
ZW Raw Data Filter Filters the data by the raw packet data in the zone. You can filter out
specific types of data using this object.
ZW Site Filter Filters the data by the sites that the ZoneWatch user wants to monitor.
Note: You must select a site within your zone to view
ZoneWatch activity on the site.

ZW Channel Filter Filters the data by the channels that the ZoneWatch user wants to monitor.
Note: You must select a channel within a site to view
ZoneWatch activity on the channel.

ZW Radio ID Filter Filters the data by the radios that the ZoneWatch user wants to monitor.
ZW Radio Range Filter Filters the data by the range of radios that the ZoneWatch user wants to
monitor.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

56 | UCM Description

Object Description
ZW TG/MG ID Filter Filters the data to show the talkgroups and multigroups that the
ZoneWatch user wants to monitor.
ZW TG/MG Range Filter Filters the data to show a range of talkgroups and multigroups that the
ZoneWatch user wants to monitor.
Watch Window Definition Creates a set of configuration parameters that define the main data display
for ZoneWatch.
Watch Profiles Creates a profile that contains one or more Watch Window Definitions
that is associated with a user or a task.
ZW Global Configuration Defines to what extend a Common Control Channel is considered used
(loaded) within a certain time interval.

Note: For more information about the objects, see ZoneWatch Configuration Reference on page 359. For
information about ZoneWatch, see the ZoneWatch Online Help.

External Configuration
The External Configuration class of objects registers the zones, RF sites, and call routes that have been configured in
other clusters of the system.
The following figure shows the list of objects in the navigation pane, and the following table contains a list of objects
and their descriptions.

Figure 8: External Configuration Objects

Table 8: External Configuration Objects

Object Description
External Zones Registers the zones that have been configured in other clusters of the system.
External RF Sites Registers the BTS sites that have been configured in other clusters of the system.
External Call Routes Registers and configures the call routes that have been configured in other
clusters of the system.
External Short Data Registers and configures the short data routers that have been configured in the
Router other clusters of the system.

UCM Window Elements

Note: This part includes examples of some, but not all dialog boxes to show how they appear. For the
detailed procedures that use these dialog boxes, see Operation on page 93.

UCM Main Window Elements

This part describes the User Configuration Manager (UCM) Main Window elements, including:

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 57

• Window structure
• Navigating through the window
• Using the commands
Other features included in the UCM application that are not discussed in this part includes the following:
• Online help is available for the UCM. While you are using the UCM, you can open the online help to learn about
the procedures and field description information.
• Windows standard error and warning dialog boxes are used.

UCM Main Window Structure

The UCM main window has typical Windows features, including a title bar, split bar separating panes, plus Minimize,
Maximize, and Close buttons. The following figure shows the features that are described in more detail in this part.
See Opening the UCM Main Window on page 93 for the procedure to open UCM and display the main window.

Figure 9: UCM Main Window Structure

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

58 | UCM Description

Secondary Windows
Every task performed in the UCM has an associated secondary window. Most secondary windows have typical
Windows features including a title bar, menu bar, toolbar, Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons. A status bar
appears at the bottom of the window.
You can access the following secondary windows from the UCM main window:
• Configuration window (New, Open, Open All, Save As)
• Report window
• Find window
• Security Groups Selection window
• Home Zone Map Processing Status window

Navigation
The UCM main window has a navigation pane that displays configurable objects in a logical hierarchy. It has also a
contents pane that displays each record. A split bar separates the two panes.
See Figure 9: UCM Main Window Structure on page 57, which shows the navigation components of the UCM main
window.

Navigation Pane
The navigation pane displays a hierarchy of objects and to provide a convenient and intuitive way of navigating
between the objects.

Expand or Collapse
You can expand or collapse a folder or outline to see more or fewer sub-objects. A plus sign next to an icon indicates
that it can be expanded to show more objects. A minus sign indicates that it can be collapsed.

Icons
Icons provide a visual representation of the objects in the navigation pane and are used to distinguish one object from
another. Click the icon to select the object, and it appears highlighted. The navigation pane contains two types of
icons:
• Class objects that represent the top level in a hierarchy of objects, which cannot be modified. Class objects for the
UCM are System Configuration, Subscribers, Security, ZoneWatch, and External Configuration. A folder icon
represents Class objects.
• User-configurable objects that allow you to create or modify database records. The following table shows the
object types. The special icons are unique graphical representations of the object. The category icons are icons
shared by one or more objects.

Table 9: User-Configurable Objects

Icon Icon Name

Special icons
System and Data System

Radio

Talkgroup and Multigroup

Security Group

Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 59

Icon Icon Name

User Password

Category icons
Link record. For example, InterZone Control Path

Configuration record. For example, Talkgroup Profile

User record. For example, Radio User

Note: You can select only one object in the navigation pane at one time. If you do not have access rights
for an object in the navigation pane, the object is grayed out

Class Based Navigation

Class Based Navigation (CBN) provides a view of the object records structured according to the system object types
and the sub-object types. A fixed tree structure view of the object types is shown in the navigation pane. When you
select an object type in the navigation pane, all records of that object type are shown as a list view in the contents
pane. See the following figure for a CBN example.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

60 | UCM Description

Figure 10: Class Based Navigation Example

Instance Based Navigation

Instance Based Navigation (IBN) provides a view of the ZCM objects structured to represent the actual system
configuration of site equipment devices and sub-devices. IBN operates the same as the Windows Explorer user
interface where icons represent specific object instances, and each file type is associated with a configuration object/
record. Folders can be used to contain objects and folders. See the following for an IBN example; this example shows
that the File menu, New command provides access to the child object instances for the selected record.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 61

Figure 11: Instance Based Navigation Example

IBN provides some different operational features from CBN. When using IBN:
• A different record structure with container objects is provided.
• The File menu, New command lists only the sibling and child objects for the selected record, that you can create.
• The applicable ID fields of any new record are automatically inherited from the associated parent record.
When an object is selected in the left (tree) view, its immediate contents appear in the list view. The list view provides
the same level of detail as the tree view in the navigation pane. The list view shows the following information listed
in the following table.

Table 10: Instance Based Navigation – List Pane Information

Description
Column Label
Resource Folder
Icon for the resource type. Icon for a folder.
Type Resource type name. Folder name.
ID Identifier for the resource
instance listed.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

62 | UCM Description

Note:
Double-clicking a leaf node object in the list view is the equivalent of selecting File → Open.
Result: The configuration window appears for that object.
Double-clicking a container or folder in the list view is the equivalent of selecting the container or folder in
the tree view.
Result: The focus moves to the tree view and displays the contents of the container or folder in the list
view.
Caution: When a container object is deleted, all of the objects contained within that container are deleted.

Contents Pane
The contents pane is initially empty. The information in this pane is created dynamically after an object is selected in
the navigation pane and the table of records appears. If no records are present, the contents pane remains empty.

Performing Tasks from the Contents Pane

You can do the following in the contents pane:
• Sort: Click any column header to sort the entries by that columns values. The first click sorts in ascending order,
and the second click sorts in descending order. A column header appears for each parameter in the record with the
description of the parameter as a label.
• Scroll: Depending on the width of the record table, you may have to use the horizontal scroll bar to view all of the
column headers.
• Select records: Select a record in the record table. Selected records are highlighted to differentiate them from non-
selected records.
• Modify records: Records in the table are read only and cannot be modified directly. In order to modify a record,
select the row and then select Open from the File menu.

Commands
Commands include menu options, pop-up menu options, and toolbar icons. Keyboard accelerators are also available
to assist with command execution. Command options that are not active or for which you do not have access rights
are grayed out.

Menu Options
A menu is a list of commands from which you can choose to perform a task or navigate through the UCM application.
Each window has access to drop-down menu options from the Menu bar. From these menus, you can perform tasks
and access other windows.
You can access the menu options in the following ways:
• Click the menu option.
• To open a menu, select ALT + THE APPROPRIATE UNDERLINED LETTER. For example, ALT + F opens the File menu.
• To open a drop-down menu option when the menu is displayed, select the appropriate underlined letter. For
example, O opens a file.
• To execute the menu option using accelerator keys, select CTRL + THE APPROPRIATE UNDERLINED LETTER (if the
menu item has such possibility). For example, CTRL + O opens a file.
The following table describes the menu options that are available in the UCM Main Window.
Note: A letter in bold indicates the keyboard accelerator key or shortcut key for that option.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 63

Table 11: UCM Main Window Menu Options

Menu Bar Option Drop-Down Menu Option Description

File New Opens a Configuration window for a new entry.
Important: From the View menu, select
Refresh to see newly created records in
the contents pane.

Open Opens a Configuration window that contains an

existing entry.
Save As Opens a Configuration window to clone the entry.
Cloning duplicates the selected entry by saving it
with a different name.
Important: From the View menu, select
Refresh to see newly created records in
the contents pane.

Delete Opens the Delete Confirmation dialog box. Click

OK to delete the selected entry.
Important: You cannot delete an object
from the navigation pane or default
records for an object.

Report Opens the Report window to create a report.

Exit Opens the Exit Confirmation dialog box that
contains a confirmation message. Click OK to exit
the UCM.
Edit Select All Selects every record. All of the entries in the current
record table appear highlighted allowing you to
make global changes to all of the records for an
object.
Set to Defaults Resets parameters to the default values.
Find Opens the Find window to search for the object
currently selected in the navigation pane.
Preferences/Security Opens the Security Groups Selection window to set
the security groups from which to operate while in
the application.
Preferences/Options Opens the Navigation Paradigm window to set the
type of navigation allowing you to select either CBN
or IBN.
Group Commit Opens the Group Commit Confirmation window to
commit data for the group members.
Rollback Opens the Group Rollback Confirmation window to
discard saved data, and replace it with the last
committed values.
Commit Status Opens the Group Status window that lists the
uncommitted changes made for all object groups,
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

64 | UCM Description

Menu Bar Option Drop-Down Menu Option Description

and also indicates the last user to commit the change
of these records.
View Show Status Bar Select to display or not to display the status bar on
the main UCM window.
Show Toolbar Select to display or not to display the toolbar on the
main UCM window.
Refresh Updates the record table displayed in the contents
pane.
Important: Select Refresh to see new or
modified records in the contents pane.

Windows Diagnostics Not enabled for the UCM. This menu option applies
to certain objects in the Zone Configuration
Manager (ZCM).
Tools Home Zone Map Processing Displays information related to the Home Zone Map
Status submit process. See Home Zone Map Processing
Status Window Elements on page 76.
Help Help Topics Provides online help on the various tabs, menus, and
actions of the UCM.
About Opens the About window for the UCM that displays
general information about the product.

Status Bar
The status bar displays brief messages or additional help text.
• If you roll your cursor over an enabled menu item, a brief description of the command to be performed appears on
the status bar.
• If all records are shown, the status bar shows the number of objects. For example, 50 objects. If all records are not
shown, the status bar displays how many records are shown versus how many exist in the database. For example,
100 of 254 shown.

Configuration Window Elements

The Configuration windows ( Figure 12: Example of a Configuration Window on page 65) allow you to create and
modify records for the objects in the User Configuration Manager (UCM).
The UCM provides the following types of Configuration windows:
• New – Creates a record.
• Open – Modifies an existing record.
• Open All – Modifies all existing records for an object.
• Save As – Clones a record to create a record.
Note: You can differentiate between the types by the label on the status bar, see Figure 12: Example of a
Configuration Window on page 65.

Configuration Window Structure

The Configuration windows are secondary windows that contain tabs, fields, and action buttons. Menu options and
toolbar icons are the same as on the UCM Main Window (see Commands on page 62).

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 65

Figure 12: Example of a Configuration Window

Tabs
Most Configuration windows contain two tabs, the Basic tab and the Configuration tab. Some Configuration windows
have no tabs or have additional tabs.
• The Basic Tab specifies key attributes for the object, such as unique names or IDs, and the security group
information.
• The Configuration tab and any additional tabs contain fields that allow you to set parameters specific to the
selected object. These parameters are mostly optional attributes that relate to the capability being configured.

Configuration Window Action Buttons

The following table shows the action buttons that appear on the tabs.

Table 12: Action Buttons

Action Button Description

Values Opens a Values window that displays a table of records for that field and also provides a
search capability. It is similar to the Find window. When you select an entry from the
table and click OK, the Values window closes, and the field updates with the selection.
For details, see Values Window Elements on page 72. The following figure shows the
Values button.

Figure 13: Values Button

Apply Applies changes made on the Configuration window and saves the record to the
database. The window stays open, and you can continue entering new records.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new or modified record
in the contents pane.

Undo Restores the values on the window to the original, unmodified values.
Cancel Cancels changes made to the window and closes the window.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

66 | UCM Description

Other Buttons
The following tables show buttons that allow you to create an editable list of records in a dynamic table format. These
buttons are available on many, but not all tabs.

Table 13: Dynamic Table Buttons

Button Description
Add Row Opens a Values window that displays a table of records for that field and also provides a
search capability. It is similar to the Find window. When you select an entry from the
table and click OK, the Values window closes, and the field updates with the selection
by adding a row to the dynamic table. For more details, see Values Window Elements on
page 72.
Note: If the values are not predetermined, you manually enter the values
directly into the dynamic table.

Delete Row Select the row that you want to delete, and click Delete Row. Scissors appear next to the
row to mark that it is to be removed from the table. Click Apply to permanently remove
the selected row from the list.
Undelete Row Select the row that you want to undelete, and clickUndelete Row. If you have not
clicked Apply, the scissors disappear. The row is no longer marked for removal.
Up Moves the selected row one level up. If the first row is selected, the button is disabled.
You can select multiple rows by holding down the SHIFT (for consecutive rows) or
CTRL (for nonconsecutive rows) key on your keyboard as you click on the row in the
table.
Note: The option is available only for some tables.

Down Moves the selected row one level down. If the last row is selected, the button is disabled.
It supports also a multiple row operation.
Note: The option is available only for some tables.

When adding new rows to a list you can choose one of the following options:

Table 14: Extended Table Buttons – Add Row Options

Button Description
At the Creates the entry as the first on the list.
beginning
Above selected Creates the entry above the selected row.
Below selected Creates the entry below the selected row.
At the end Creates the entry as the last one on the list.

Note: The options are available only for some tables.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 67

Change Indicators and Required Field Indicators

As you enter the information into a configuration window, a black dot on the window indicates the change to the
field:

Figure 14: Change Indicator

If you did not enter information into a required field, an Error dialog box appears and a red dot indicates the required
field:

Figure 15: Required Field Indicator

Report Window Elements

The Report window allows you to generate data summaries for the purpose of either viewing the information or
exporting the information to a file. This window shows all of the fields that you can include in the report and contains
the same fields as the Configuration window for an object.
You can select the fields that you want to see in the report, and even restrict the data retrieved by entering selection
criteria in certain fields. Afterwards, you can generate a report that appears in a Web browser (see Report Results on
page 69).
Note: You can open one Report window for each applicable object in the navigation pane.

Report Window Structure

The Report window is a secondary window that contains fields, check boxes, drop-down lists, and action buttons.
Menu options and toolbar icons are the same as on the UCM Main Window (see Commands on page 62).

Figure 16: Example of a Report Window

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

68 | UCM Description

Fields and Check Boxes

You can configure the report using the actual object records and also particular fields that appear in the report. The
Report window provides text boxes for every field listed on each objects report form. In these text boxes, you enter
criteria that are used to generate the report.
Check boxes determine which subset of the fields appear in the resulting report results. The following table describes
the check boxes that appear in the Report window.
Note: The unique key fields for each object have their check boxes selected by default and cannot be
cleared.

Table 15: Report Window Check Boxes

Check Box Description

Include in Report Select this check box to include the field in the report.
Order By Select this check box to sort the order of the fields. If no Order By selections
are made, the report results sort by the objects key fields in the same order as
they appear on the window.

Report Window Drop-Down Lists

Drop-down lists allow you to select an additional modifier that you can use to fine-tune the search criteria. The
following table contains a list of the additional modifiers, but certain windows may contain additional drop-down lists
for object-specific fields.

Table 16: Drop-Down List for Report Window

List Item Result

contains Returns any record in the database that contains a particular pattern of characters.
starts with Returns any record in the database that starts with a particular pattern of characters.
ends with Returns any record in the database that ends with a particular pattern of characters.
wildcard Uses wildcard patterns (* or ?) in the search criteria.
• * - Represents any number of characters. For example, searching for Sys* produces
all records that begin with that pattern of characters.
• ? - Represents one character. For example, searching for SYSTEM? produces all
records that begin with SYSTEM followed by one character.

is Returns any record in the database that exactly matches the pattern of characters.
is not Returns any record in the database that does not match a particular pattern of integer
types.
is not like Returns any record in the database that does not match a particular pattern of characters.
between Returns any record in the database that matches the condition for the field used as the
filter. This is an integer-only field.

Report Window Action Buttons

The following table shows the action buttons that appear on the Report window.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 69

Table 17: Action Buttons

Action Button Description

Export Report Saves your data to an HTML file. The data from this file can be imported into
Windows Excel or Access or similar programs.
Note: Due to limitations in capacity of the receiving application, you may
have to create a narrowed report.

Generate Report Creates a report using the criteria and field selections currently entered in the Report
window.
Clear Resets all configurable fields in the Report window to their default state.
Close Closes the Report window.

Report Results
The Report Results (see the following figure) appear in a Web browser. The report shows the report name, date, time,
and total number of records selected. The key fields in the report appear by default along with the other fields that you
specified. You can use the Print and Save As commands from the browser.
Note: It is recommended to use the Printing version button above the report table.

Figure 17: Example of Report Results

Find Window Elements

This part describes the Find window elements, including:
• Window structure
• How to examine the Find results
The Find window allows you to search the database for records. This window shows all of the fields that you can
include in the search and contains a subset of the Configuration window fields for an object.
Fields are shown in the same groups and tabs as they appear on the objects Configuration window. You restrict the
data retrieved by entering selection criteria in certain fields.
The following are key points to remember:

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

70 | UCM Description

• If a field is left blank, it is not used as a criterion by the search. If you do not enter anything in the fields, the
search retrieves all of the records. Use the fields to narrow the search outcome.
• For integer fields, two fields allow you to enter a range of values.
• You can open one Find window for each applicable object in the navigation pane.

Find Window Structure

The Find window is a secondary window that contains tabs, fields, drop-down lists, and action buttons. Menu options
and toolbar icons are the same as on the UCM Main Window (see Commands on page 62).
To learn more about specific fields in the tabs, see Reference on page 215. For more information about the tabs on
the Find window, see Tabs on page 65.

Figure 18: Example of a Find Window

Find Window Drop-Down Lists

Drop-down lists allow you to select an additional modifier that you can use to fine-tune the search criteria. The
following table contains a list of the additional modifiers, but certain windows may contain additional drop-down lists
for object-specific fields.
Note: The contains field is not case-sensitive. All other text criteria are case-sensitive.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 71

Table 18: Drop-Down List for Find Window

List Item Result

contains Returns any record in the database that contains a particular pattern of characters.
starts with Returns any record in the database that starts with a particular pattern of characters.
ends with Returns any record in the database that ends with a particular pattern of characters.
wildcard Uses wildcard patterns (* or ?) in the search criteria.
• *-Represents any number of characters. For example, searching for Sys* produces
all records that begin with that pattern of characters.
• ?-Represents one character. For example, searching for SYSTEM? produces all
records that begin with SYSTEM followed by one character.

is Returns any record in the database that exactly matches the pattern of characters.
is not Returns any record in the database that does not match a particular pattern of integer
types.
is not like Returns any record in the database that does not match a particular pattern of characters.
between Returns any record in the database that matches the specified range. This is an integer-
only field. Once you select between, a second field is enabled to allow you enter the
range.

Find Window Action Buttons

The following table shows the action buttons that appear on the window.

Table 19: Action Buttons

Action Button Result

Find Now Starts a database query using the criteria entered in the Find window. The resulting table
of records is displayed in the find results table. When you click Find Now, the Search
icon animates to show that the database is searching.
New Search Removes all of the criteria from the fields so you can enter new information.

Find Results
The results of the search appear in a table of records at the bottom of the Find window.
If the table of records contains more records than the contents pane can display, a Warning dialog box appears:

Figure 19: Warning Dialog Box

You can select a record in the Find results table to perform the following commands:
• Open the New, Open, and Save As Configuration windows for a record.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

72 | UCM Description

• Delete the record.

• Select All records. Selecting all records allows you to do the following:
• Delete all records that match some common condition.
• Open the Select All dialog box, which allows you to update all records for the changes that you specify.
• Create a report on the record.

Figure 20: Example of Find Results

Note: The status bar identifies the number of objects found in the search. If your search does not retrieve
any results, 0 object(s) appears on the status bar.

Values Window Elements

This part describes the Values window elements, including:
• Window structure
• How to examine the Values results
The Values window allows you to search the database for data on a particular field.

Similarities Between the Values Window and the Find Window

Both the Values window and the Find window allow you to restrict the data retrieved in a search by entering selection
criteria in certain fields.
The following are key points to remember:
• If a field is left blank it is not used as a criterion by the search. If you do not enter anything in the fields, the search
retrieves all of the entries. Use the fields to narrow the search outcome.
• For integer fields, two fields allow you to enter a range of values.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 73

Differences Between the Values Window and the Find Window

The Values window works the same as the Find window with the following key differences:
• The search is at the entry level rather than record level. The Values window allows you to search the database on a
particular entry or entries to populate a field or a row in a dynamic table.
• The Values window shows only the fields that you can include in the search. While the Find window contains the
same fields as the configuration window for the object.
• You cannot open Configuration windows for the entries that appear in the table or delete them from this window.
• An OK button appears on the Values window that allows you to add the selected entry to the field. The Find
window does not have an OK button.
• You open the Values window by clicking the Values button which appears only on the Configuration window for
an object.

Values Window Structure

The Values window is a secondary window that contains fields, drop-down lists, and action buttons. Menu options
and toolbar icons are the same as on the UCM Main Window (see Commands on page 62).
To learn more about specific fields in the tabs, see Reference on page 215.

Figure 21: Example of a Values Window

Values Window Drop-Down Lists

Drop-down lists allow you to select an additional modifier that you can use to fine-tune the search criteria. The
following table contains a list of the additional modifiers, but certain windows may contain additional drop-down lists
for object-specific fields.
Note: The contains field is not case-sensitive. All other text criteria are case-sensitive.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

74 | UCM Description

Table 20: Drop-Down List for Values Window

List Item Result

contains Returns any record in the database that contains a particular pattern of characters.
starts with Returns any record in the database that starts with a particular pattern of characters.
ends with Returns any record in the database that ends with a particular pattern of characters.
is Returns any record in the database that exactly matches the pattern of characters.
is not Returns any record in the database that does not match a particular pattern of integer
types.
is not like Returns any record in the database that does not match a particular pattern of characters.
wildcard Uses wildcard patterns (* or ?) in the search criteria.
• *-Represents any number of characters. For example, searching for Sys* produces
all records that begin with that pattern of characters.
• ?-Represents one character. For example, searching for SYSTEM? produces all
records that begin with SYSTEM followed by one character.

between Returns any record in the database that matches the specified range. This is an integer-
only field. Once you select between, a second field is enabled to allow you to enter the
range.

Values Window Action Buttons

The following table shows the action buttons that appear on the window.

Table 21: Action Buttons

Action Button Result

Find Now Starts a database query using the criteria entered in the Values window. The resulting
table of entries is displayed in the Values results table. When you click Find Now, the
Search icon animates to show that the database is searching.
New Search Removes all of the criteria from the fields, so you can enter new information.
OK Applies the selected entry from the table to a field or a row in a dynamic table.

Values Results
The results of the Values search appear in a table of entries at the bottom of the Values window.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 75

Figure 22: Example of Values Results

If the table of entries contains more records than the contents pane can display, a Warning dialog box appears:

Figure 23: Warning Dialog Box

You can select a record in the Values results table, and then click OK to populate the field or row. For the Values
Results of an Add Row Values window, you can select multiple or non-consecutive selections.
Note: The status bar identifies the number of objects found in the search. If your search does not retrieve
results, 0 object(s) appears on the status bar.

Security Groups Selection WindowElements

The Security Groups Selection window allows you to filter the record selection by selecting security groups from the
list of groups that you can access. Security groups define the commands that are allowed on objects of a particular
security class. Each object record is associated with a security group.

Changing Preferences
You cannot change the permissions shown within each security group from the Security Groups Selection window.
See User on page 344 if you want to change permissions. Your current view consists of any security group to which
you have at least read access.

Security Groups Selection Window Structure

The Security Groups Selection window contains check boxes and action buttons. The window appears in a table
format with the selection check box, security group alias, and current permissions the user has for each security
group.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

76 | UCM Description

Figure 24: Example of a Security Groups Selection Window

Check Boxes
You filter your view of an application session based on the security groups and permissions assigned to each object.
Each user is given access to a certain number of security groups. Check boxes, shown in the window, define access to
a security group. The following table shows the check boxes that appear in the Security Groups Selection window.

Table 22: Security Groups Selection Window Check Boxes

Check Box Description

Selected? Allows you to select certain security groups to filter the record selection. Selecting this
check box only affects your current view of the records. If you select the Save Current
Selection for future use check box, then your view is affected for subsequent logins.
Security Group (Read only) Shows the names of the security groups assigned to this user.
Insert (Read only) Shows whether you have permission to add records to the database that
belong to the specified security group.
Update (Read only) Shows whether you have permission to modify the information in a record
that belongs to the specified security group.
Delete (Read only) Shows whether you have permission to delete a record that belongs to the
specified security group from the database.
RCM Attach (Read only) Shows whether you have permission to make attachment group
assignments for talkgroups that belong to a security group when creating RCM users.
You must have Attach access in your user record.
RCM Regroup (Read only) Shows whether you have permission to select a talkgroup only if you have
Regroup access to that talkgroups security group within the RCM Dynamic
Regrouping application.
Diagnostics (Read only) Shows whether you have permission to acknowledge or delete alerts, and
perform diagnostics for objects that belong to the specified security group.
Save Current Allows you to save the selected security preference filter and apply the selection to all
Selection for applications starting from that point. If you log out and log back in, then your last
future use security groups selection will be your current view. If you do not select this check box,
the changes are temporary for the current session only.

Home Zone Map Processing Status Window Elements

The Home Zone Map Processing State window contains status information regarding:
• Home Zone Mapping submission processing,

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 77

• Availability of elements in the system that are required for this processing,
• The map instances that are in process and map instances that are effective.
For multicluster systems, the window displays information only from zones that have been configured in this cluster.
The window consists of two tables:
• Zone Database Server State
• Home Zone Map Processing State for subscriber agents (that is PDGs and ZCs)

Figure 25: Example of a Home Zone Processing Status Window

Zone Database Server State

Table 23: Parameters for the Zone Database Server State Table

Field Description
Zone Alias (Read only) Displays the Zone Alias that uniquely identifies a zone.
Database Server Reachable (Read only) Displays whether the database server is in the ENABLED state
and Enabled and it is reachable from the UCS via the network.
Data Replication From UCS (Read only) Displays whether the UCS is able to replicate database records
to Zone Available to the zone.

Home Zone Map Processing State for Subscriber Agents

The following table describes the possible values for the Map Processing State field.

Table 24: Values for the Map Processing State Field

Value Description
NOT APPLICABLE Appears for all subscriber agents of the newly added zone or of a newly
installed system.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

78 | UCM Description

Value Description
PROCESSING STARTED You have just submitted a valid home zone mapping request. The
PROCESSING STARTED status is displayed only if all the validation that is
performed at map submission time succeeds. So, for example, if you attempt
to submit a map that would cause a home zone mapping violation for
talkgroups in multigroups, the PROCESSING STARTED status would never
be displayed.
MAP RECEIVED BY The Zone Database Server (ZDS) has just received the submitted map to be
ZONE MANAGER processed.
TALKGROUP The zone has started to download the talkgroups to the Subscriber Agent for
DOWNLOAD STARTED subscribers that have this zone as home zone according to the submitted
map, but not according to the original (old) map.
TALKGROUP The download of the talkgroups to the Subscriber Agent is complete.
DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE
INDIVIDUAL The zone has started the download of individual subscribers (to the
DOWNLOAD STARTED Subscriber Agent) that have this zone as home zone according to the
submitted map, but not according to the original (old) map.
INDIVIDUAL The download of the individual subscribers mentioned above to the
DOWNLOAD Subscriber Agent is complete.
COMPLETE
TALKGROUP MAP The zone has started the download of the talkgroup map version and ID
DOWNLOAD STARTED ranges of the submitted map to the Subscriber Agent.
INDIVIDUAL MAP The zone has started the download of the individual map version and ID
DOWNLOAD STARTED ranges of the submitted map to the Subscriber Agent.
TALKGROUP MAP The Subscriber Agent has received all the talkgroup map version and ID
DOWNLOAD ranges of the submitted map downloaded as mentioned above.
COMPLETE
INDIVIDUAL MAP The Subscriber Agent has received all the individual map version and ID
DOWNLOAD ranges of the submitted map downloaded as mentioned above.
COMPLETE
TALKGROUP MAP The Subscriber Agent has received all the talkgroup map version and ID
DOWNLOAD ranges of the submitted map downloaded as mentioned above.
COMPLETE
TALKGROUP DELETION The zone has started to delete talkgroups from the Subscriber Agent for
STARTED subscribers that have this zone as home zone according to the original (old)
map but not according to the submitted map.
TALKGROUP DELETION The deletion of the talkgroup instances mentioned above from the Subscriber
COMPLETE Agent is complete.
INDIVIDUAL DELETION The zone has started to delete individual subscribers from the Subscriber
STARTED Agent for subscribers that have this home zone defined in the original (old)
zone map, but not in the newly submitted map.
REMAPPING STATE The zone sends a request to the zone controller to set its state to
CHANGE STARTED REMAPPING.
REMAPPING STATE The zone has received acknowledgement for the remapping state change
CHANGE COMPLETE request from the subscriber agent of the zone controller.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 UCM Description | 79

Value Description
ENABLED STATE The zone sends a request to the zone controller to set its state to ENABLED.
CHANGE STARTED
ENABLED STATE The zone has received acknowledgement for the enabled state change
CHANGE COMPLETE request.
INDIVIDUAL DELETION The deletion of the individual subscriber from the Subscriber Agent is
COMPLETE complete.
PROCESSING The map processing for the Subscriber Agent is complete. This is an internal
COMPLETE status only. Note that if a Subscriber Agent has this status for map
processing, the Map Alias In Process, the Map In Process Revision Number,
and the Map Processing State column fields have the value NOT
APPLICABLE, and the Map Alias In Effect and the Map In Effect Revision
column fields will have the values from the map for which processing was
just completed. This status also applies to the case where a new zone is just
added to the system, and data replication has not yet started downloading the
last submitted map to that zone, and also in the situation of a newly installed
system where no map has yet been submitted. In these cases, the Map Alias
In Effect, Map Alias In Process, Map In Process Version, and Map In Effect
Version fields should all have the value of NONE (the Map Processing State
field will have the value of NOT APPLICABLE) for all subscribers agents
of the newly added zone or of the newly installed system.
UNKNOWN The status of map processing at a certain zone is unknown due to network
failure between the User Configuration Server (UCS) and that zone, or the
Zone Database Server (ZDS) of that zone not being enabled (i.e., the value
of the Database Server Reachable and Enabled field for that zone is NO). In
addition, the Map Alias in Process, the Map in Process Version, the Agent
State, and the Is Agent Active all display UNKNOWN.
WAIT FOR PROCESSING The value of the Database Server Reachable and Enabled field for the zone
of the Subscriber Agent is Yes, but the zone is not currently processing a
map submission for the Subscriber Agent, due to one of the following
conditions:
• VLR/HLR Maps Map Status UI Update
• The Subscriber Agent is unreachable,
• The Subscriber Agent of type Zone Controller is in LOADING or
STANDALONE state and performing initialization sequence,
• The Subscriber Agent of type PDR is synchronizing its database with the
ZDS
• The Subscriber Agent of type PDR is in the RESTARTING state
• The zone of the Subscriber agent has not yet received the maps due to the
data replication not being available from the UCS to that zone (the Data
Replication From UCS to Zone Available field has the value of NO for
that zone).
Note that when the subscribers and the maps have been downloaded to a
Subscriber Agent (in other words, the TALKGROUP/INDIVIDUAL MAP
DOWNLOAD COMPLETE and the TALKGROUP/INDIVIDUAL
DOWNLOAD COMPLETE statuses have appeared through the course of
processing a map), the Map Alias In Effect and the Map In Effect Version
column fields will have the values from the map for which processing is
underway. In this case, the values from the Map Alias In Process and Map In
Process Version column fields are copied.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

Chapter

2
Configuration

System Objects Configuration

Important:
This part contains configuration procedures for modifying specific objects parameters in the User
Configuration Server (UCS). Procedures contained within this part are critical and have a serious impact on
the system.

Configuring System Object Parameters

Configure certain system object parameters in the User Configuration Server (UCS) to get up the system. Perform the
following procedure and give all the parameters a value before the system can run correctly.
Warning: Do not tamper with factory configuration settings for these devices. This includes software
configuration, firmware release, password, and physical connections. Motorola has configured and
connected these devices to meet specific performance requirements. Tampering with these devices may
result in unpredictable system performance or catastrophic failure.
Procedure:
1 Select the System object.

Figure 26: System Object

2 From the File menu, select Open.

The System configuration window appears.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

82 | Configuration

Figure 27: System Configuration Window

Note: Default values appear in applicable fields, so you can keep the default values or select new values
as appropriate. The values above are example values, therefore you should not just copy them.

3 In the System Alias field enter SYSTEM1 or a similar name.

4 In the System Group field enter SYSTEM or a similar name.
5 In the Mobile Country Code field enter the relevant code for your country.
6 In the Mobile Network Code field enter the relevant code provided by your regulatory body.
7 In the System Code field enter 2.
8 Select the Configuration Tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Configuration | 83

Figure 28: System - Configuration Tab

Note: Default values appear in applicable fields, so you can keep the default values or select new values
as appropriate. The values above are example values, therefore you should not necessarily just copy
them.
9 Enter your required values in each field.
Note:
Air Interface Encryption and Authentication are optional features of the system and can only be enabled
on systems which include encryption functionality.
RUI Access Control - optional feature of the system and can only be enabled on systems with
RUA/RUI license.
10 Select an appropriate TEDS-related signaling option. See Table 33: Parameters for the System – Configuration
Tab on page 219 for more details.
Note:
Select Enable TEDS-related Signaling for all sites in system if the TEDS feature is used in the
system. Otherwise disable this functionality.
TEDS-related signaling must be enabled before any QAM channel is configured in the system.
Conversely all QAM channels must be removed from the system before the TEDS-related signaling is
disabled. In general, it is recommended to have the TEDS-related signaling enabled in the whole system
to prepare for future addition of TEDS services.
The dialog box prompting you to confirm the selected option appears.
11 In the Confirmation dialog box click OK.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

84 | Configuration

Note: You can configure TEDS-related signaling for individual MTS and EBTS Sites in the Zone
Configuration Manager application. For more information on configuring this feature, see the Zone
Configuration Manager manual.
TEDS-related signalling is enabled: in Zone Configuration Manager, in all MTS Site and EBTS Site settings the
Enable TEDS-related Signaling option is set to Yes.
12 Click Apply.
The information is saved.

Configuring Data System Object Parameters

Procedure:
1 Select the Data System object.

Figure 29: Data System Object

2 From the File menu, select Open.

The Data System Configuration window appears.

Figure 30: Data System Configuration Window

3 Press the Settings tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Configuration | 85

Figure 31: Data System – Settings Tab

4 Press the Advanced Settings tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

86 | Configuration

Figure 32: Data System Advanced Settings Tab

Note: Default values appear in applicable fields, so you can keep the default values or select new values
as appropriate. The values above are example values, therefore you should not just copy them.

5 Press the GGSN List tab.

Figure 33: Data System GGSN List Tab

6 Click the Add Row button to add a new GGSN.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Configuration | 87

7 Insert <GGSN ID> and <GGSN IP Address> into the <GGSN ID> and <GGSN IP Address> fields and
click Apply.
8 Click GGSN Mappings tab.

Figure 34: Data System GGSN Mapping Tab

9 Click Add row button.

The User Configuration Manager screen appears.

Figure 35: User Configuration Manager Window

10 Select GGSN IP Address and click OK.

The GGSN is now added.
11 Insert the <APN Network ID> into the APN Network ID field and click Apply.
The Data System Object has now been applied.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

88 | Configuration

Radio Command Configuration Requirements

Radio commands require configuration at the subscriber and system level. Subscriber level configuration
requirements include:
• Programming a valid system ID
• Programming a valid subscriber unit ID
• Programming the unit with all assigned talkgroups, including the talkgroup designated as primary talkgroup in the
radio user record assigned to the unit in the UCM.
The following process presents the system level configuration in the order recommended for initial system
configuration.
Process:
1 Create the Talkgroup and Multigroup records.
2 Create the Radio records.
3 Create the Radio User records and enter the primary talkgroup in the designated field. Primary talkgroups and
corresponding radio user records are identified during system fleetmap design.
4 Create the RCM User records with the proper application and system access permissions.
5 Attach the talkgroups designated in the fleetmap for each RCM user. See Talkgroup Attachment List for an RCM
User on page 88.
6 Assign each RCM User login to the appropriate individual.

Importance of Talkgroup Attachments and Primary Talkgroups

Talkgroup attachments and primary talkgroup assignments directly affect user permissions. During configuration,
each RCM user is assigned, or attached to a list of talkgroups. The Talkgroup attachment list determines with which
talkgroups the RCM user can communicate and monitor.
Also during configuration, Radio Users are assigned a primary talkgroup. Only RCM Users who are attached to a
radio users primary talkgroup can issue to commands to the radio.

Talkgroup Attachment List for an RCM User

Each RCM user monitors traffic and communicates with talkgroups on users attachment list. The attachment list for
an RCM user is configured using the User Configuration Manager (UCM) application.
The following figure shows the Radio Control Manager Configuration tab, where the talkgroup attachment list is
built for a specific RCM User.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Configuration | 89

Figure 36: Example of the User Configuration Manager

The Attach all Talkgroupsfield is useful when only one RCM user has been created for the entire system. A single
RCM user is not recommended in multiple zone system where a large number of radio users and talkgroups are the
norm. No further action is necessary if the Attach all Talkgroups field is set to yes. If the field is set to No, the Add
Row button in the Radio Control Attachments part of the tab can be used to add the talkgroups indicated in the system
fleetmap for this RCM user.
The fields to the right of the Attachment group are enabled by default when a talkgroup is added to the list. The check
box is cleared to remove from the RCM user the ability to perform that particular task. The check box for Inhibit is
left enabled for any RCM user who wants to perform this task.
The Apply button is used to save the configuration once the list is complete and the appropriate permissions have
been set for each talkgroup.
Note: It is not necessary to create an RCM user for the supermgr login. The supermgr login has access to
all talkgroups and radio users by default and can execute any RCM command with any radio in the system.

Important: For operational efficiency and better security management, it is recommended that more than
one RCM user is created to distribute the talkgroup responsibility throughout the system. RCM users can
be created for each zone or security group. Execution of RCM commands from the supermgr login should
be the exception rather than the rule.

Primary Talkgroups
Configure all radio users with a primary talkgroup. RCM users can only send commands to radio users whose primary
talkgroup assignment is in the RCM users attachment list. The following figure shows the primary talkgroup field in
the radio user record. A talkgroup alias can be entered in the blank space or selected from a list by using the button to
the right of the field. Only one primary talkgroup can be assigned to a radio user. The primary talkgroup cannot be an
Object Group.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

90 | Configuration

Figure 37: Primary Talkgroup Assignment

Installing and Configuring Unicode Font Support

Unicode is an industry standard designed to allow text and symbols to be consistently represented and manipulated by
computers. Character encoding used in ZCM is UTF-8 (8bit Unicode Transformation Format). It is a variable-length
character encoding type. It is able to represent any universal character in the Unicode standard. It is consistent with
ASCII requires little or no change for software that handles ASCII but preserves other values.
Important: It is recommended to use ARIAL UNICODE MS font, it supports most of the countries.

Procedure:
1 Go to Start → Control Panel → Regional and language options.
2 On the Languages tab click Details.
3 Go to Advanced tab.
4 Check Extend support of advanced text services to all programs and click OK.
5 Copy the Unicode font (e.g. Arial Unicode MS) to the C:\Windows\Fonts directory.
Note: Other Unicode fonts may also be installed but not all of them may be displayed correctly.

6 Open a command prompt (CMD) window and type:

cd %ProgramFiles(x86)%\Motorola\PNM\version>\Network Mgmt\utf_fix
(where version determines the version of the installed UCM application) followed by Enter.
7 Type utf_fix.bat [font name] replacing [font name] with the name of the Unicode font put in quotation
marks installed in step 5 and press Enter. Example: utf_fix.bat Arial Unicode MS
The message is displayed: Operation completed successfully
8 Go to Start → Control Panel → Display.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Configuration | 91

9 On the Appearance tab click on Advanced.

Advanced Appearance dialog box appears.
10 Go to Item drop-down list and select Active Title Bar.
11 From Font drop-down list choose Arial Unicode MS.
12 Go to Item drop-down list and select Inactive Title Bar.
13 From Font drop-down list choose Arial Unicode MS.
14 Click OK to go to the previous window and then click OK again.
The Title Bar icon is set up.

Installing License Keys from the Installation Menu

To proceed with installation of license keys, see Backup and Restore Including FRU/FRE manual.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

Chapter

3
Operation

User Configuration Manager Procedures

This part contains the general tasks that you perform in the UCM. Using the generic procedures is possible as long as
the command is valid.

Opening the UCM Main Window

The following procedure explains how to open the UCM. For more information, see the Online Help to the
Application Launcher Help application.
Procedure:
1 Double-click the Motorola Private Radio Network Management Suite Application Launcher icon on the desktop.
Note: In a multicluster system, you are only able to see the cluster that you have actually logged into.

The Windows Explorer window appears.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

94 | Operation

Figure 38: Windows Explorer

2 Double-click User Configuration Manager.

The UCM main window appears.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 95

Figure 39: UCM Main Window

Switching Between Class and Instance Based Navigation

The following procedure describes how to switch between the Class Based Navigation paradigm and the Instance
Based Navigation paradigm.
Procedure:
1 From the Edit menu, select Preferences → Options.
The User Preferences window appears.
2 Select Class Based Navigation (CBN) or Instance Based Navigation (IBN).
3 Click OK.
4 From the File menu, select Exit.
The UCM application window closes.
5 Click OK to confirm termination of the window.
6 Restart the UCM application.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

96 | Operation

Note:
If you are starting the UCM application, and have not previously selected a navigation option (Instance
Based or Class Based), the application appears with Class Based Navigation.
A message may appear, indicating that a User Preferences file cannot be found. This is for notification
only. When no User Preferences file is found, a new file is automatically created.
Upon startup, the UCM application uses the navigation paradigm (Instance Based or Class Based) most recently
selected.

Creating a New Record Using System Defaults

The following procedure explains how to create a record for any object using the system default values. The New
Configuration window allows you to create a record. For specific information about each field in the UCM, see
Reference on page 215.
The following are guidelines for opening New Configuration windows:
• For each object, you can open one New Configuration window at a time. Select different objects to open multiple
records.
• You cannot open multiple New Configuration windows for the same object by selecting multiple records.
Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 From the File menu, select New.
A new Configuration window appears for the selected object. Default values appear in applicable fields, so you
can keep the default values or select new values. The key fields are blank so that you can create a new record. The
appearance of the window varies for each object type.

Figure 40: New Configuration Window

3 Enter the necessary information.

Note: If values for a particular field already exist in the database, the Values button appears to the right
of the field. See Finding a Value in the Database on page 110.

4 When you are finished entering information, click Apply.

The unique key fields are cleared and default fields appear. You can enter information to create another record.
5 Click Cancel to close the Configuration window.
Note: From the View menu, click Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 97

Creating A New Record Using Existing Records

The following procedure explains how to create a record based on a record that contains default parameters (also
known as, cloning a record). The Save As Configuration window allows you to clone a record to create a record.
For example, to create a User record, you can choose a record that has the same type of specified parameters. Then,
you can enter a new User Login Name, and modify the other fields as needed. For specific information about each
field in the UCM, see Reference on page 215.
The following items are guidelines for opening Save As Configuration windows:
• You can have two Save As Configuration windows open at a time for the same object, but the windows must
represent different records. If you attempt to open a third Save As Configuration window for that object, an error
message appears.
• For different objects, you can have multiple Save As Configuration windows open at the same time.
Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 Select a record from the contents pane.
3 From the File menu, select Save As.
A Configuration window appears for the selected object. Default values appear in applicable fields, so you can
keep the default values or select new values. The key fields are cleared so that you can create a new record. The
appearance of the window varies for each object type.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

98 | Operation

Figure 41: Save As Configuration Window

4 Enter the appropriate values in the key fields.

Note: If values for a particular field already exist in the database, the Values button appears to the right
of the field. See Finding a Value in the Database on page 110.

5 When you are finished entering information, click Apply.

The key fields are cleared, and you can enter information to create another record.
6 Click Cancel to close the Configuration window.
Note: From the View menu, click Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Modifying a Single Record

This part explains how to use the Configuration windows to modify existing records in the User Configuration
Manager (UCM). For specific information about each field in the UCM, see Reference on page 215.
For an object, you can open one record at a time. If you select one record, the label on the Configuration window
reads Open
The following procedure explains how to modify a record using an Open Configuration window for an object in the
UCM. The following are guidelines for Open Configuration windows:

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 99

• You can have two Open Configuration windows open at a time for the same object, but the windows must
represent different records. If you attempt to open a third Open Configuration window for that object, an error
message appears.
• For different objects, you can have multiple Open Configuration windows open at the same time.
Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 Select a record from the contents pane.
3 From the File menu, select Open.
A Configuration window appears for the selected object. Default values appear in applicable fields, so you can
keep the default values or select new values. The key fields are grayed out so that you cannot change them. The
appearance of the window varies for each object type.

Figure 42: Open Configuration Window

4 Modify the available fields in the Configuration window.

Note: If values for a particular field already exist in the database, the Values button appears to the right
of the field. See Finding a Value in the Database on page 110.

5 When you are finished entering information, click Apply.

The record is modified.
6 Click Cancel to close the Configuration window.
Note: From the View menu, click Refresh to see the modified record in the contents pane.

Modifying All Records

This part explains how to use the Configuration windows to modify existing records in the User Configuration
Manager (UCM). For specific information about each field in the UCM, see Reference on page 215.
For an object, you can select all records. If you select all of the records, the label on the Open Configuration window
reads Open All.
For example, if a table contains five records, you can select all of the records to open an Open All Configuration
window. But you cannot select two out of the five records and attempt to open a Configuration window.
The following procedure explains how to modify all records using an Open All Configuration window for an object in
the UCM. The Open All Configuration window displays the common fields for all records. Changing these fields
applies the new parameters to every record. The Open All Configuration window allows you to make global changes
to all of the records for an object. The following are guidelines for opening Open All Configuration windows:

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

100 | Operation

• For an object, you can select all records by using the Select All command or by highlighting all records in the
table.
• For different objects, you can have multiple Open All Configuration windows open at the same time.
Note: Not all records allow the Select All command.

Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 From the Edit menu, choose Select All.
All of the records in the contents pane appear highlighted.
3 From the File menu, choose Open.
Note:
The Radio User, ZW Raw Data Filter, Load Class objects contain check boxes by parameters, which
you can select and apply changes for all records. When you select a specific parameter, a Confirmation
dialog box appears listing all the selected parameters. If some parameter cannot be selected, an error
message appears informing about this action.

The Configuration window appears for the selected object. Default values appear in applicable fields, so you can
keep the default values or select new values. The key fields are grayed out so that you cannot change them. The
appearance of the window varies for each object type.

Figure 43: Example of a Select All Configuration Window

4 Modify the available fields in the Configuration window.

5 When you are finished entering information, click Apply.
The records are modified.
6 Click Cancel to close the Configuration window.
Note: From the View menu, click Refresh to see the modified record in the contents pane.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 101

Figure 44: Example of Applying Changes to Specific Parameters in the Radio User Object

Deleting a Record
Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 Select a record from the contents pane.
3 From the File menu, select Delete.
The Confirmation dialog box appears.

Figure 45: Confirmation Dialog Box

4 Click OK.
The record is deleted from the database.

Committing Changes
Group Commit allows you to apply configuration changes to the site equipment after you have saved configuration
changes to console object records. Commit object record changes when you are ready to use them within the system.
The following process describes how object record data is committed for use in the system.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

102 | Operation

Besides committing changes, you can also roll back changes; that is, undo the most recently saved configuration
changes.
A Group Commit Report provides a list of all modifications made to the records of group objects.
Process:
1 Add or update console object records.
2 Save the configuration changes.
3 Commit the configuration changes when you are ready to use the saved configuration values within the system.
The group committed changes are downloaded to the respective devices.

Committing Changes to a Group of Console Site Records

Process:
1 Select any member record of a group to be committed. While in CBN, the group member is selected from the
contents pane. While in IBN, the group member is selected from the contents pane. The container group member
can also be selected from the navigation pane.
2 From the Group menu, select the Commit command.
The Group Commit Confirmation Window is displayed showing the status of the group members.
3 This step is optional. Select ViewGroup Summary Only to select the summary level of details.
When Group Summary Only is checked, the appropriate group summary table is listed. When Group Summary
Only is not checked, every newly created, updated, or deleted record in the group is listed.
4 ClickConfirm.
The data is committed for the group members.

Related Links
Rolling Back to Previously Committed Values on page 102
Reporting Group Status on page 102

Rolling Back to Previously Committed Values

Rollback allows you to discard saved data, and replace it with the last committed values.
Process:
1 Select any member record of a group to be rolled back. While in CBN, the group member is selected from the
contents pane. While in IBN, the group member is selected from the contents pane. The container group member
can also be selected from the navigation pane.
2 From the Group menu, select the Rollback command.
The Group Rollback Confirmation Window is displayed showing the status of the group members.
3 This step is optional. Select ViewGroup Summary Only to select the summary level of details.
When Group Summary Only is checked, the appropriate group summary table is listed. When Group Summary
Only is not checked, every object in the group is listed.
4 Click Confirm.
The saved data is replaced with the last committed values for the group members.

Reporting Group Status

The Group Status Report window lists the uncommitted changes made for all object groups. It also indicates the last
user to commit the change of these records. The Group Status window operates the same within CBN and IBN.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 103

The Group Status Report is similar in appearance to the Group Commit Confirmation and the Group Rollback
Confirmation windows.
Process:
1 Select a console site object.
2 Select GroupCommit Status.
The Group Status Window appears.
3 Click OK.
The Group Status Window closes.

Creating a Default Report

This part explains how to create reports in the User Configuration Manager (UCM) that you can view using a Web
browser. You can also print a copy or save the information to a file. The fields in the Report window are the same as
the fields in the Configuration windows for the object. This report can become lengthy.
The field information in reports is spread out across multiple tables in the database. Each record may or may not have
any relationship to a table, so the report does not show that record if no relationship exists.
• If you do not modify the default values in a report, the report results only include a subset of the fields in the
Configuration windows (that is, the results show only the fields that would appear in the Find window for the
object).
Note: If you make a mistake and want to remove the information from the Report window, click Clear. All
of the check boxes and fields are cleared to reflect their state when data entry started.

Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 From the File menu, click Report.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

104 | Operation

Figure 46: Report Window – Default Example

The Report window appears. The fields that uniquely identify the record are preselected and cannot be cleared.
The appearance of the window varies for each object type.
3 If you need to sort the data in a particular order, select the Order By check boxes. As you select a checkbox, a
number indicates the order in which the information appears in the report. You can select or clear the check boxes
until you have the order that you want.
4 If you want to save your data to an HTML file, click the Export Report button.
Note: The data from this file can be imported into Windows Excel or Access or similar programs. Due
to limitations in capacity of the receiving application, you may have to create a narrowed report.

The Export To... window appears. Enter file name and click Save.
5 Click Generate Report. A report header shows the report name, date, time, and number of records specified. The
selected check boxes in the report appear by default.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 105

Figure 47: Report Results Window – Default Example

A Web browser appears showing the report. Since you did not enter criteria to narrow the report, the report shows
all possible records.
6 Save the Report results.
a From the File menu, select Save As.
b Navigate to the location where you want to save the file. Create a new folder if desired.
c Create a unique name for the report page and click Save. If you do not create a unique name, the existing file
will be overwritten.
d If the report has multiple pages, select the next page from the left navigation pane, repeat steps 1 to 3, and
create a unique name for each page you are saving.
7 Print the Report results. Do it by clicking on Printing version. All parameters are displayed in two columns then.
It is also possible to print the report from the web browser. This method provides limited results as only a portion
of the report may actually be printed.

Figure 48: Report Result Printing Version

Creating a Narrowed Report

This part explains how to create reports in the User Configuration Manager (UCM) that you can view using a Web
browser. You can also print a copy or save the information to a file. The fields in the Report window are the same as
the fields in the Configuration windows for the object.
The field information in reports is spread out across multiple tables in the database. Each record may or may not have
any relationship to a table, so the report does not show that record if no relationship exists.
Reports work in the following manner:

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

106 | Operation

• If you select a specific field, your report becomes limited to the records under that object that also include the
specific field that you selected. The report tries to find all records which have entries in the database tables for
both the object record and the field entry. If you generate a report in which several fields are selected, any record
that does not have every one of the fields is excluded. This effect is additive, the record, plus the first field, plus
the next field, and so on.
For example, if you want to generate a User report, you could create a report limited only to users who have access to
all zones and who have access to all applications. The report results would show only those users who meet both
criteria.
Note: If you make a mistake and want to remove the information from the Report window, click Clear. All
of the check boxes and fields are cleared to reflect their state when data entry started. If you enter criteria
that has no associated records, an Information dialog box appears to inform you that the search produced an
empty list.
Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 From the File menu, click Report.
The Report window appears ( Figure 49: Report Window – Narrowed Example on page 106). The fields that
uniquely identify the record are preselected. They are grayed out and cannot be cleared. The appearance of the
window varies for each object type.

Figure 49: Report Window – Narrowed Example

3 Enter information in the Criteria column to narrow your report outcome.

4 Select or clear the Include in Report check boxes to determine which subset of the data entry fields appear in the
report. Some check boxes are selected by default and cannot be cleared.
5 Select the Order By check boxes to sort the data by the order of the report fields. As you select a checkbox, a
number indicates the order in which the information appears in the report. You can select or clear the check boxes
until you have the order that you want.
6 If you want to save your data to an HTML file, click the Export Report button.
Note: The data from this file can be imported into Windows Excel or Access or similar programs. Due
to limitations in capacity of the receiving application, you may have to create a narrowed report.

The Export To... window appears. Enter file name and click Save.
7 Click Generate Report. A report header shows the report name, date, time, and number of records specified. The
selected check boxes in the report appear by default along with the other fields that you specified.
A Web browser appears showing the report. Since you entered criteria to narrow the report, the report shows only
the records that meet the specified criteria.
8 Print the Report results. Do it by clicking on Printing version. All parameters are displayed in two columns then.
It is also possible to print the report from the web browser. This method provides limited results as only a portion
of the report may actually be printed.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 107

Displaying More Than 100 Records

If the table of records contains more records than the contents pane can display, a warning dialog box appears
informing that some records may not be visible.
User Configuration Manager can display only 100 records. If you need to view more records, generate a report in a
web browser. You can also export the report to a file and save it.
Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 Click OK in the warning dialog box.
Note: If a selected object contains more than 100 records, a warning appears informing that some
records may not be visible.

3 From the File menu, click Report.

The Report window appears. The fields that uniquely identify the record are preselected. They are grayed out and
cannot be cleared. The appearance of the window varies for each object type.

Figure 50: Report Window – Default Example

4 Optional: In the Report Window enter information in the Criteria column to narrow your report outcome.
Note:
To create a narrowed report, follow the procedure Creating a Narrowed Report on page 105.
To find a particular report, follow the procedure Finding a Record on page 109.
5 If you want to save your data to an HTML file, click the Export Report button.
Note: The data from this file can be imported into Windows Excel or Access or similar programs. Due
to limitations in capacity of the receiving application, you may have to create a narrowed report.

The Export To... window appears. Enter the file name and click Save.
6 If you want to view the report in a web browser, click Generate Report. A report header shows the report name,
date, time, and number of records specified. The selected check boxes in the report appear by default along with
the other fields that you specified.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

108 | Operation

Figure 51: Report Results Window – Default Example

A Web browser appears showing the report. Since you did not enter criteria to narrow the report, the report shows
all possible records.
7 Optional: Save the report results:
a From the File menu, select Save As.
b Navigate to the location where you want to save the file. Create a new folder if needed.
c Create a unique name for the report page and click Save. If you do not create a unique name, the existing file
will be overwritten.
d If the report has multiple pages, select the next page from the left navigation pane, repeat steps 1 to 3, and
create a unique name for each page you are saving.
8 Optional: Print the Report results by clicking on Printing version. All parameters are displayed in two columns
then. It is also possible to print the report from the web browser. This method provides limited results as only a
portion of the report may actually be printed.

Figure 52: Result Report – Printing Version

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 109

Finding a Record
The following procedure explains how to search the User Configuration Manager (UCM) database for a record. You
can perform a search on the fields by entering search criteria. The Find window includes a subset of the fields in the
Configuration windows.
Procedure:
1 Select an object from the navigation pane.
2 From the Edit menu, select Find.
The Find window appears. The appearance of the window varies for each object type. The name of the object
appears in the title bar.

Figure 53: Find Window

3 Enter criteria in the fields. You can search using several methods:
• Keep the default settings. Do not enter any search criteria in the fields or select from the drop-down list of
modifiers. All records for that item are retrieved.
• Use the drop-down lists to select an additional modifier that you can use to fine-tune the search criteria. See
Find Window Structure on page 70 for more information.
• Enter the exact information into the text boxes for each field.
4 Click Find Now. The status bar shows 0 object(s) if your search does not find records.
Note: If you enter criteria that has no associated records, an Information dialog box appears to inform
you that the search produced an empty list.

Note: The status bar shows the total number of records found in the database. You can only view 100
records at a time. You can narrow your search by adding more criteria to your search.

If your search finds records that match the search criteria, the Find Results table of records appears.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

110 | Operation

Figure 54: Find Results Window

5 You can do the following from the Find results table: Select a record in the Find results table to perform one of the
following commands: Click a column heading to sort entries in the column:
• New to open a configuration window for the selected record, so you can create a new record.
• Open to open a configuration window for the selected record, so you can modify the record.
• Save As to open a configuration window for the selected record, so you can clone the record.
• Delete to delete the record.
• Report to create a report for the selected record.
• Click the first time to sort in ascending order.
• Click the second time to sort in descending order.

Finding a Value in the Database

The Values window is like the Find window, but searches only on a particular field. The following procedure explains
how to search the User Configuration Manager (UCM) database for a value. You can perform a search on the entries
by entering search criteria in the text fields.
Note: You cannot open Configuration windows for the records that appear in the table or delete them from
the Values window.

Procedure:
1 From a configuration window, click one of the following buttons: Values or Add Row

The Values window appears. The appearance of the window varies for each object type. The record entries appear
automatically, but you may need to narrow the search. The status bar shows the number of objects found, if it
shows 0 objects, then no objects were found.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 111

Figure 55: Values Window

2 Select one of the following:

• Select an entry, and click OK.
• If too many entries appear, you may want to narrow the table of entries that appear. Continue to the next step.
3 Enter criteria in the fields as desired. You can search using several methods:
• Use the drop-down lists to select an additional modifier that you can use to fine-tune the search criteria. See
Values Window Structure on page 73 for more information.
• Enter the exact information into the text boxes for each field.
4 Click Find Now. The status bar shows 0 object(s) if your search does not find records.
Note: If you enter criteria that has no associated entries, an Information dialog box appears to inform
you that the search produced an empty list.

Note: The status bar shows the total number of records found in the database. You can only view 100
records at a time. You can narrow your search by adding more criteria to your search.

If your search finds records that match the search criteria, the new Values Results table of entries appears.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

112 | Operation

Figure 56: Values Results Window

5 You can also click a column heading to sort entries in the column:
• Click the first time to sort in ascending order.
• Click the second time to sort in descending order.
6 Select an entry, and click OK.

Selecting Security Group Preferences

The following procedure explains how to select a Security Group in order to filter the record selection. It also allows
you to save the settings in the User Configuration Manager (UCM) for future use. Your current view consists of any
security group to which you have at least read access.
Procedure:
1 SelectSecurity.
The Security Groups Selection window appears for the selected object.

Figure 57: Security Groups Selection Window

2 From the Edit menu, select Preferences.

3 In order to put into effect the security settings for a particular Security Group, select and tick the Selected check
box for the Security Group. See the following example:

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 113

Note: By default, you must have one security group selected. If you attempt to clear all security groups,
an Error dialog box appears.

If selected, the security groups filter the record selection for future logins.

Figure 58: Security Groups Selection Window – Selected Example

4 If you want to save the current selection, select the Save Current Selection for future use check box.
5 Click OK.

Viewing the Home Zone Map Processing State

The following procedure explains how to open and view the Home Zone Map Processing State window. See Home
Zone Map Processing Status Window Elements on page 76 for details about the information presented.
Procedure:
1 From the Tools menu, select Home Zone Map Processing State.

Figure 59: Home Zone Map Processing State Window

The Home Zone Map Processing State window appears.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

114 | Operation

2 Examine the information presented in the map as needed. See Home Zone Map Processing Status Window
Elements on page 76 for more details.
3 Click Close.
The Home Zone Map Processing State window closes.

Mapping Zones to Alias Server in Zone to AS Map

Procedure:
1 In ZCM, perform procedure How to Create Alias Server.
2 In the UCM, select the Zone to AS Map object.
3 From the View menu, select Refresh to see all records in the contents pane.
4 Select a record in the contents pane and from the File menu select Open.
The Zone to AS Map configuration window appears.
5 To verify whether right record is chosen, select Basic Tab.

Figure 60: Zone to AS Map – Basic Tab

6 Select Configuration Tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 115

Figure 61: Zone to AS Map – Configuration Tab

7 Click on Add Row button in order to map a Zone to the Alias Server. The Values window appears showing a list
of valid zones listed by aliases and IDs.
8 Select a zone alias, and then click OK.
9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 if you want more Zones to be mapped to the Alias Server.
10 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
11 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.

Mapping Zones to Short Data Router in Zone to SDR Map

Procedure:
1 In ZCM, create a record for SDR object.
2 In the UCM, select the Zone to SDR Map object.
3 From the View menu, select Refresh to see all records in the contents pane.
4 Select a record in the contents pane and from the File menu select Open.
The Zone to SDR Map configuration window appears
5 To verify whether right record is chosen, select Basic Tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

116 | Operation

Figure 62: Zone to SDR Map – Basic Tab

6 Select Configuration tab.

Figure 63: Zone to SDR Map – Configuration Tab

7 Click on Add Row button in order to map a Zone to the SDR. The Values window appears showing a list of valid
zones listed by aliases and IDs.
8 Select a zone alias, and then click OK.
9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 if you want more Zones to be mapped to the SDR.
10 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
11 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 117

Updating Home Zone Mappings

Overview of Home Zone Mappings

This part gives an overview of the Home Zone Mapping object and the impact of home zone mapping configuration
on the system.
Important: Home Zone Mappings are critical to system operation. Plan and configure them with extreme
care. System engineers create a Home Zone Mapping record when configuring the system initially.
Consider the ramifications when changing the initial configuration.
The Home Zone Mapping object configures attributes related to talkgroups, multigroups, and individual radio users
for a specific zone. Each radio user and talkgroup ID is assigned to a zone based upon ID ranges configured in the
Home Zone Mapping object. The zone assigned to a particular ID is said to be that IDs home zone.
After configuring objects in the UCM, the configuration information is replicated from the User Configuration Server
(UCS) to the Zone Database Server (ZDS) in each zone along with a file that maps individual and group IDs to their
home zone.
The home zone to which the ID is assigned has the following impact on how the system operates:
• Configuration information is distributed throughout the system based on the home zone assignment of the IDs. A
zone stores the configuration information only for those individual and group IDs that are home to that zone. This
information is stored in the Home Location Register (HLR) for that zone.
• For group call services, the home zone of the group is always the controlling zone for the call. Regardless of the
zone to which the group member is currently registered.
Important: Be careful when changing home zone maps to avoid loss of interzone trunking.

You may experience adverse system impacts when changing home zone maps, such as a loss of interzone trunking.
Until the group or individual maps have completed downloading, the following situations occur:
• A change in group mapping causes the system to drop out of interzone trunking.
• A change in the individual maps results in using default records.

Effect of Improper Mappings

The home zone map is a database that shows the individual and talkgroup ID ranges assigned to each zone. Because
you assign the ranges ahead of time, any radio or talkgroup that you configure with an ID in one of these ranges
automatically has the zone with that ID allocation assigned as its home zone. IDs are assigned to each zone in ranges
to avoid the need to assign more IDs when new users or talkgroups are added to the system. The Radio/Group Home
Zone Mappings table specifies up to 2048 radio or group ID ranges. Each range specifies the home location for radios
and talkgroups/multigroups. Because home zone mappings are a critical piece of the system, plan and configure them
with extreme care. Improper mappings result in the following:
• Radios or groups roaming to different zones may experience reduced capabilities and functionality.
• Radios may experience longer call setup times and general slowness in access to the system.
• The UCM may experience sluggishness in operation.
• For changes to group mappings, a period of several minutes occurs, during which each zone operates in zone
isolation (no interzone trunking). If connections between subsystems go down, the wait increases.
Important: Set up the group mappings in such a way that all the talkgroups belonging to a multigroup are
mapped to the same home zone.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

118 | Operation

Versionized Home Zone Mappings in Multicluster Systems

The home zone mapping must be identical in all clusters. A version number (actually a time stamp) identifies each
home zone map. That allows the zone controllers to check that they have identical versions of the home zone maps. If
it is not the case interzone trunking mode only happens within the local cluster, and not between zones in other
clusters.
You assign a time stamp to a map when you submit it to the UCS. It is your responsibility as operator to make sure
that the same map version is selected for all clusters when you activate a new map.
The system provides you with a Home Zone Map Processing Status window. This window displays information
related to the map download progress for each PDG and ZC (subscriber agents) in the system. From the Tools menu,
select Home Zone Map Processing State. See the User Configuration Manager Online Help for detailed information
about the Home Zone Map Processing Status window.
Process:
1 Create a Home Zone Mapping table, for example using a spreadsheet tool, and review it in a central location.
After approval, load it into all clusters as a new version. See Creating a Home Zone Map on page 118. This phase
is not time critical, as the new Home Zone Mapping is only stored as a new version in the UCS of each cluster it
will not become active immediately.
2 Decide on a version number, actually a time stamp. This version number is assigned to the map when you make it
active, and will be used by the Zone Controllers to check if they have identical Home Zone Mapping versions.
3 In the UCM, log in to each cluster and activate the new Home Zone Mapping table, by manually entering the
version number. See Submitting a Home Zone Map on page 122. The Home Zone Mapping table will be
automatically distributed to all Zone Controllers, Packet Data Gateways and Short Data Routers within each
cluster.

Creating a Home Zone Map

Creating a home zone map involves naming the map, adding zones to the record, and adding a range of IDs.
Note: The starting value of every range must be one greater than the ending value of the previous range.
For example, if the last number of an ID range is 100, the first number of the next range must be 101 to
create blocks of radio IDs.
All Zone Controllers must use the same home zone map. Otherwise, the Inter-Zone link cannot be established, which
results in lack of voice transmission.
Important:
A change in Home Zone Mapping takes place in several steps. It ensures that all information is available to
the ZC and PDG immediately after a Home Zone Mapping change. However, it means that the ZC and
PDG for a short period hold all the subscribers that have home in the zone both before and after the
remapping. This total number must not exceed the 64,000 subscriber limit. As an example, if 1,000
subscribers moves out of a zone but 1,000 subscribers moves into the zone, the total number of subscribers
in the ZC and PDG temporarily increases by 1000 during a remapping. The remapping can thus only take
place if the initial total number of subscribers are less than 63,000.
The same refers to talkgroups. The total number must not exceed the 16,000 talkgroups limit. For example,
if 200 talkgroups moves out of a zone but 200 talkgroups moves into the zone, the total number of
subscribers in the ZC will temporarily increase by 200 during a remapping. The remapping can thus only
take place if the initial total number of talkgroups are less than 15,800.
In case of losing any subscriber/talkgroup records, after remapping it is necessary to perform the download
of SAC. For details on how to perform this, see Backup and Restore Including FRU/FRE manual.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 119

Creating a Home Zone Map - Basic Tab

Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Home Zone Mapping object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Home Zone Mapping configuration window appears.

Figure 64: Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab

3 Enter the Map ID. This is a number from 1 to 32 that uniquely identifies the map.
4 Enter the Map Alias. The alias may be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " % $ ? / \
5 Select a Security Group.
6 The Press here to submit map button is unavailable at this point. Continue to Creating a Home Zone Map –
Individual Maps Tab on page 120 where you can enter the values on the Individual Maps tab.
7 Select Map Procedure Type.
•Automatic submitting of HZM is without operators interference.
•Stop Before Map Download after download of the radio user and TG/MG onto ZC, in each cluster the
process of sending the map has to be done by clicking on the button.
8 Select Synchronize Individual to SSI Map.
•Yes Individual Maps will be copied to Short Subscriber Mappings. The user is not allowed to enter Short
Subscriber Identity Mappings
• No Individual Maps and Short Subscriber Mappings are handled independently. The user must enter data for
both.
9 Select Synchronize Individual to Group Map.
• Yes Individual Maps will be copied to Group Maps. The user is not allowed to enter Group Maps.
• No Individual Maps and Group Maps are handled independently. The user must enter data for both.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

120 | Operation

Creating a Home Zone Map – Individual Maps Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Individual Maps tab to add a zone and enter the range of the IDs.
Procedure:
1 Select the Individual Maps tab.

Figure 65: Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab

2 Click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of zones.
3 Select a zone, then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 In the Radio ID Mapping Start field, enter the value for the beginning of the range. The range for this field is
from 0 to 16777215. This number must begin where the last range ended. For example, if the first block of radio
IDs ended with 100, the next block must start with 101.
Important: All Radio IDs mappings must be set accurately and are critical to the systems operation.

5 In the Radio ID Mapping End field, enter the value for the end of the range.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Home Zone Map – Group Maps Tab on page 121 to enter the values in the
remaining fields of the configuration window.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 121

Creating a Home Zone Map – Group Maps Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Group Maps tab to add a zone and enter the range of the IDs.
Procedure:
1 Select the Group Maps tab.

Figure 66: Home Zone Mapping – Group Maps Tab

2 Click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of zones.
3 Select a zone, then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 In the TG/MG ID Mapping Start field, enter the beginning of the range. The range for this field is from 0 to
16777215. This number must begin where the last range ended. For example, if the first block of talkgroups ended
with 100, the next block must start with 101.
5 In the TG/MG ID Mapping End field, enter the end of the range.
6 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
7 Click Cancel to close the Home Zone Mapping configuration window when finished.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Home Zone Map – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab on page 121 to
enter the values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Home Zone Map – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Short Subscriber Identity Mappings tab to add a zone and enter
the range of the IDs.
Procedure:
1 Select the Short Subscriber Identity Mappings tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

122 | Operation

Figure 67: Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab

2 Click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of zones.
3 Select a zone, then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 In the SSI ID Mapping Start field, enter the beginning of the range. The range for this field is from 0 to
16777215. This number must begin where the last range ended. For example, if the first block of SSIs ended with
100, the next block must start with 101.
5 In the SSI ID Mapping End field, enter the end of the range.
6 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
7 Click Cancel to close the Home Zone Mapping configuration window when finished.
Post requisites: Continue to Submitting a Home Zone Map – Basic Tab on page 123 to submit the map.

Home Zone Mapping XML File Creation

You can create a Home Zone Mapping XML file manually, using User Configuration Manager (UCM) as a reference.
For details on creating a Home Zone Mapping XML file see the MultiCADI manual.

Submitting a Home Zone Map

The following procedure explains how to submit a Home Zone Map. Submitting maps, in both the single- and multi-
cluster systems, requires a manual operation, by pressing the menu button Press here to submit map.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 123

Important:
• In a multicluster system, it is your responsibility as operator to make sure that the same map version is
selected for all clusters when you activate a new map.
• Avoid making substantial changes in configuration prior to or during the process of submitting Home
Zone Maps. The process of submitting Home Zone Maps may fail when other records (for example, a
large number of Radio Users) are being added or deleted from the database at the same time.
Note:
The process of submitting a Home Zone Map may last from 20 to 40 minutes, before the map is received
by the Zone Map Server. The time delay takes place when a Home Zone Map contains about 2048
elements both for Individual Subscribers and Talkgroups, and the database has a maximum number of radio
users (128 000) and talkgroups (64 000).

Submitting a Home Zone Map – Basic Tab

Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Home Zone Mapping object, then select a record in the contents pane.
2 From the File menu, select Open.
The Home Zone Mapping configuration window appears.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 68: Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab

4 For multi-cluster systems, the two map submission procedure types are available: Automatic and Stop before
map download. When you select the Automatic procedure type, the submitted map may be delivered with
different speed in different clusters. When ZCs in some clusters have received the new map while still receiving it
in other clusters (and therefore still uses the old map), this may result in temporary voice transmission problems.
For large multi-cluster systems, it is recommended to do as follows:
Important: Before you submit a map, see in the Home Zone Map Processing Status window that
Map Alias In Process equals NONE and the Map Processing State equals NOT APPLICABLE for
each PDG and ZC. This means that the system is currently not processing any maps and it is safe to
submit a new map.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

124 | Operation

Note: The Confirm Operation dialogue box only appears in a Nationwide system.

Depending on the scenario, there can be the following information in the Home Zone Map Processing Status
window:
a If there were no changes for the zone (i.e. no radio users/talkgroups to be added or removed), the process stops
when Map Received is displayed.
b If there were some talkgroups to add/delete but no radio users, the process stops when Talkgroup Download
Complete is displayed.
c If radio users were added/deleted, the process stops when Individual Download Complete is displayed.
Click Press here to submit map and if the Confirm Operation dialogue box is displayed, click Yes. On the
Home Zone Map Processing, click Allow map download. This way, you initiate a manual synchronization of
the map between clusters.
5
Note: The sequence from step 5 to step 7 is only applicable in a multi-cluster system. To configure your
system as a multi-cluster system, see Master Site Software Installation.

A Map Version for Maps being submitted window appears.

Figure 69: Map Version for Maps being Submitted Window

6 Select Greenwich Meridian Time (GMT) date and time for the map.
Important: Make sure that the same date and time is selected for all clusters, when you activate a new
map.
7 Check the Submit Map with Ranges identical to Map in Effect field, if you have already downloaded a map
with equal map ID ranges to another cluster.
Important: This option is used to synchronize the HZM timestamps between clusters in a multicluster
system without changing the HZM. If you do not check this field and the HZM ranges of the submitted
map are identical with the HZM ranges of the map in effect, then the specified timestamp for Map
Version for Maps being submitted will not be sent to the ZC and the system cannot work as multicluster
system.
The map download process starts. See the User Configuration Manager Online Help for more information about
the Home Zone Map Processing Status window.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 125

Modifying a Home Zone Map

A change in Home Zone Mapping takes place in several steps to ensure that all information is available to the ZC,
SDR and PDR/RNG immediately after a Home Zone Mapping change. However, it means that the ZC, SDR and
PDR/RNG for a short period hold all the subscribers that have home in the zone both before and after the remapping.
This total number must not exceed the 64,000 subscriber limit. As an example, if 1,000 subscribers move out of a
zone but 1,000 subscribers move into the zone, the total number of subscribers in the ZC, SDR and PDR/RNG will
temporarily increase by 1,000 during a remapping. The remapping can thus only take place if the initial total number
of subscribers is less than 63,000.
The same refers to talkgroups. The total number must not exceed the 16,000 talkgroups limit. For example, if 200
talkgroups move out of a zone but 200 talkgroups move into the zone, the total number of subscribers in the ZC will
temporarily increase by 200 during a remapping. The remapping can thus only take place if the initial total number of
talkgroups is less than 15,800. To ensure correct alignment of subscriber/talkgroup records to the Home Zone Map,
after remapping it is necessary to perform SAC Download to the ZC's (standby, and then active,) to restart the SDR
and PDR/RNG, and finally to backup the database. For details on how to perform this refer to the Backup and Restore
Including FRU/FRE manual.

Modifying a Home Zone Map – Basic Tab

Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Home Zone Mapping object, then select a record in the contents pane.
2 From the File menu, select Open.
The Home Zone Mapping configuration window appears.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 70: Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab

4 Select Synchronize Individual to SSI Map.

• Yes Individual Maps will be copied to Short Subscriber Mappings. The user is not allowed to enter Short
Subscriber Identity Mappings
• No Individual Maps and Short Subscriber Mappings are handled independently. The user must enter data for
both.
5 Select Synchronize Individual to Group Map.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

126 | Operation

• Yes Individual Maps will be copied to Group Maps. The user is not allowed to enter Group Maps.
• No Individual Maps and Group Maps are handled independently. The user must enter data for both.
Post requisites: The Basic tab is read only. Continue to Modifying a Home Zone Map – Individual Maps Tab on page
126 where you can modify the values on the Individual Maps tab.

Modifying a Home Zone Map – Individual Maps Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Individual Maps tab to add a zone or change the range of the IDs.
Procedure:
1 Select the Individual Maps tab.

Figure 71: Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab

2 Click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of zones.
3 Select a zone, then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 In the Radio ID Mapping Start field, enter the value for the beginning of the range. The range for this field is
from 0 to 16777215. This number must begin where the last range ended. For example, if the first block of radio
IDs ended with 100, the next block must start with 101.
Important: All Radio IDs mappings must be set accurately and are critical to the systems operation.

5 In the Radio ID Mapping End field, enter the value for the end of the range.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 127

Post requisites: Continue to Modifying a Home Zone Map – Group Maps Tab on page 127 to modify the values in
the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Modifying a Home Zone Map – Group Maps Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Group Maps tab to add a zone or change the range of the IDs.
Procedure:
1 Select the Group Maps tab.

Figure 72: Home Zone Mapping – Group Maps Tab

2 Click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of zones.
3 Select a zone, then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 In the TG/MG ID Mapping Start field, enter the beginning of the range. The range for this field is from 0 to
16777215. This number must begin where the last range ended. For example, if the first block of talkgroups ended
with 100, the next block must start with 101.
5 In the TG/MG ID Mapping End field, enter the end of the range.
6 Click Apply.
The information is saved.

Post requisites: Continue to Modifying a Home Zone Map – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab on page 127 to
modify the values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Modifying a Home Zone Map – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Short Subscriber Identity Mappings tab to add a zone or change
the range of the IDs.
Procedure:
1 Select the Short Subscriber Identity Mappings tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

128 | Operation

Figure 73: Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab

The Short Subscriber Identity Mappings tab appears.

2 Click Add Row.
The Values window appears showing a list of zones.
3 Select a zone, then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 In the SSI ID Mapping Start field, enter the beginning of the range. The range for this field is from 0 to
16777215. This number must begin where the last range ended. For example, if the first block of talkgroups ended
with 100, the next block must start with 101.
5 In the SSI ID Mapping End field, enter the end of the range.
6 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
7 Click Cancel to close the Home Zone Mapping configuration window when finished.

Accessing Home Zone Mapping Views

In UCM, you can access the following read-only views which are related to all Home Zone Maps or a single
submitted map only:
• Individual Maps Report – this view presents gathered Individual Map ranges for all defined Home Zone Maps.
The results are displayed in the contents pane of the UCM main window when the Individual Maps Report object
is selected in the navigation pane.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 129

• Group Maps Report – this view presents gathered Group Map ranges for all defined Home Zone Maps. The results
are displayed in the contents pane of UCM main window when the Group Maps Report object is selected in the
navigation pane.
• Short Subscriber Identity Maps Report – this view presents gathered Short Subscriber Identity Mapping ranges for
all defined Home Zone maps. The results are displayed in the contents pane of the UCM main window when the
Short Subscriber Maps Report object is selected in the navigation pane.
• IHLR Occupancy Report – this view presents Home Location Register occupancy for Individual Subscribers. It
includes numbers of provisioned Radio Users in a local cluster, and per zone only with regard to the last submitted
Home Zone Map.
• GHLR Occupancy Report – the view presents Home Location Register occupancy for Talkgroups and
Multigroups. It includes numbers of provisioned Talkgroups and Multigroups in a local cluster, and per zone only
with regard to the last submitted Home Zone Map.

Figure 74: Example of a Home Zone Mapping Views in UCM Main Window

Accessing Home Zone Mappings Views

Process:
1 Submit a Home Zone Map. See Submitting a Home Zone Map – Basic Tab on page 123.
Note: System engineers create a Home Zone Mapping record when configuring the system initially, so
it is visible in UCM. You can open and modify the existing record as well as add new Home Zone
Mapping records, but it is important to consider the ramifications when changing the initial
configuration.
2 Produce a view:
• Individual Maps Report, Group Maps Report, and Short Subscriber Identity Maps Report views are visible in
the contents pane of the UCM Main Window. Select Subscribers → Home Zone Mapping → Individual
Maps Report/ Group Maps Report/ Short Subscriber Maps Report object accordingly in the navigation
pane.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

130 | Operation

• For IHLR (Individual Home Location Register) or GHRL (Group Home Location Register) view, see
Accessing IHLR/GHLR Views for a Home Zone Map on page 130.

Accessing IHLR/GHLR Views for a Home Zone Map

Procedure:
1 In UCM, select the Subscribers → Home Zone Mapping → IHLR Occupancy → GHLR Occupancy object
accordingly.
2 From the contents pane, select a Home Zone Map to create a report.
Note: A report is only available if a Home Zone Map has been submitted in the system.

3 Depending on the type of report you want to generate, perform the following:
Note: The time of preparing a IHLR/GHRL view may exceed 120 seconds under the following
conditions:
• If there is a maximum number of radio users (128000) and talkgroups (64000) added to the system.
• If the last submitted Home Zone Map consists of at least 2048 ranges both for Individual
Subscribers and Talkgroups.

If… Then…
You want to See Creating a Default Report on page 103.
generate an
Note: IHLR and GHLR Occupancy Reports reflect the HLR occupancy state for
HTML report,
Talkgroups and Multigroups, and Radio Users only with regard to the last
submitted map.

You want to 1 Right-click or double-click the selected Home Zone Map, and select the Open item from
generate a the pop-up menu.
view in UCM,
Result: The GHLR/IHLR report has been generated and presented in the GHLR/IHLR
Occupancy window accordingly.

Figure 75: Example of a Generated HLR Report

Note: IHLR and GHLR Occupancy Reports reflect the HLR occupancy state for
Talkgroups and Multigroups, and Radio Users only with regard to the last
submitted map.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 131

Configuring Profiles

Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile

The TG/MG Capabilities Profile record defines the general capabilities that are common to a specific talkgroup or
multigroup. The record consists of two tabs, Basic and Configuration.

Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias, ID, and security group of the new profile
record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the TG/MG Capabilities Profile object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The TG/MG Capabilities Profile configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 76: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

4 Enter the TG/MG Capabilities Profile Alias. The alias may be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " % $ ? / \
5 Enter the TG/MG Capabilities Profile ID. This is a number from 1 to 2000 that uniquely identifies the profile.
This profile is the mechanism by which a talkgroup or multigroups capabilities are configured. You can customize
the talkgroup or multigroup capability parameters for a set of talkgroups or multigroups by creating a profile.
6 Select a Security Group.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab on page 131 to modify the
values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters of the new
profile record.
Note: For exact information about the fields on each tab, open the online help from the UCM application of
the Motorola PRNM system.

Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

132 | Operation

Figure 77: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

2 Select the PTT-ID or Transmission radio button for Conversation type.

• PTT-ID indicates that the group call has a hang time, which improves call continuity for the conversation, that
is the call is not assigned a new channel per transmission.
• Transmission indicates that the call lasts for the duration of a single transmission, that is a new channel is
assigned per transmission. Typically transmission trunking is better on a very busy system where the calls are
of short duration.
Note: This applies only to group calls. Private calls are always message trunked.

3 Select the AllStart or FASTStart radio button for Busy Override.

• AllStart requires that channels on sites with affiliated talkgroup members, consoles, critical sites, and other
required resources be available for a requested call before the call can begin.
• FASTStart enables automatic busy override by a talkgroup. The call begins even if some group members or
resources are not available.
4 Select the Yes or No radio button for Emergency Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user in the talkgroup can initiate emergency calls or alarms. No disables this
capability. Emergency calls are processed under normal priority level control.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 133

5 Select the Yes or No radio button for Emergency at ‘Not Valid Sites.
If you select Yes, the radio user can place emergency calls at non-valid sites for the talkgroup as determined by
the selection of valid sites in the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile.
6 Select the Dispatch Priority Level to determine how the system handles talkgroup call requests if all resources
are not immediately available and the call must be busied. You can: The highest level is 2, and the lowest level is
10. Talkgroup calls use the higher (better) of the priority of the requesting individual or requested talkgroup. For
example, users with a priority level of 2 will be serviced before users with a priority level of 4, if there are no
resources available to immediately service both calls.
• Enter a number in the field
• Slide the bar to the number
7 Select the Yes or No radio button for Priority Monitor.
Note: Priority Monitor should only be enabled on a small number of talkgroups. This increases the
speed with which a radio is notified of a priority message.

If you select Yes, the radio user can monitor a talkgroup call. Information regarding activity on this talkgroup is
sent out on voice channels assigned to other talkgroup calls. Radios monitoring talkgroup calls can detect this
information and use it to scan over to more important talkgroup conversations on other channels.
8 Select the Talkgroup Inactivity Time. This is a setting between 4 and 72 hours or Infinite that specifies when an
inactive radio or console Channel Control Window (CCW) affiliated to the current talkgroup or multigroup is
polled to determine if it is no longer on the system.
9 Select Yes or No to enable/disable the console to receive status event notices.
10 Select the Zone Controller or RCM or CADI for Status Acknowledged By.
• Zone Controller selects the zone controller for acknowledging status.
• CADI selects the CADI software for acknowledging status.
11 Select RCM, Console or CADI for Emergency Acknowledged By.
• RCM selects RCM software for acknowledging emergencies.
• Console selects the console for acknowledging emergencies.
• CADI selects the CADI software for acknowledging emergencies.
12 Select the Never or Always radio button for Audio Interrupt Mode.
• Never prevents all audio interrupt requests.
• Always lets the system automatically grant audio interrupt requests on the same talkgroup.
13 Select the Yes or No radio button for Data Channel Preemption.
• Yes means that voice group calls initiated in this talkgroup preempt the allocation for dynamic packet data in
case there are no free resources for the call.
• No means that dynamic data channels are not preempted in favour of voice.
14 Select a BIC Profile Alias and/or a BOC Profile Alias. These parameters are optional and as default no profile is
associated.
• BIC Profile defines which SSI numbers are allowed (marked as granting), and which are not allowed (marked
as barring) to PTT (push-to-talk) on the talkgroup.
• BOC Profile defines which SSI numbers are allowed (marked as granting), and which are not allowed (marked
as barring) to attach to the talkgroup.
15 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
16 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

134 | Operation

Configuring the User Group for a TG/MG Capabilities Profile

The following procedure explains how to use the User Group tab to enter the remaining parameters of the new profile
record.
Note: The User Group Alias field is editable only if Agency Priority Matrix license is available.

Procedure:
1 On the TG/MG Capabilities Profile window, select the User Group tab.

Figure 78: TG/MG Capabilities Profile User Group Tab

2 Enter the User Group Alias or click the Values button to the right of the field to select from a list of entries. The
alias, a name for the profile, may be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " % $ ? / \
3 Click Apply to save the parameters.
The information is saved.
4 Click Cancel to close the window. From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents
pane.

Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile

The TG/MG Valid Sites Profile record defines the sites that the talkgroup or multigroup can access in the system.
This record consists of two tabs, Basic and Configuration.

Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Basic Tab

The following procedure shows how to access the Basic tab for the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile object. It also shows
how to perform the first part of the procedure to create a Talkgroup/Multigroup Valid Sites Profile object.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The TG/MG Valid Sites Profile configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.
The Basic tab appears.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 135

Figure 79: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab

4 Enter the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Alias. The alias may be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " % $ ? / \
5 Enter the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile ID. This is a number from 1 to 2000 that uniquely identifies the profile.
This profile is the mechanism by which a talkgroup or multigroups Valid Sites permissions are configured. You
can customize the valid sites configuration information for a set of talkgroups or multigroups by creating a profile.
6 Select a Security Group.
7 Continue to Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Configuration Tab on page 135 to modify the values in the
remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters of the new
profile record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

136 | Operation

Figure 80: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab

2 Click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of valid sites with the zones and sites listed by aliases.
3 Select the Site Alias that refers to a specific site within a zone that you want the user to be able to access, and then
click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 Select Yes or No for the Requested field.

If you select Yes, this site must be included in any talkgroup or multigroup call that involves this talkgroup or
multigroup, if a channel is available. These sites can be busy-overridden and available channels are not reserved in
a busy call.
5 Select Yes or No for the Critical field.
Note: If you select Yes, this site must be included for an object call to be granted. These sites cannot be
busy-overridden when FASTStart is selected in the TG/MG Capabilities Profile.

6 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
7 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating Status Set

The Status Set object lets you create up to 100 status messages for each status set which the radio user can reference.
These status messages are displayed at the console after the radio user selects them.
You may create up to 2000 status sets.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 137

Creating a Status Set Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias and security group of the record.
Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application.
2 From the navigation pane on the left, select the object labeled Status Set.
3 From the File menu, select New.
The Status Set configuration window appears.
4 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 81: Status Set Basic Tab

5 Enter the Status Alias. The alias can be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " % $ ? / \
6 Enter a Security Group, or click the Valuesbutton to the right of the field to select from a list of entries.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Status Set Configuration Tab on page 137 to modify the values in the
remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Status Set Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the text messages for the status set record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

138 | Operation

Figure 82: Status Set Configuration Tab

2 For the appropriate Status Set Number, enter a text message in the Status Sets Text field.
• Enter up to 60 characters to create a message associated with a specified status set number.
• Create up to 100 messages for each Status Set.
Note: Although you can enter values in the range 1 to 65535, the valid range for Dimetra is 32768 to
65535.

The message will display at the console screen when the radio user selects and sends the number.
3 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
4 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
5 From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile

The Radio User Capabilities Profile record defines the common capabilities of the radio user. It also consists privilege
information associated with particular radio users in the system.

Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias, ID, and security group of the new profile
record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Radio User Capabilities Profile object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Radio User Capabilities Profile configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 139

3 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 83: Radio User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

4 Enter the Radio User Capabilities Profile Alias. The alias may be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " %
$?/\
5 Enter the Radio User Capabilities Profile ID. This is a number from 1 to 2000 that uniquely identifies the Radio
User Capabilities Profile. The Radio User Capabilities Profile is the mechanism by which a radio users general
capabilities are configured. You can customize the capability parameters for a set of radio users by creating a
profile.
Note: The same pool of IDs is used for allocating Profile ID numbers to radio user profiles and console
user profiles.

6 Select a Security Group.

Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab on page 139 to modify
the values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters of the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

140 | Operation

Figure 84: Radio User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

2 Select the primary and secondary status set at which the radio users status set messages are serviced by the system.
Note: If you leave any of the fields empty, the default status set is automatically selected.

3 Select the Load Class Name that refers to a specific load class defined on the system.
Note: The load class chosen must correspond to the approximate load which the radios will generate at
the Common Control Channel. If not, the Common Control Channel capacity is not fully optimal
utilized when using Common Secondary Control Channels.
Note: This parameter is grayed out under the following conditions:

• The System Ready for Common Secondary Control Channel parameter is set to No in the System
configuration window
• SZ$DEF and SZ$INIT records are set
4 Select the Dispatch/PC Priority Level to determine how the system handles a radio users talkgroup or private
call requests if all resources are not immediately available and the call must be busied. You can: The highest level
is 2, and the lowest level is 10.
• Enter a number in the field
• Slide the bar to the number
• Talkgroup calls use the higher (better) of the priority of the requesting individual or requested talkgroup.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 141

• Private calls use the higher (better) of the priority of the requesting or the target radio, when both radios are
located in the same zone. For a multizone call, each zone uses just the priority of the individual radio located
in that zone.
5 Select the Yes or No radio button for Private Call (PC) Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user can initiate and receive a Private Call.
6 Select the Yes or No radio button for Dispatch Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user can initiate talkgroup calls on the system. If you select No, the radio can receive
but not initiate talkgroup calls. Unit to unit and emergency calls still work when dispatch is disabled.
7 Select the Yes or No radio button for Dispatch Emergency Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user can initiate talkgroup emergency calls.
8 Select the Yes or No radio button for Multigroup Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user can initiate multigroup calls.
9 Select the Yes or No radio button for Multigroup Emergency Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user can initiate multigroup Emergency Calls.
10 Select the Yes or No radio button for Group Scanning Enabled.
If you select Yes, it is allowed for the radio user to attach and listen to all scanned talkgroups. This parameter is
related only to SZ$RUI-MIN record.
11 Select the Yes or No radio button for Dispatch/Private Call Preempt Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user can initiate calls that preempt priority calls.
12 Select the invocation mode for Called User Pre-emption.
• SwMI Invoked allows all individual calls initiated by the radio user to preempt the called user.
• User Invoked allows only individual calls initiated by authorized radio users (configured in the radio) to
preempt the called user.
• Disabled means that all individual calls initiated by the radio user never preempt the called user.
Note: You can only set this parameter if Dispatch/Private Call Preempt Enabled is set to Yes.

13 Select a BIC Profile Alias and/or a BOC Profile Alias. These parameters are optional and as default no profile is
associated.
• BIC Profile Alias defines which talkgroups the Radio User is allowed (marked as granting) or is not allowed
(marked as barring) to attach to. It defines also which SSI numbers the Radio User is allowed (mark as
granting) or is not allowed (marked as barring) to receive calls from.
• BOC Profile Alias defines which talkgroups the Radio User is allowed (marked as granting) or is not allowed
(marked as barring) to PTT (push-to-talk) on. It defines also which SSI numbers the Radio User is allowed
(mark as granting) or is not allowed (marked as barring) to call.
Note: In an SZ$RUI-MIN default Radio User Capabilities Profile fields within Barring Parameters are
grayed out.

14 Select the Yes or No radio button for Enable Barring PTT On Emergency.
• Yes applies barring checks when a radio user makes a non-emergency PTT request on an ongoing emergency
call.
• No ignores the barring checks when a radio user makes a non-emergency PTT request on an ongoing
emergency call.
Note: Barring checks are not applied for emergency requests. For ongoing emergency calls, barring
checks are only applied for radio PTT requestors and only if the Enable Barring PTT On Emergency
parameter is set to Yes.
15 Click Apply.
The information is saved.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

142 | Operation

16 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.

Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile User Group Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the User Group tab to enter the remaining parameters of the new profile
record.
Note: The User Group Alias field is editable only if Agency Priority Matrix license is available.

Procedure:
1 On the Radio User Capabilities Profile window, select the User Group tab.
The User Group tab appears.

Figure 85: Radio User Capabilities Profile User Group Tab

2 Enter the User Group Alias or click the Values button to the right of the field to select from a list of entries. The
alias, a name for the profile, may be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " % $ ? / \
3 Click Apply to save the parameters.
The information is saved.
4 Click Cancel to close the window. From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents
pane.

Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile

The Radio User Valid Sites Profile record defines a list of sites that the radio user can access in the system. The
profile also consists of information about the site at which the radio is valid.

Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias, ID, and security group of the new profile
record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Radio User Valid Sites Profile object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Radio User Valid Sites Profile configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 143

The Basic tab appears.

Figure 86: Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab

4 Enter the Radio User Valid Sites Profile Alias. The alias may be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " % $ ? /
\
5 Enter the Radio User Valid Sites Profile ID. This is a number from 1 to 2000 that uniquely identifies the profile.
This profile is the mechanism by which a radio users site access permissions are configured. You can customize
the valid sites configuration information for a set of radio users by creating a profile.
Note: The same pool of IDs is used for allocating Profile ID numbers to radio user profiles and console
user profiles.

6 Select a Security Group.

Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile Configuration Tab on page 143 to modify the
values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Radio User Valid Sites Profile Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the list of sites for the new record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

144 | Operation

Figure 87: Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab

2 Click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of valid sites with the zones and sites listed by aliases.
3 Select a site alias that refers to a specific site within a zone, and then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
5 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating an Exclusion Class

The exclusion class defines telephone numbers that a Radio User cannot receive calls from, or make calls to. You can
define up to 16 different exclusion classes. Each exclusion class contains some disallowed dialing patterns, typically
used to prevent dealing of international calls, premium rate numbers etc. The exclusion classes are referenced from
the Radio User Interconnect Profile object, and can both be used to prevent the mobile subscriber from placing calls
to certain telephone numbers (outbound exclusion class), and can also be used to prevent certain numbers from
calling the mobile subscribers (inbound exclusion class).
The Exclusion Class record consists of two tabs, Basic and Configuration.

Creating an Exclusion Class Basic tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the number and security group of the record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Exclusion Class object.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 145

2 From the File menu, select New.

The Exclusion Class configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.
The Basic tab appears.

Figure 88: Exclusion Class – Basic Tab

4 Enter an Exclusion Class Number between 1 and 16, by which the system uniquely references an Exclusion Class.
5 Select a Security Group.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating an Exclusion Class Configuration Tab on page 145 to modify the values in the
remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating an Exclusion Class Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the disallowed dialing patterns for the
Exclusion Class record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

146 | Operation

Figure 89: Exclusion Class – Configuration Tab

2 Click Add Row.

An empty record appears in the Disallowed Dialling Pattern field.
3 Enter a dialling pattern. The pattern may be up to 15 characters. You can create up to 16 patterns for each
exclusion class. Radio Users who are assigned this Exclusion Class will not be allowed to either place or receive
calls to/from phone numbers that begin with this disallowed dialling pattern. The exclusion class number is
assigned to a radio user from the Radio User Interconnect Profile object.
4 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
5 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile

The Radio User Interconnect Profile record defines the telephone interconnect capabilities of the radio user. This
record consists of two tabs, Basic and Configuration.

Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias, ID, and security group of the new profile
record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Radio User Interconnect Profile object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Radio User Interconnect Profile configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 147

Figure 90: Radio User Interconnect Profile – Basic Tab

4 Enter the Radio User Interconnect Profile Alias. The alias may be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " %
$?/\
5 Enter the Radio User Interconnect Profile ID. This is a number from 1 to 2000 that uniquely identifies the
profile. This profile is the mechanism by which a radio users interconnect capabilities are configured. You can
customize the interconnect configuration information for a set of radio users by creating a profile.
Note: The same pool of IDs is used for allocating Profile ID numbers to radio user profiles and console
user profiles.

6 Select a Security Group.

Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile Configuration Tab on page 147 to modify
the values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Radio User Interconnect Profile Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters for the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

148 | Operation

Figure 91: Radio User Interconnect Profile – Configuration Tab

2 Select the Priority Level to determine how the system handles a radio users interconnect call requests if all
resources are not immediately available and the call must be busied. You can: The highest level is 2, and the
lowest level is 10. For example, users with a priority level of 2 will be serviced before users with a priority level
of 4, if there are no resources available to immediately service both calls.
• Enter a number in the field.
• Slide the bar to the number.
3 Select the number of the Inbound Exclusion Class to which the radio user is assigned. An inbound exclusion class
specifies the telephone numbers the radio user cannot receive telephone interconnect calls from.
Note: If you do not know the number, click the Values button for a list of entries.

4 Select the number of the Outbound Exclusion Class to which the radio user is assigned. An outbound exclusion
class specifies the telephone numbers the radio user cannot make telephone interconnect calls to.
Note: If you do not know the number, click the Values button for a list of entries.

5 Click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of valid numbers with the zones and call routes listed by aliases.
6 Select a Call Route Alias that refers to a specific call route within a zone, and then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

7 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
8 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 149

Configuring Consoles and Console Users

Process:
1 Configure the Control Room Head Number of the consoles. See Configuring Control Room Head Number
(CRHN) on page 149.
2 As part of creating a console site from the Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM), a unit ID must be assigned to a
console in the ZCM before the Dispatch Application configurations can be committed in the ZCM. See the Zone
Configuration Manager manual for details.
3 Create talkgroup/multigroup capabilities profiles to create console talkgroups and console multigroups. See
Creating Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile, Talkgroups, and Multigroups on page 152.
4 Set up console users. See Creating Console Users on page 156.

Configuring Control Room Head Number (CRHN)

The Control Room Head Number feature has been designed to work with consoles (MCC 7500 and MCC 7500S)
acting either as dispatchers in a control room or as Console Nodes in an ICCS gateway, connecting an ICCS system to
the Dimetra network.
When applied to an ICCS system, the CRHN gives the ability to provide call center-type functionality for pooled
dispatchers. This feature allows one unique number (Head Number) to be used to identify the whole control room.
Therefore, there are no individual numbers/IDs per dispatcher. The system decides which dispatch position deals with
which call, instead of (currently) individual users having to call individual dispatcher positions.
When the CRHN feature is used directly with MCC 7500 and MCC 7500S consoles, the Head Number groups a
number of consoles in a control room under one unique address and it is up to the Switching Mobile Infrastructure
(SwMI) to decide which dispatch position deals with which call.
For more details and the feature, see the MCC 7500-series Console Sites manual.

Creating a Control Room Head Number

Note: License for this feature has to be purchased.

Creating a Control Room Head Number Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias and security group of the new record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Control Room Head Number object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Control Room Head Number configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

150 | Operation

Figure 92: Control Room Head Number – Basic Tab

4 Enter the Control Room Head Number Alias. The alias can be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " % $ ? / \
5 Enter the Control Room Head Number ID. Enter an ISSI number, unique within the space of ISSI numbers for
Radios, Console Users, Talk Groups, Multi Groups and Control Room Head Numbers. This is a unique number
from 1 to 13999999. The ISSI selected for the CRHN must belong to a zone homed in the cluster.
6 Select a Security Group.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Control Room Head Number Configuration Tab on page 150 to modify the
values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Control Room Head Number Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter parameters of the new record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 93: Control Room Head Number – Configuration Tab

2 Select the ICCS or Vortex radio button for Control Room Type.
The default values for each type (ICSS or Vortex) will be set for all values in the configuration tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 151

3 Select the Yes or No radio button for Individual Calls Allowed.

Depending on choice, individual calls are allowed directly to a console that is associated with the CRHN or not.
4 Select the Yes or No radio button for Head number as Source.
• Yes configures CRHN to present the Head Number as source ID of calls originating from consoles associated
with the Head Number.
• No does not set the Head Number as source ID of calls originating from consoles associated with the Head
Number.
Note: If Head Number as Source is set to Yes both the Head Number and the ISSI of the console
initiating the call will be present in the ATIA stream.

Depending on the choice:

5 Select Schedule Order. It indicates the strategy followed for selecting a console when there is a call request to a
Head Number. You can choose Lowest ISSI First or Round Robin.
• Lowest ISSI First the search for a free console is started from the lowest ISSI value at each incoming call
• Round Robin the search for a free console continues from where the last call was taken. When the end of the
list is reached, the search continues from the beginning.
6 Enter the Max Retries number. Range is from 1 to 5. The ICCS may choose to redirect an incoming call to
another Console Node if the ICCS consider the chosen Console Node occupied. This parameter defines the
maximal times such redirections may be repeated for a single incoming call until the Zone Controller will consider
the resources occupied and reject the incoming call.
7 Select the console user profile information for the Capability Profile Alias. The alias can be up to 16 characters.
The characters | @ _ " % $ ? / \ cannot be used. The alias cannot start with SZ$ or sz$. The default value for the
Alias is CONSOLE$DEF.
8 Enter any notes you wish to save for this record in the Notes text field.
9 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
10 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Post requisites: Continue with Control Room Head Number Console User Member List Tab on page 151.

Control Room Head Number Console User Member List Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Console User Member List tab to enter parameters of the new
record.
Prerequisites: Before configuring Console User Member tab, follow Control Room Head Number Console User
Member List Tab on page 151.
Note: Control Room Head Number may be configured without console users, but it will not work.

Procedure:
1 Perform Creating a Console User Basic Tab on page 163.
2 Perform Creating a Console User Configuration Tab on page 164.
3 Select the Console User Member List tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

152 | Operation

Figure 94: Control Room Head Number – Console User Member List Tab

4 In the Console User member List section, click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of valid user names.
5 Select the Console Application Unit ID, and then click OK.
6 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
7 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile, Talkgroups, and

Multigroups
Perform the following process to configure console talkgroups and multigroups.
Process:
1 Follow the procedures in Creating a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile in UCM on page 152.
2 Follow the procedures in Creating a Talkgroup or Multigroup on page 168.

Creating a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile in UCM

A collection of Console Talkgroup/Multigroup (TG/MG) Capabilities Profiles is available for setting the capabilities
of Talkgroup/Multigroup resources. Each of these profiles can be associated to any number of Console Talkgroup and
Multigroup resources to allow or limit the accessibility of these resources to specific console features.

Creating a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the ID, alias, and security group of the record.
Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application.
2 From the navigation pane on the left, select the object labeled Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile.
3 From the File menu, select New.
The Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile configuration window appears.
4 Select the Basic tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 153

Figure 95: Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Basic Tab

5 Enter the Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile ID. This is a number from 1 to 2000 that uniquely identifies the
Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile.
6 Enter the Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Alias. The alias can be up to 16 characters. The characters | @ _
" % $ ? / \ cannot be used. The alias cannot start with SZ$ or sz$.
7 Select a Security Group.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab on page 153 to
modify the values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters for the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

154 | Operation

Figure 96: Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab

2 For Critical Resource Select, click the appropriate radio button.

• Yes enables the console user to select the criticality setting of a resource in the system. This means if the
system performance is low, audio logging is still maintained on resources selected as critical.
• No disables the console user from selecting the criticality setting of a resource in the system.
3 For Emergency Acknowledge, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to acknowledge an emergency activity. Acknowledging the emergency turns off
the alarm tones and informs the other console users that an emergency activity is currently being addressed by
a console user.
• No disables this capability.
Note: If set to No, Emergency Alarm, Emergency Setup, and Inbound Emergency parameters are
automatically disabled.

4 For Emergency Alarm, click the appropriate radio button.

• Yes enables the console users Emergency Alarm indications.
• No disables this capability.
5 For Emergency Setup, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to initiate an emergency call.
• No disables this capability.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 155

6 For Inbound Emergency, click the appropriate radio button.

• Yes allows the console user to end any emergency activity that has been acknowledged.
• No disables this capability.
7 For Show Inbound Call Indication, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to receive a visual signal when there is an incoming call.
• No disables the visual indication of an incoming call.
8 For Inbound Emergency, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes enables the console user to be informed when there is an incoming emergency call.
• No disables this capability.
Note: Is only disabled if the Emergency Alarm parameter is set to No as well.

9 For Inbound PTT, click the appropriate radio button.

• Yes enables the display of the Inbound Push-to-Talk ID associated with an incoming call.
• No disables this capability.
10 For Instant Transmit, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes enables the console user to initiate a transmission on the resource.
• No disables this capability.
11 For Logging Group Call, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes specifies that the Logging Client is informed when a radio group call is received.
• No disables this capability.
12 For Patch, click the appropriate radio button. If a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile is already assigned to a
multigroup, the Patch field cannot be set to Yes. Also, if the Patch field of a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile
is set to Yes, it cannot be assigned to a multigroup.
• Yes enables the console user to add a resource to a patch group.
• No disables this capability.
13 For Priority Select, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes specifies that the console user can select the tactical priority call. A talkgroup call with tactical priority
will gain access to system resources faster than a normal priority call.
• No disables this capability and talkgroup calls have normal priority.
14 For Repeater On, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes specifies that the console user can enable and disable the repeat functionality for a resource.
• No disables this capability.
15 For Single Select, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes enables the console user to select a single resource for monitoring and other console operations like Multi
Select (MSEL).
• No disables the console user from selecting a single resource for monitoring and other console operations like
MSEL.
16 For Volume Control, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes enables the console user to control the volume level of individual resources.
• No disables this capability.
17 Enter any notes you wish to save for this record in the Notes text field.
18 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
19 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

156 | Operation

20 From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating Console Users

Process:
1 Follow the procedures in Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile in UCM on page 156 including
configuration of Private Call parameters.
2 Configure Alert Tones. See Configuring Alert Tones in UCM on page 160.
3 Create console users. See Creating a Console User in UCM on page 163.
4 Create a Private Call Resource record to enable the console user to conduct private calls with a radio user or
another console user. See Creating a Console Private Call Resource in UCM on page 165.

Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile in UCM

A Console User Capabilities Profile allows or limits the console features accessible by a console user.

Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the ID, alias, and security group of the record.
Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application.
2 From the navigation pane on the left, select the object labeled Console User Capabilities Profile.
3 From the File menu, select New.
The Console User Capabilities Profile configuration window appears.
4 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 97: Console User Capabilities Profile Basic Tab

5 Enter the Console User Capabilities Profile ID. This is a number from 1 to 2000 that uniquely identifies the
Console User Capabilities Profile.
Note: The same pool of IDs is used for allocating Profile ID numbers to radio user profiles and console
user profiles.

6 Enter the Console User Capabilities Profile Alias. This must be unique among all Console User Capabilities
Profiles and Radio User Capabilities Profiles. The alias can be up to 16 characters The characters | @ _ " % $ ? / \
cannot be used. The alias cannot start with SZ$ or sz$.
7 Select a Security Group.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 157

Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab on page 157 to modify
the values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters for the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 98: Console User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab

2 For Route Tones to Headset, click the appropriate radio button.

• Yes allows the console user to hear tones in the headset.
• No disables this capability.
3 For Talk Prohibit Tone Enabled, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to hear the Talk Prohibit tone.
• No disables this capability.
4 For Sidetone Enabled, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to hear his/her own voice when transmitting.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

158 | Operation

• No disables this capability.

5 For Patch Idle Delay (sec), enter a unique number from 1 to 255 that defines the number of seconds of audio
inactivity, within a patch group, required to trigger the patch idle indication.
6 From the Number of Patch Groups drop-down list, select a number from 0 to 16. This feature allows a console
user to set up a communication path between two or more radio groups that are normally unable to communicate
with each other.
7 From the Number of Multi-Select Groups drop-down list, select a number from 0 to 3. This feature allows a
console user to place multiple channel resources into one logical group. A console user can simultaneously
transmit to all resources in an MSEL group via the All Points Bulletin feature, the General Transmit feature, or by
using the footswitch.
8 From the Number of APB Transmit drop-down list, select a number from 0 to 3. This feature specifies the
number of APB Transmits. Each APB allows a console user to initiate a transmission on all resources contained
within a particular Multi-Select (MSEL) group.
9 For Monitor On, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to use the monitor capability.
• No disables this capability.
10 For Private Call Preempt Enabled, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to initiate private calls that preempt lower priority calls.
• No disables this capability.
11 Select the invocation mode for Called User Pre-emption.
• SwMI Invoked allows all individual calls initiated by the console user to preempt the called user.
• User Invoked allows console users to define individual calls as normal priority calls or as pre-emptive calls.
The latter case allows preemption of the called user.
• Disabled means that all individual calls initiated by the console user never preempt the called user.
Note: You can only set this parameter if Private Call Preempt Enabled right above is set to Yes.

12 For Alert Tone Talk-Extend Time (sec) type an appropriate value. Use this parameter to set up the amount of
time – after generating the alert tone – that all the resources remain keyed. It allows the console user to transmit a
voice message on the selected channels.
13 Select a BIC Profile Alias and/or a BOC Profile Alias. These parameters are optional and as default no profile is
associated.
• BIC Profile defines which talkgroups the Console User is allowed (marked as granting) or is not allowed
(marked as barring) to attach to. It defines also which SSI numbers the Console User is allowed (mark as
granting) or is not allowed (marked as barring) to receive calls from.
• BOC Profile defines which talkgroups the Console User is allowed (marked as granting) or is not allowed
(marked as barring) to PTT (push-to-talk) on. It defines also which SSI numbers the Console User is allowed
(mark as granting) or is not allowed (marked as barring) to call.
14 For All Mute Capability Enabled, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to use the all mute capability.
• No disables this capability.
15 For All Mute Timeout (sec), enter a unique number from 1 to 255 that defines the number of seconds that the
audio is muted for the duration of the timeout.
16 For All Mute Level (dB), type or use the slider to enter a number from 0 to 42 that defines the level of the muted
audio.
17 This step is optional. In the Alert Tones section, click Add Row. See Alert Tone on page 272 for more
information.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 159

Note: The Alert Tone feature is supported only on the Dispatch Communications Server (DCS). See the
Zone Configuration Manager manual for more information on the DCS.

The dialog box allowing selection of predefined Alert Tones appears.

18 Select a predefined alert tone and click OK.
Note: You can assign up to 3 alert tones to a Console User Capability Profile.

An alert tone is assigned to a Console User Capability Profile.

Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile Private Call Tab on page 159 to modify
the values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Console User Capabilities Profile Private Call Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Private Call tab to enter the remaining parameters for the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Private Call tab.

Figure 99: Console User Capabilities Profile Private Call Tab

2 For Audio Destination, click the appropriate radio button.

• Yes allows the console user to configure audio destinations such as Speakers.
• No disables this capability.
3 Critical Resource Select, not applicable to the current system.
4 For Show Inbound Call Indicator, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes allows the console user to receive a visual signal when there is an incoming call.
• No disables the visual indication of an incoming call.
5 For Inbound PTT, click the appropriate radio button.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

160 | Operation

• Yes enables the display of the Inbound Push-to-Talk ID associated with an incoming call.
• No disables this capability.
6 For Instant Transmit, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes enables the console user to initiate a transmission on the resource.
• No disables this capability.
7 For Patch Private Calls, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes enables the console user to add a resource to a patch group.
• No disables this capability.
8 For Single Select, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes enables the console user to select a single resource for monitoring and other console operations.
• No disables the console user from selecting a single resource for monitoring and other console operations.
9 For Volume Control, click the appropriate radio button.
• Yes enables the console user to control the volume level of individual resources.
• No disables this capability.
10 Enter any notes you wish to save for this record in the Notes text field.
11 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
12 Click Cancel to close the window when finished. Then from the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record
in the contents pane.

Configuring Alert Tones in UCM

The Alert Tone feature allows a console operator to transmit an audible tone to all currently selected resources.
Note: The Alert Tone feature is supported only on the Dispatch Communications Server (DCS). See the
Zone Configuration Manager manual for more information on the DCS.

Configuring Alert Tones

Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Alert Tone object.
Note: Three predefined alert tone records are available in UCM. You cannot define new ones.

2 Select an appropriate alert tone record and right-click.

Note: You can select the following tones:

• Continuous (Alert Tone ID 1)

• Pulsed (Alert Tone ID 2)
• Alternating (Alert Tone ID 3)
A pop-up menu appears.
3 Select Open from the pop-up menu.
The Alert Tone configuration window appears.
4 Select the Basic tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 161

Figure 100: Alert Tone – Basic Tab

5 Accept a default Security Group, or click the Values button to the right of the field to select from the list of
entries.
6 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 101: Alert Tone – Configuration Tab

7 For Tone Length, type or use the slider to enter a number from 1 to 10 that defines the alert tone length.
Note: The default alert tone length is 6 seconds.

8 Select the Notes tab.

Figure 102: Alert Tone – Notes Tab

9 In the Notes text field, enter any notes you wish to save for this record.
Note: Notes can contain up to 300 characters.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

162 | Operation

10 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
11 Click Cancel to close the window.
Post requisites: Continue to Adding Alert Tones to a Console User Capabilities Profile on page 162 to add an alert
tone to a Console User Capabilities Profile.

Adding Alert Tones to a Console User Capabilities Profile

The following procedure explains how to use the Console User Capabilities Profile Configuration tab to assign an
alert tone to a console user capabilities profile.
Note: Assigning alert tones to a Console User Capability Profile is optional. You may assign up to 3 alert
tones to a Console User Capability Profile.

Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Console User Capabilities Profile object.
2 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 103: Console User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 163

3 In the Alert Tones section, click Add Row. See Alert Tone on page 272 for more information.
The dialog box allowing selection of predefined Alert Tones appears.
4 Select a predefined alert tone and click OK.
An alert tone is assigned to a Console User Capability Profile.
5 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
6 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.

Creating a Console User in UCM

A Console User is a user that is able to log in to and use applications in the console subsystem. A Console User has
associated capabilities that allow or limit the console features to which they have access.

Creating a Console User Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the ID, alias, and security group of the new profile
record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Console User object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Console User configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.
The Basic tab appears.

Figure 104: Console User Basic Tab

4 Enter the Console User Alias. The alias may be up to 16 characters. The characters | @ _ " % $ ? / \ cannot be
used. The alias cannot start with SZ$ or sz$. This name is used when displaying information (at a dispatch
console) for the Trunking Channel resources used by this console. In order for the same console name to appear
for both trunking and conventional channel resources, this UCM Console User Alias parameter must be set the
same as the Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM) Application Platform Alias parameter. The Application
Platform Alias parameter is used when displaying information for the Conventional Channel resources in the
ZCM.
5 Select a Security Group.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

164 | Operation

6 Enter a user login name in the User Login Name field. A user login name is a unique identifier from one to eight
characters in length (no spaces between characters). It can contain any character and number except | @ _ " ? % .
Note: Spaces are not allowed.

7 Enter the Password. The password can be up to 8 characters.

8 Enter the password again in the Verify Password field.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Console User Configuration Tab on page 164 to modify the values in the
remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Console User Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters for the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 105: Console User Configuration Tab

2 Select if the console user is allowed to initiate and receive full duplex private calls from subscribers or other MCC
7500 consoles.
3 From the Supervisor Status drop-down list, select one of the following: .
• Primary indicates that the console user has the highest transmit priority.
• Secondary indicates that the console user has the second highest transmit priority.
• None indicates that the console user has the lowest transmit priority.
The default value for this parameter is None.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 165

4 Select the console user profile information for the Console User Capabilities Profile Alias. The alias can be up
to 16 characters. The characters | @ _ " % $ ? / \ cannot be used. The alias cannot start with SZ$ or sz$. The
default value for the Alias is CONSOLE$DEF.
5 Set the Logging Individual Call and Logging E2EE Call parameters.
6 Set the user ISSI services in the User Based ISSI / Host Based ISSI field. To set the ISSI that is attached directly
to a console user (not host based), set the User ISSI Enabled field to Yes, and enter the ISSI into the Console
User ISSI field. If set to No, you can enter the Unit ID.
Note: This Unit ID and Console User ISSI must be unique among all SSI numbers used for Radios,
Talkgroup GSSI, Multigroup GSSI, CRHNs, and all console users (User ISSI and Unit ID).

7 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record is assigned.
8 Enter any notes you wish to save for this record in the Notes text field.

Creating a Console Private Call Resource in UCM

The Console Private Call Resource is a resource that a console user uses to send and receive private calls to/from
another console user or radio user.

Creating a Console Private Call Resource Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the ID, alias, and security group of the record.
Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application.
2 From the navigation pane on the left, select the object labeled Console Private Call Resource.
3 From the File menu, select New.
The Console Private Call Resource configuration window appears.
4 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 106: Console Private Call Resource Basic Tab

5 Enter the Console Private Call Resource ID. This is a number from 1 to 7000 that uniquely identifies the Private
Call Resource on the system.
6 Enter the Console Private Call Resource Alias. The alias can be up to 16 characters The characters | @ _ " %
$ ? / \ cannot be used. The alias cannot start with SZ$ or sz$.
7 Select a Security Group.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Console Private Call Resource Configuration Tab on page 166 to modify
the values in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

166 | Operation

Creating a Console Private Call Resource Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters for the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 107: Console Private Call Resource Configuration Tab

2 Enter any notes you wish to save for this record in the Notes text field.
3 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
4 Click Cancel to close the window when finished. Then from the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record
in the contents pane.

Configuring User Groups

The following table shows the specific tasks involved in adding a User Group.

Table 25: Tasks Involved in Adding a User Group

System Element Tasks to be Performed

User Configuration Manager Create a new record in the User Group object in User Configuration
Manager (UCM).

The User Group object makes it possible to define which channels can be used by which radio users and talkgroups.
All Talkgroup/Multigroup Capabilities Profiles and Radio User Capabilities Profiles in a system must be assigned to a
User Group. This record consists of two tabs, Basic and Configuration.

Creating a User Group Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the ID, alias, and security group of the record.
Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application.
2 From the navigation pane on the left, select the object labeled User Group.
3 From the File menu, select New.
The User Group configuration window appears.
4 Select the Basic tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 167

Figure 108: User Group Basic Tab

5 Enter the User Group ID. This is a number from 1 to 100 that uniquely identifies the User Group on the system.
Note: Number 1 is reserved for group DEFAULT.

6 Enter the User Group Alias. The alias can be up to 16 characters The characters | @ _ " % $ ? / \ cannot be used.
The alias cannot start with SZ$ or sz$.
7 Enter a Security Group, or click the Values button to the right of the field to select from a list of entries.
Post requisites: Continue to the following procedure to modify the values in the remaining fields of the configuration
window.

Creating a User Group Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters for the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

168 | Operation

Figure 109: User Group Configuration Tab

2 Enter any notes you wish to save for this record in the Notes text field.
3 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
4 Click Cancel to close the window when finished. Then from the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record
in the contents pane.

Configuring Radio Users, Groups, Storm Plans and Load Classes

Creating a Talkgroup or Multigroup

The Talkgroup object consists of information that identifies a group of radios that communicate and interact together
on the system. This group can also be a subset of a multigroup.
The Talkgroup object has two default records, SZ$INIT and SZ$DEF. When an Object Group Subject is created the
definitions of automatically derived talkgroups/multigroups appear in the talkgroup/multigroup list. You cannot delete
nor edit such groups. See the Object Call manual for more information on the dynamically created talkgroups.

Talkgroup IDs Definition

The system has two types of groups, talkgroup and multigroup. A talkgroup is designed around a functional group or
an organization. For example, a special squad inside the state police or a state's Department of Natural Resources
(DNR) could each be a talkgroup. A multigroup lets you combine some talkgroups such as grouping the state police
with the DNR in a multigroup to allow communication between the two organizations.
To configure a talkgroup or multigroup, see the following sections:

• Creating a Multigroup on page 169

When planning to add a group, consider the effects it may have on system resources. Large talkgroups or multigroups
require resources at all sites with affiliated members and could cause busies. Consider the system's channel
availability. The infrastructure must be in place to support the traffic of added groups.

Talkgroup ID Ranges

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 169

When you add a talkgroup, consider the talkgroup members' normal roaming area. Generally, you assign the
talkgroup's home zone as the zone where the majority of the members spend most of their time. Also remember that
all talkgroups in a multigroup must share the same home zone as the multigroup.
Keep in mind when selecting the start and ending ID range that these IDs are what users type in when sending unit-to-
unit calls or group calls. You may want to use the lower end of the range to save user keystrokes. The same IDs also
display on the radios if the ID Display feature is being used and on the consoles if the console alias feature is not
used.
The following table shows how to assign ID to radios, talkgroups, and multigroups according to the TETRA
standard.

Table 26: ID Ranges

ID Dimetra Usage TETRA Standards Usage

16.777.217 Default record (SZ$DEF) Not Applicable
16.777.216 Initialization record (SZ$INIT) Not Applicable
16.777.215 Site-wide Call Addressing All Units
14.000.000 through 16.777.214 Reserved Recommended as reserved by ETR300-5
10.000.000 through 13.999.999 Dimetra Extended Range for Recommended as reserved by ETR300-5
Individual or Group ID
1 through 9.999.999 Valid Individual or Group ID Valid Individual or Group ID
0 Reserved Valid Individual or Group ID

Note: Only 16,384 Talkgroup IDs can be assigned, but they can be anywhere in the range from 1 -
13.999.999.

Note: The same pool of IDs is used for allocating ID numbers to radios, console users, talkgroups, and
multigroups. The same value cannot be assigned to both a group and an individual.

Creating a Multigroup
Adding a multigroup is the same as adding a talkgroup, but you also have to associate one or more talkgroups with
the multigroup. A multigroup is made up of several talkgroups whose members occasionally communicate as a group.
Note: The Network Manager supports up to 128 talkgroups in one multigroup. However, a radio can only
support 15 talkgroups in a multigroup for each “zone” in the radio. This is caused by the limit of 16
channel positions on the channel selector. A talkgroup can belong to only one multigroup.
When creating a multigroup, keep in mind that a multigroup call requires a channel at each site with an affiliated
multigroup member. It could have a large impact on system resources. Also the multigroup's home zone must be the
same as the home zone of all the talkgroups included in the multigroup. Table 27: Tasks Involved in Adding a
Multigroup on page 169 shows the specific tasks involved in adding a multigroup.

Table 27: Tasks Involved in Adding a Multigroup

System Element Tasks to Be Performed

User Configuration Manager Create a new record in the Multigroup object.
Centracom Console Download the multigroup ID, alias, and encryption type (secure or clear)
from the ZDS to the CDM. Additional console-specific features must be
added in the CDM. A specific operator position must be configured to
monitor the multigroup.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

170 | Operation

System Element Tasks to Be Performed

CPS Plus Assign the multigroup to a specific system or profile, which is then
associated with a zone or channel assignment on the radio's channel
selector.
Note: CPS Plus uses “announcement group” to refer to a
multigroup.

Creating a Multigroup – Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias, ID, and security group of the new
record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Multigroup object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Multigroup configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 110: Multigroup – Basic Tab

4 Type the Multigroup Alias. The alias can be up to 16 characters. Cannot use: | @ _ " ' % $ ? & / \. Supports
UTF-8 unicode.
5 Type the Multigroup ID. This is a unique number from 1 to 13999999 that refers to a specific multigroup on the
system. See Table 26: ID Ranges on page 169.
Note: The same pool of IDs is also used for allocating ID numbers to radios, console users, talkgroups
and multigroups, and the same value cannot be assigned to both a group and an individual.

6 Select a Security Group.

7 Continue to Creating a Multigroup – Configuration Tab on page 170 to modify the values in the remaining fields
of the configuration window.

Creating a Multigroup – Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters of the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 171

Figure 111: Multigroup – Configuration Tab

2 Select the profile information for the following:

• Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile Alias — mandatory field, default value TEMPLATE
• TG/MG Capabilities Profile Alias — mandatory field
• TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Alias — mandatory field
3 Select the Yes or No radio button for the Preempt Capable field.
4 Select the Yes or No radio button for the Extended Band Channels Can be Assigned field.
5 Select the Interrupt or Wait radio button for Interrupt or Wait Mode.
• Interrupt enables a multigroup to interrupt talkgroup calls currently in conversation to include them in a
multigroup call.
• Wait allows a talkgroup call in progress to end before a multigroup call begins.
6 Select the Yes or No radio button for Multigroup Enabled.
If you select Yes, the multigroup is enabled for use on the system. If you select No, the multigroup is disabled for
use on the system. However a radio can still initiate an Emergency Call on this talkgroup but other radios will
have to enter Emergency Mode to be able to reply, any affiliated consoles will be able receive the Emergency
Alarm and audio from the radios but will not be able to reply.
7 In the Talkgroups in Multigroup form, click Add Row.
The Values window appears showing a list of valid talkgroups.
Note: When eT is enabled for MG, only TG with enabled eT will be available to select by the Add
Row option.

8 Select a talkgroup that you want to add to the multigroup, and then click OK. All talkgroups assigned to the
multigroup must have the same home zone as the multigroup.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

172 | Operation

9 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
10 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating a Radio or Radio User

The procedures in this section cover how to add a new radio object or radio user object to the UCM.

Radio to Radio User Relationship

You associate a radio to a specific user by entering the radio's serial number in the radio user's record. This
relationship between a radio and a radio user allows you to change which radio a user may be attached to at any
particular time. However, at any time, each radio can only have one radio user assigned to it.
For more information about the radio user record, see Creating a Radio User on page 174.

Creating a Radio
The following table shows the specific tasks involved in adding an individual radio.

Table 28: Tasks Involved in Adding a Radio

System Element Tasks to Be Performed

UCM Create a new Radio record.
Centracom Console Add individual ID and alias to the Alias Database using the Alias Database
Manager (ADM).
CPS Plus Program the radio with specific features.

The Radio record contains attributes related to the physical radio unit, such as its unique identity, capabilities, and
programmed parameters.
The following procedure explains how to create a radio by entering the radio serial number, ID, reference ID, and
security group of the new record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Radio object.
2 From the File menu, select New.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 173

Figure 112: Radio Configuration Window

3 Type the Radio Serial Number, which can be up to 15 characters. This unique serial number represents a specific
radio on the system and is part of the radio's programming.
4 Type the Radio ID. This is a unique number from 1 to 13999999 that refers to a specific radio on the system and
is part of the radio's programming. See Table 26: ID Ranges on page 169.
Note: The same pool of IDs is also used for allocating ID numbers to radios, console users, talkgroups
and multigroups, and the same value cannot be assigned to both a group and an individual.

Important:
A change in Home Zone Mapping takes place in several steps to ensure that all information is available
to the ZC and PDG immediately after a Home Zone Mapping change. However, it means that the ZC
and PDG for a short period hold all the subscribers that have home in the zone both before and after the
remapping. This total number must not exceed the 64,000 subscriber limit. As an example, if 1,000
subscribers moves out of a zone but 1,000 subscribers moves into the zone, the total number of
subscribers in the ZC and PDG will temporarily increase by 1,000 during a remapping. The remapping
can thus only take place if the initial total number of subscribers are less that 63,000.
The same refers to talkgroups. The total number must not exceed the 16,000 talkgroups limit. For
example, if 200 talkgroups moves out of a zone but 200 talkgroups moves into the zone, the total
number of subscribers in the ZC will temporarily increase by 200 during a remapping. The remapping
can thus only take place if the initial total number of talkgroups are less that 15,800.
If any subscriber/talkgroup records are lost, after remapping, it is necessary to perform the download of
SAC. For details on how to perform this, refer to the Backup and Restore Including FRU/FRE manual.
5 Type the Radio Reference ID, which can be up to 21 characters. This is a unique reference of the radio used for
Authentication or Encryption purposes. The Radio Reference ID may be a Tetra Equipment Identifier (TEI), or a
SIM ID in cases where the radio uses SIM cards. TEI: T followed by 15 hexadecimal digits (0–9 and A-F). SIM: S
followed by 20 hexadecimal digits (0–9 and A-F).
6 Select a Security Group.
7 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
8 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

174 | Operation

Creating a Radio User

The following table shows the specific tasks involved in adding an individual radio user.

Table 29: Tasks Involved in Adding a Radio User

System Element Tasks to Be Performed

UCM Add the radio user.
Centracom Console Add individual ID and alias to the Alias Database using the Alias Database
Manager (ADM).
CPS Plus Program the radio with specific features.

Creating a Radio User – Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias and security group of the new record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Radio User object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Radio User configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 113: Radio User – Basic Tab

4 Type the Radio User Alias. It supports UTF-8 unicode

5 Select a Security Group.
6 Continue to Creating a Radio User – Configuration Tab on page 174 to modify the values in the remaining fields
of the configuration window.

Creating a Radio User – Configuration Tab

The procedure below explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter parameters of the new record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 175

Figure 114: Radio User – Configuration Tab

2 Type the Radio Serial Number, which can be up to 15 characters. The value you enter must have been
programmed previously in the Radio object, or you can select a default record.
Note: If you do not know the number, click the Values button for a list of entries.

Note: The Radio ID field is linked to the Radio Serial Number field, so you will not need to enter a
Radio ID.

3 Type text in the Emergency Alarm Comments field up to 64 characters. This text is sent out as an emergency
comment when the radio user initiates an emergency call.
4 Select the Yes or No radio button for Interconnect Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user can initiate and receive interconnect calls. This setting enables all interconnect-
related parameters on the window. If you select No, the radio user cannot initiate or receive interconnect calls.
5 Select the Yes or No radio button for Packet Data Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user has access to the packet data service. This setting enables all packet data-related
parameters on the window. If you select No, the radio user cannot initiate or receive packet data.
6 Select the Yes or No radio button for QAM Data Enabled.
• Yes allows the radio user to have access to the Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) services.
• No prevents the radio user from having access to the Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) services
7 Select the Yes or No radio button for Short Data Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user has access to the short data service. If you select No, the radio user is prevented
from having access to the short data service.
8 Select the Yes or No radio button for Full Duplex Enabled.
If you select Yes, the radio user can initiate and receive full duplex private calls. This setting enables all full
duplex-related parameters on the window. If you select No, the radio user cannot initiate or receive full duplex
private calls. Telephone Interconnect calls will always be full-duplex independent of this parameter setting.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

176 | Operation

9 Select the Yes or No radio button for the Extended Band Channels Can Be Assigned field.
10 Select the Radio User Capabilities Profile Alias.
11 Select the Radio User Valid Site Profile Alias.
12 Select the Radio User Interconnect Profile Alias, if you have enabled this capability in step 4.
13 Select the Yes or No radio button for User Enabled.
• If you select Yes, the radio user can make calls on the system.
• If you select No, the radio user is temporarily removed from the system, rather than deleting the user. The user
can receive talkgroup calls, but cannot initiate them. Also, the user cannot initiate or receive unit to unit calls
or call alerts.
Note: The User Enabled setting designates users that you want to be active in the system and disables
users as necessary.

14 Select the Yes or No radio button for Logon Required.

• If you select Yes, the radio user is required to log on to the radio (via Alias Server).
• If you select No, logging onto the radio is not required.
Important: Parameter is enabled when RUA/RUI licence is purchased.

15 Type the Assigned IP Address, that can be used by the radio user. That is, when connecting a computer to the
radio the computer can use this address. This can be done either by configuring the assigned IP address in the
computer as well as in the system, or by setting up the computer to use a network assigned IP address. In the latter
case the field must be set to [Link].
Note: You may create more radio users with the same IP address, on condition that the value of the
Access Point Name field below differs.

16 Type the Access Point Name Network ID in APN Network ID that can be used by the radio user. The APN
identifies the home network of the radio user.
Note: To obtain Packet Data service for the user, the APN must be configured in the GGSN (Gateway
GPRS (General Packet Radio System) Support Note) to identify the interface to the home network.

17 Select the Resource Allocation Group in Assigned RAG, that controls the access to the air interface packet data
channels. A user is configured to belong to a call RAG. Each packet data channel has a defined RAG access list:
in order to be able to use a packet data channel, the RAG assigned to the user must appear in the channels RAG
access list. The RAG thus provides a basic access control mechanism for the packet data channels.
18 Select the maximum time a radio will remain inactive on the packet data channel in READY Timer. The READY
timer is thus a sort of packet data hang timer. The optimum value for this timer depends on the type of application
the radio uses.
Note: If for example, the main application is database lookup, the READY timer should be set slightly
longer than the anticipated response time of the database. Setting the timer too short will result in the
radio bouncing back to the MCCH between datagrams belonging to the same transaction. Setting the
timer too long will result in the radio spending too much time on the packet data channel.
19 Select the Yes or No radio button for ICMP Enabled.
• Yes means that the system will forward ICMP messages to the user across the air interface.
• No means that the system will filter out ICMP messages.
Note: This setting can be used to save air interface resources if the applications used do not use ICMP
messages but cause them to be generated.

20 Select the Yes or No radio button for Source Address Checking Enabled.
• Yes means that the system will check that the datagrams originated from the radio use the assigned IP address
as source address. If the source address does not equal the assigned address, the datagram will be discarded.
• No means that the system will allow the radio to initiate datagrams with any source address.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 177

21 Select the Yes or No radio button for Multi Slot Packet Data Enabled.
• Yes allows the radio user to access the multi-slot packet data service.
• No disables this feature.
Note: If you have QAM services enabled, you can access the multi-slot packet data service regardless
of the Multi Slot Packet Data Enabled setting.

22 Enter the Talkgroup Alias for the Primary Talkgroup of the radio user.
Note: If you do not know the alias, click the Values button for a list of entries. The primary talkgroup
cannot be an Object Group.

Note: This field allows you to select the primary talkgroup, which is important for RCM functionality.
The primary talkgroup and an RCM user's list of attachment groups are used to determine which RCM
users can issue radio commands to a radio user and from which radio users the RCM user can receive
radio activities, such as Status messages. If this field is left blank, status messages are not distributed at
all.
23 Select the Yes or No radio button for Ambience Listening Monitoring Enabled.
• Yes allows the dispatch console to monitor the specific radio user.
• No disables this feature.
24 Select the Yes or No radio button for Ambience Listening Initiation Enabled.
• Yes allows the dispatch console to initiate an Ambience Listening (AL) call.
• No disables this feature.
Note: This parameter is disabled for radio users per default, as only dispatch consoles can be enabled to
initiate AL calls.

25 Enter the Direct Dial Number, which is a unique telephone number assigned to the radio user that can be up to 15
characters. The DDI number is obtained from the phone company and allows direct interconnect access to the
radio user.
Note: The Interconnect Parameters fields are only visible, if you have enabled this capability in step 4.

26 Select the Yes or No radio button for PABX Access.

• If you select Yes, the radio user can make outbound and inbound interconnect calls through a PABX gateway.
• If you select No, you disable this capability.
27 Select the Yes or No radio button for PSTN Access.
• If you select Yes, the radio user can make outbound and inbound interconnect calls through a PSTN gateway.
• If you select No, you disable this capability.
28 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
29 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating a Radio by Entering the Radio Serial Number, ID, Reference

ID, and Security Group
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Radio object.
2 From the File menu, select New.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

178 | Operation

Figure 115: Radio Configuration Window

3 Enter the Radio Serial Number, which can be up to 15 characters. This unique serial number represents a specific
radio on the system and is part of the radios programming. Enter the Radio ID. This is a unique number from 1 to
13999999 that refers to a specific radio on the system and is part of the radios programming. See Talkgroup ID
Ranges on page 168.
Note: The same pool of IDs is also used for allocating ID numbers to radios, console users, talkgroups
and multigroups, and the same value cannot be assigned to both a group and an individual.

Important:
A change in Home Zone Mapping takes place in several steps to ensure that all information is available
to the ZC and PDG immediately after a Home Zone Mapping change. However, it means that the ZC
and PDG for a short period hold all the subscribers that have home in the zone both before and after the
remapping. This total number must not exceed the 64,000 subscriber limit. As an example, if 1,000
subscribers moves out of a zone but 1,000 subscribers moves into the zone, the total number of
subscribers in the ZC and PDG will temporarily increase by 1,000 during a remapping. The remapping
can thus only take place if the initial total number of subscribers are less than 63,000.
The same refers to talkgroups. The total number must not exceed the 16,000 talkgroups limit. For
example, if 200 talkgroups moves out of a zone but 200 talkgroups moves into the zone, the total
number of subscribers in the ZC will temporarily increase by 200 during a remapping. The remapping
can thus only take place if the initial total number of talkgroups are less than 15,800.
In case of losing any subscriber/talkgroup records, after remapping, it is necessary to perform the
download of SAC. For details on how to perform this, see the Backup and Restore Including FRU/FRE
manual.
4 Enter the Radio Reference ID, which can be up to 21 characters. This is a unique reference of the radio used for
Authentication or Encryption purposes. The Radio Reference ID may be a Tetra Equipment Identifier (TEI), or a
SIM ID in cases where the radio uses SIM cards. TEI: T followed by 15 hexadecimal digits (09 and A-F). SIM: S
followed by 20 hexadecimal digits (09 and A-F).
5 Select a Security Group.
6 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
7 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 179

Creating Storm Plans and Storm Plan Commands

A Storm Plan is used in disaster management to dynamically regroup different groups or organizations so that they
can communicate with each other. You can also control a radio by inhibiting or locking the radio. The following
process explains how to create a storm plan.
Process:
1 Define RCM user access rights and attach the RCM user to talkgroups, to allow access to the RCM application.
See the User Configuration – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab. These RCM users must be enabled for
Dynamic Group Number Assignment (DGNA). This will subsequently allow them to select and issue storm plan
commands.
2 Create the storm plans alias and list of authorized RCM users who can activate the storm plan using the Storm
Plan object. Creating a Storm Plan on page 179.
3 Create the storm plan commands, which include the number of commands in the storm plan, the talkgroup to
which radios are regrouped, and the radio users associated with the storm plan. See Creating Storm Plan
Commands on page 181.
4 Assign one primary talkgroup to each radio user, to allow the radio users to receive RCM commands. See
Creating a Radio User – Configuration Tab on page 174.
5 How to actually submit a storm plan within the RCM application, see the Radio Control Manager manual.

Creating a Storm Plan

The Storm Plan record allows you to create a quick and easy identification for predefined Storm Plans.

Creating a Storm Plan Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the alias, purpose, and security group of the new
record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Storm Plan object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Storm Plan configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 116: Storm Plan – Basic Tab

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

180 | Operation

4 Enter the Storm Plan Alias. The alias may be up to 8 characters.

5 In the Purpose field, enter text that clearly describes what situations a specific Storm Plan handles. Together with
the Storm Plan Alias, this provides a clear idea of the plans objective and how it is to be used. The purpose may be
up to 60 characters.
6 Select a Security Group.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Storm Plan Configuration Tab on page 180 to modify the values in the
remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Storm Plan Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter the remaining parameters of the new
record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 117: Storm Plan – Configuration Tab

2 In the Configurations section, click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of valid user names.
3 Select the user name, and then click OK. This list defines the users who can execute the storm plan.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

4 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
5 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 181

Creating Storm Plan Commands

The Storm Plan Commands record creates the Storm Plan Command. It involves the addition of users and talkgroups
to which the users are regrouped during a storm plan. This record consists of two tabs, Basic and Configuration.

Creating Storm Plan Commands Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the storm plan alias and command ID of the new
record.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Storm Plan Commands object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Storm Plan Commands configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

Figure 118: Storm Plan Commands - Basic Tab

4 Enter the Storm Plan Alias. This field associates the Storm Plan Commands record with a Storm Plan.
Note: If you do not know the alias, click the Values button to select from a list of entries.

5 In the Command ID field, enter a number from 1 to 4 to assign a number to a talkgroup that will be configured on
the configuration window.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating Storm Plan Commands Configuration Tab on page 181 to modify the values
in the remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating Storm Plan Commands Configuration Tab

Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

182 | Operation

Figure 119: Storm Plan Commands – Configuration Tab

2 In the Talkgroup Alias field, enter the name of a talkgroup that the radios are associated with when this storm plan
is executed. Talkgroup Alias supports UTF-8 unicode.
Note: If you do not know the name, click the Values button for a list of entries. The primary talkgroup
cannot be an Object Group.

3 To add radio user names, click Add Row.

The Values window appears showing a list of valid radio users.
4 Select a radio user alias, and then click OK.
Note: You can select multiple rows or disjoint select to add more than one entry at a time.

5 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
6 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.
Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Creating a Load Class

Load Class object allows you to define a class (type) of radios which have a given expected contribution to the load
on the Common Control Channel (CCCH). Load class is associated with a specific radio. It is possible to create up to
30 load classes, but for maintainability purposes it is recommended to use the predefined load classes described in the
table below.
Note: When creating a load class record, each load class name must be unique.

Load classes are defined in the Radio User Capabilities Profile object (see Creating a Radio User Capabilities
Profile Configuration Tab on page 139). An entry for a load class cannot be removed if it is used in any radio user
record profile.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 183

Note: The Load Class Name parameter is grayed out for the Radio User Capabilities Profile under the
following conditions:
• The System Ready for Common Secondary Control Channel parameter is set to No in the System
configuration window
• SZ$DEF and SZ$INIT records are set
Note: The load class chosen must correspond to the approximate load which the radios will generate at the
Common Control Channel. If not, the Common Control Channel capacity is not fully optimal utilized when
using Common Secondary Control Channels.
Note: The name of the predefined load classes described below cannot be modified. Other parameters, for
example load class weight, can be set according to your preferences. Predefined load classes can also be
deleted, except for the Default Radio load class.

Table 30: Types of Predefined Load Classes

Default Load Class

Load Class Name Characteristics
Weight
Default Radio 1 Radios with average load on the CCCH, for example
no extra/less expected roaming, calls or short data
services.
Note: This load class cannot be deleted,
it is always available.

Stationary Radio 0.5 Radios with low load on the CCCH for example:
• stationary radio with almost no roaming and low/
normal number of calls/short data services
• radio with very few calls and virtually no short
data services

High Activity Radio 2 Radios with extra load on the CCCH due to, for
example:
• being placed in a car with much more roaming
• sending many short data messages
• making a high number of calls

Very High Activity Radio 4 Radios with very high load on the CCCH for both
calls, roaming and short data services.

Creating a Load Class – Basic Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Basic tab to enter the load class name and ID of the new record.
Note: For maintainability purposes, it is recommended to use the predefined load classes (see Creating a
Load Class on page 182), which parameter vales are set initially by system engineers. Each radio that
registers on the system, has a default load class set with the associated load class weight – Default Radio.
You can select any predefined load class when configuring the Radio User Capabilities Profile (see
Creating a Radio User Capabilities Profile Configuration Tab on page 139).
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Load Class object.
2 From the File menu, select New.
The Load Class configuration window appears, displaying whichever tab was last viewed.
3 Select the Basic tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

184 | Operation

Figure 120: Load Class – Basic Tab

4 Enter the Load Class Name. The name can be up to 40 characters.

5 Enter the Load Class ID. The available range is from 1 to 30.
6 Select a Security Group.
Post requisites: Continue to Creating a Load Class – Configuration Tab on page 184 to modify the values in the
remaining fields of the configuration window.

Creating a Load Class – Configuration Tab

The following procedure explains how to use the Configuration tab to enter parameters of the new record.
Procedure:
1 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 121: Load Class – Configuration Tab

2 Select the Load Class Weight. See Table 30: Types of Predefined Load Classes on page 183 for information on
default Load Class Weight values for Load Classes.
3 Enter a description of the created load class in the Load Class Description field.
4 Click Apply.
The information is saved.
5 Click Cancel to close the window when finished.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 185

Note: From the View menu, select Refresh to see the new record in the contents pane.

Configuring a Barring Profile

See Barring Profile on page 333 for the reference on this object.

Creating and Configuring a Barring Profile

A Barring Profile record defines a list of user IDs which can be barred.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Barring Profile object, right-click in the contents pane and choose New.

Figure 122: BIC/BOC Profile Creation

The Barring Profile configuration window appears.

Figure 123: Barring Profile – Basic Tab

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

186 | Operation

Figure 124: Barring Profile – Basic Tab

2 Type the Barring Profile ID. The range is a number from 1 to 200.
3 Type the Barring Profile Alias.
The alias may be up to 16 characters. The characters: |,@,_,\,",',%, cannot be used. Unicode is allowed.
4 Select a Security Group.
5 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 125: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 187

Figure 126: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab

6 On the Configuration tab, enter the SSI Subset, choose the Entry Type and/or Send Alarm option. Use the Add
Row, Delete Row, Undelete Row, Up and Down buttons to arrange your status messages.
Note: The capacity of the list is 64 lines.

• In Entry Type choose between Barring and Granting .

• In SSI Subset type a range or pattern of IDs.
• Send Alarm option enables sending traps to a monitoring tool.
• Range: two integers in range from 1 to 13999999, separated by hyphen
• Pattern: a sequence of up to 8 of the following characters: 0–9, ?
Note: “0” cannot be leading a pattern.

Note: You can choose this option only when the Entry Type is set to Barring.

7 Click Apply.
The Barring Profile object is created.

Additional Configuration Parameters Features

In addition to the options listed in the previous procedure, there are a few user-friendly features under the Add Row
button.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

188 | Operation

Figure 127: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab – Add Row Options

Figure 128: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab

When adding new rows to the IDs list, you can choose one of the following parameters:
• At the beginning – creates the entry as the first on the list; it is always active,
• Above selected – creates the entry above the selected row; it is active only for single row selection, disabled when
there is no row and multiple rows selection,
• Below selected – creates the entry below the selected row; it is active only for single row selection, disabled when
there is no row and multiple rows selection,
• At the end – creates the entry as the last one on the list; it is always active.
This feature is very useful when you have a big list and you wonder where a new row was created. To move items up
and down, select a row or a couple of them, and use the Up and Down buttons. Up is disabled when the first entry is
selected, and Down is disabled when the last entry is selected.

Configuring Object Group Definition

See the Object Group Definition on page 336 for the reference on this object.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 189

Configuring Preemptive Priority Calls

When enabling and setting up Preemptive Priority Calls (the PPC feature) it is important to set up the appropriate
configurations in User Configuration Manager (UCM). It also relates to the Elite Admin application.
Initially, the PPC feature provisions the Network Manager via UCM. The feature can be provisioned for the following
entities:
• Per talkgroup or multigroup. Any non-emergency group calls targeted to a PPC enabled talkgroup/multigroup are
granted PPC capability (for example, PPC group calls).
• Per radio user profile for a range of radio users. Any individual calls initiated by a PPC enabled radio user are
granted PPC capability (for example PPC individual calls).
• Per console user profile for a console user.
For all entities, the PPC feature can be provisioned in one of two ways:
• SwMI invoked which means that the feature is always active (SwMI is short for Switching and Message
Infrastructure).
• User invoked, which means that the Radio User/Console User can control whether to use the feature or not.

Setting Up Preemptive Priority Calls

Note: The following processes require that valid console users, radio users, capabilities profiles, talkgroup/
multigroups and private call resources have been created in UCM. For further information on creating these
items, see the User Configuration Manager manual.
Process:
1 Set the correct priority level of the talkgroup, multigroup and/or radio user. See Setting Priority Levels on page
190.
2 Enable a talkgroup/multigroup for Preemptive Priority Calls. See Enabling a Multigroup for PPC on page 191.
3 Enable a radio user capabilities profile for Preemptive Priority Calls. See Enabling a Radio User Capabilities
Profile for PPC on page 191.
4 Enable a console user capabilities profile for Preemptive Priority Calls. See Enabling a ConsoleUser Capabilities
Profile for PPC on page 192.
5 Provision radio users with Preemptive Priority Calls. See Provisioning Radio Users with PPC on page 193.
6 Provision console users with Preemptive Priority Calls. See Provisioning Console Users with PPC on page 194.
7 Enable private calls at the Dispatch Console. See Enabling Private Calls at the Dispatch Console on page 195.

Priority of Preemptive Priority Calls

The Preemptive Priority Calls (PPC – group or individual) will have preference in resource allocation at call set-up
and roaming. When setting up or restoring a PPC call, if traffic resources are available, the PPC call is set up/restored
as normal calls. However, if traffic channels are not available, the system conducts resource pre-emption to preempt
the necessary resources from normal voice calls of lower priority for the PPC call.
The PPC call also has preference at busy conversion. If no resources can be pre-empted at the site to set up or restore
a PPC call, the call will be queued. When resources become available, the PPC call will get the resource prior to any
existing normal calls in queue.
In terms of traffic resource allocation, PPC calls have a higher priority compared to normal voice calls, but it is
inferior to emergency calls. Emergency calls can preempt traffic resources used by PPC calls and normal calls but not
vice versa. If in a situation whereby traffic resources at a site are all occupied by emergency calls, any subsequent
emergency calls, PPC calls and normal calls will be put in a busy queue. When resources are available, emergency
calls are busy-converted first, then followed by PPC calls and lastly, normal calls.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

190 | Operation

Setting Priority Levels

To make the PPC feature work, the priority level of talkgroups/multigroups and radio users needs to be configured
properly.
The priority level is an important factor to determine the priority of a call when it is processed (including resource
allocation). The higher priority level a call has, the more likely it will get a resource when it is set up or restored and
less likely its resource will be preempted.
Several parameters exist regarding the priority level of different call types:
• Dispatch Priority Level in the Talkgroup/Multigroup Capabilities Profile object. This will be the priority at
which dispatch call request will be served by the system.
• Dispatch/PC Priority Level in the Radio User Capabilities Profile object. This will be the priority level at which
the radio user dispatch/private call requests will be served by the system.
• Priority Level in the Radio User Interconnect Profile object. This will be the priority at which the radio users
request for interconnect calls are served by the system.
All parameters can be set from a value ranging from 2 to 10 through the UCS. The highest Priority Level, value 1, is
reserved for emergency calls.

Figure 129: Radio User Capabilities Profile Window – Configuration Tab

Priority Level Rules

To make the PPC feature work properly, the following rules must be enforced:

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 191

The following parameters must be provisioned with the same value that is the highest configurable value (for example
value 2), so that both PPC group calls and PPC individual calls have the same priority:
• the Dispatch Priority Level parameter of PPC enabled talkgroups/multigroups
• the Dispatch/PC Priority Level parameter of PPC enabled radio users
The following parameters shall be provisioned with lower Priority Levels than PPC calls (for example ranging from 3
to 10), so that PPC calls will always get higher priority than normal group calls, normal individual calls and telephone
calls:
• the Dispatch Priority Level parameter of talkgroups/multigroups without the PPC capability
• the Dispatch/PC Priority Level parameter of radio users without the PPC capability
• the Priority Level parameter of all radio users

Enabling a Multigroup for PPC

Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application, and click the Talkgroup/Multigroup object.
The associated configuration window opens.
2 On the Configuration tab, set Preempt Capable to Yes to enable the PPC feature; and select a TG/MG
Capabilities Profile object in which the Dispatch Priority Level has been set to 2.

3 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.

Enabling a Radio User Capabilities Profile for PPC

Procedure:
1 In the UCM application select and open the relevant Radio User Capabilities profile.
The associated configuration window opens.
2 Set Dispatch/PC Priority Level to 2.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

192 | Operation

3 Set Private Call (PC) Enabled to Yes.

4 Set Dispatch/Private Call Preempt Enabled to Yes.
5 Set Called User Pre-emption according to the dispatch capability of this range of radio users.
• SwMI invoked means that the feature is always active.
• User invoked means that the Radio User may select to use the feature or not at runtime.

Figure 130: Radio User Capabilities Profile Window – Configuration Tab

6 Click Apply to save your settings, and then close the window.

Enabling a ConsoleUser Capabilities Profile for PPC

Procedure:
1 In the UCM application, select and open the relevant Console User Capabilities profile.
The associated configuration window opens.
2 On the Configuration tab, set Private Call Preempt Enabled to Yes.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 193

Figure 131: Console User Capabilities Profile Window – Configuration Tab

3 In the Called User Preemption select between:

• SwMI invoked means that the feature is always active.
• User invoked means that the Console User may select to use the feature or not at runtime.
4 Click Apply to save your settings, and then close the window.

Provisioning Radio Users with PPC

Procedure:
1 In the UCM application select and open the Radio User object.
The associated configuration window opens.
2 On the Configuration tab, select a Radio User Capabilities Profile in which the PPC feature has been enabled.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

194 | Operation

Figure 132: Radio User Window – Configuration Tab

3 Click Apply to save your settings, and then close the window.

Provisioning Console Users with PPC

Procedure:
1 In the UCM application, select and open the Console User object.
The associated configuration window opens.
2 On the Configuration tab, select a Console User Capabilities Profile in which the PPC feature has been enabled.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 195

Figure 133: Console User Window – Configuration Tab

3 Click Apply to save your settings, and then close the window.

Enabling Private Calls at the Dispatch Console

Procedure:
1 Start the Elite Admin application, and open the desired Dispatch Console configuration.
2 Select Resource in the Edit menu.
The Set Up Resources window opens.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

196 | Operation

Figure 134: Set Up Resources Window

3 In the Resource Selector pane, select the private call resource you wish to enable at the Dispatch Console.
4 In the Resource Builder pane, click Features to access the Set Up Features window.

Figure 135: Set Up Features Window

5 On the Compressed View tab, select the Private Call check box.
6 Click OK to return the main screen.
7 Save the configuration.
When the dispatchers opens their configuration, the private resource will be enabled for Preemptive Priority Calls.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 197

Setting Up Ambient Listening

Note: The following processes require that valid console users, radio users, capabilities profiles, talkgroup/
multigroups and private call resources have been created in UCM. For further information on creating these
items, see the User Configuration Manager manual.
Process:
1 Enable radio users for Ambience Listening in User Configuration Manager (UCM). See Enabling Radio Users for
Ambience Listening on page 197.
2 Enable console users for Ambience Listening. See Enabling Console Users for Ambience Listening on page 198.
3 Enabling Ambience Listening at the Dispatch Console. See Enabling Ambience Listening at the Dispatch Console
on page 198.

Enabling Radio Users for Ambience Listening

Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application, and click the Radio User Object.
The associated configuration window opens.

Figure 136: Radio User Window – Configuration Tab

2 On the Configuration tab, in the Ambience Listening section you can configure the following:
• Select the Yes or No radio button for Ambience Listening Monitoring Enabled. Yes allows the dispatch
console to monitor the specific radio user. No disables this feature.
• Select the Yes or No radio button for Ambience Listening Initiation Enabled. No allows the dispatch
console to initiate an Ambience Listening call. No disables this feature.
Note: This parameter is disabled for radio users per default, as only dispatch consoles should be
enabled to initiate Ambience Listening calls. Also note that Ambience Listening Initiation Enabled
radio button only pertains to Centracom Gold.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

198 | Operation

3 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.

Enabling Console Users for Ambience Listening

Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application, and click the Console User object.
The associated configuration window opens.
2 On the Configuration tab, select Enable Ambience Listening Initiation by clicking Yes.

Figure 137: Console User Window – Configuration Tab

3 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.

Enabling Ambience Listening at the Dispatch Console

Procedure:
1 Start the Elite Admin application, and open the desired Dispatch Console configuration.
2 Select Resource in the Edit menu.
The Set Up Resources window opens.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 199

Figure 138: Set Up Resources Window

3 In the Resource Selector pane, select the private call resource you wish to enable for Ambience Listening.
4 In the Resource Builder section, click Features to open the Set Up Features window.

Figure 139: Set Up Features Window

5 On the Compressed View tab, select the Ambience Listening check box.
6 Click OK to save the settings and close the window.
7 Save the configuration.
When dispatchers open their configuration, ambience listening is enabled for this private resource.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

200 | Operation

Configuring the System for Full Duplex Private Calls

Note: The following processes require that dispatchers, radio users, capabilities profiles, talkgroup/
multigroups and private call resources have been created in UCM. For further information on creating these
items, see the User Configuration Manager manual.
Process:
1 Enable radio users for Full Duplex Private Calls. See Enabling Radio Users for Full Duplex Private Calls on page
200.
2 Enable console users for Full Duplex Private Calls. See Enabling Console Users for Full Duplex Private Calls on
page 201.
3 Enable Private Calls at the Dispatch Console. See Enabling Private Calls at the Dispatch Console on page 201.

Enabling Radio Users for Full Duplex Private Calls

Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application, and select the Radio User object.
The associated configuration window opens.
2 On the Configuration tab, select Full Duplex Enabled by clicking Yes.

Figure 140: Radio User Window – Configuration Tab

3 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 201

Enabling Console Users for Full Duplex Private Calls

Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application, and select the Console User object.
The associated configuration window opens.
2 On the Configuration tab, select Full Duplex Enabled by clicking Yes.

Figure 141: Console User Window – Configuration Tab

3 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.

Enabling Private Calls at the Dispatch Console

Procedure:
1 Start the Elite Admin application and open the desired Dispatch Console configuration.
2 Select Resource in the Edit menu.
The Set Up Resources window opens.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

202 | Operation

Figure 142: Set Up Resources Window

3 In the Resource Selector pane, select the private call resource you wish to enable for full duplex.
4 In the Resource Builder section, click Features.
The Set Up Features window opens.

Figure 143: Set Up Features Window

5 On the Compressed View tab, select the Private Call check box.
6 Click OK to save the settings and close the window.
7 Save the configuration.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 203

When dispatchers open their configuration the private resource will be available for both individual calls and
private calls.

Configuring Status Transfer Service

Status Transfer Service is a console feature that allows a radio to relay its present status without having to use voice
communication. It provides communication efficiency for predefined messages. Setting up Status Transfer Service for
your system comprises the following processes:
Process:
1 Create the status sets in User Configuration Manager (UCM). See Creating Status Sets in UCM on page 203
2 Enable the Status Transfer Service feature at the dispatch console. See Enabling Status Transfer Service at the
Dispatch Console on page 204

Creating Status Sets in UCM

Procedure:
1 Open the UCM application, and select the Status Sets object.

Figure 144: Status Set Window – Basic Tab

2 On the Basic tab, enter the following information:

• In the Status Set Alias field, enter an alias for this status set.
• In the Status Set ID field, enter a unique ID for this status set.
• In the Security Group field, select a valid Security group. Security groups are created and maintained in
UCM, and used in combination with the Status Transfer Service feature they allow you to operate with
multiple status sets in the same configuration. For instance, you might want to operate with one status set for
the Police security group and another for the Fire Department security group.
3 On the Configuration tab, enter the contents of the status set, that is a unique number and an accompanying
message. Use the Add Row, Delete Row, and Undelete Row buttons to arrange your status messages.
• In the Status Number field, enter the unique number of the current status message.
• In the Status Text field, enter the status message, for instance On scene, Out of Service, En route,
Available, and so on.
Note: The valid range for Dimetra is 32768 to 61439.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

204 | Operation

Figure 145: Status Set Window – Configuration Tab

4 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.

Enabling Status Transfer Service at the Dispatch Console

Procedure:
1 Start the Elite Admin application and open the desired Dispatch Console configuration.
2 Select Resource in the Edit menu.
The Set Up Resources window opens.

Figure 146: Set Up Resources Window

3 In the Resource Selector pane, select the trunking call resource you wish to enable for status transfer service.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 205

4 In the Resource Builder section, click Features.

The Set Up Features window opens.

Figure 147: Set Up Features Window

5 To make status messages available for the console user, you must select the Stack check box and/or the 3 Line
Display check boxes.
Status messages will be automatically visible from the Stack window and the 3 Line Display window.
6 Click OK to save the settings and close the window.
7 Save the configuration. When the dispatchers open their configuration, the Status Transfer Service will be enabled
for this resource.
Note that you can also see these status messages in the activity log.

Site Wide Call

The Site Wide Call (SWC) service is an enhancement to the standard Group Call service and allows a console
operator to communicate with all radios located at one site. The SWC capability will be provisioned via the network
manager by configuring one talkgroup per one or more sites. These talkgroups, each covering a single site or more
sites, shall be subsequently used as Site Wide Talk Groups (SWTGs). Each of these SWTGs is in the standard valid
talkgroup range and must be provisioned into the corresponding BTS site.
Process:
1 Set up Site Wide Call in User Configuration Manager (UCM). See Configuring the Site Wide Call in UCM on
page 205.
2 Configure the Tetra Site Controller for Site Wide Calls Configuring the Tetra Site Controller for Site Wide Calls
on page 208.

Configuring the Site Wide Call in UCM

Procedure:
1 In UCM configure a Multigroup/Talkgroup Valid Sites Profile with only one valid side. This is the site where the
Site Wide Call shall be heard. Set the Requested fields and Critical fields to Yes.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

206 | Operation

Figure 148: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile Window – Configuration Tab

2 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.
3 Proceed to open a Talkgroup/Multigroup Capabilities Profile.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 207

Figure 149: TG/MG Capabilities Profile Window – Configuration Tab

4 On the Configuration tab, set Conversation Type to Transmission.

5 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.
6 In UCM, create a talkgroup using the Valid Site Profile and the Capabilities Profile you have just created. Set
the Talkgroup Regroupable option to No.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

208 | Operation

Figure 150: Talkgroup Window – Configuration Tab

7 Click Apply to save the settings, and then close the window.

Configuring the Tetra Site Controller for Site Wide Calls

Procedure:
1 Configure the TSC (Tetra Site Controller) using TESS tab Calls.
2 Set Site Wide Call Enabled to Enabled.
3 Set Site Wide Call Talk Group to the TG ID number.
4 Set Common Site Wide Call Talk Group to 16777215.

Deleting Records
The following procedure explains how to delete a record in the User Configuration Manager (UCM). This procedure
is the same for all records that can be deleted. Additional information for deleting particular types of records also
appears in this section.
Procedure:
1 Select the appropriate object from the navigation pane.
2 Select the record you want to delete from the contents pane.
3 From the File menu, select Delete.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 209

Figure 151: Delete Record

The Confirmation dialogue box appears.

4 Click OK.
The record is deleted from the database.

Deleting a Radio
Perform the following procedure to delete a radio.
Procedure:
1 In the User Configuration Manager (UCM), select the Radio object in the navigation pane.
A list of radios appears in the contents pane.
2 Select the radio record you want to delete and right-click.
A pop-up menu appears.
3 Select Delete from the pop-up menu.
A prompt appears asking if you are sure you want to delete the radio.
4 Click Yes to delete the radio or No to cancel the deletion.

Considerations for Deleting a Talkgroup or Multigroup

Consider the following before deleting a talkgroup or multigroup:

• After you delete a talkgroup, you can assign the deleted talkgroup's ID number to a new talkgroup.
• When you delete a talkgroup from the system it is automatically deleted from any multigroup it was assigned to.
• If you delete the multigroup only at the UCM, radio users can select the multigroup but are not able to
communicate on that multigroup. It could affect emergency calls. Removing the multigroups requires
reprogramming of the radios.

Considerations for Deleting a Radio User

Consider the following before deleting a radio user:

• If you must delete a radio from the system, it is important to delete its user unless you are assigning a new radio to
the same radio user.
• After you delete a radio user, you may assign the deleted radio user's ID number to a new radio user.
• When deleting a radio user from the UCM, the user's radio is not functional on the system until it is assigned in
another radio user's record.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

210 | Operation

• When you delete a radio user, it does not delete the radio from the system. However, if you delete a radio from the
system, the radio is deleted from the radio user's record.

Considerations for Deleting a User Group

Consider the following before deleting a user group:

• It is forbidden to delete a user group assigned to any Radio User Capabilities Profile or Talkgroup/Multigroup
Capabilities Profile. If you want to delete a user group, it is important to first unassign first from the profiles.
• After you delete a user group, it is automatically removed from all Channel instances it was assigned to.

Disabling Records

This section includes procedures that allow you to disable certain records without removing them permanently from
the system.

Disabling a Talkgroup or Multigroup

You can disable a talkgroup or multigroup because of changes to user needs, in response to system performance
issues, or because of a decrease in the number of radio users on the system. When you disable a talkgroup or
multigroup from the system, radio users can no longer use it to communicate. Radio users can continue to
communicate on the system by selecting any other talkgroup that is programmed into their radios.
Important: If you are disabling a talkgroup, make sure that you disable it consistently throughout the
system.

Note: If you disable a talkgroup or multigroup in the User Configuration Manager (UCM), radio users can
no longer communicate on it, but it can be enabled again later.

Disabling a Talkgroup
The following procedure explains how to disable a talkgroup in the UCM.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Talkgroup object.
2 In the contents pane, select the Talkgroup record you wish to disable.
3 From the File menu, select Open.
The Talkgroup configuration window appears.
4 Select the Configuration tab.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 211

Figure 152: Talkgroup – Configuration Tab

5 Select No for the Group Enabled radio button to disable the talkgroup. (To later re-enable this talkgroup, change
this setting to Yes).
6 Click Apply.
The Talkgroup record is disabled.

Disabling a Multigroup
The following procedure explains how to disable a multigroup in the UCM.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Multigroup object.
2 In the contents pane, select the Multigroup record you wish to disable.
3 From the File menu, select Open.
The Multigroup configuration window appears.
4 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

212 | Operation

Figure 153: Multigroup – Configuration Tab

5 Select No for the Group Enabled radio button to disable the multigroup. (To later re-enable this multigroup,
change this setting to Yes).
6 Click Apply.
The Multigroup record is disabled.

Disabling a Radio or Radio User

You can delete radios and radio users from the system or disable them temporarily. Unless radios are damaged
beyond repair, it is recommended that they are disabled rather than deleted to simplify adding them back into the
system. The UCM is used to disable the radio user who is attached to the radio that you wish to temporarily disable.
Since there is one radio user per radio, that action disables both the radio user and the radio.
This section provides an overview of the processes involved in disabling radios or radio users.
Note: If you disable a radio user, you should also disable that user's radio unless you assign the radio to
another radio user.

Disabling a Radio User

The following procedure explains how to disable a radio user in the UCM.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Radio User object.
2 In the contents pane, select the Radio User record you wish to disable.
3 From the File menu, select Open.
The Radio User configuration window appears.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Operation | 213

4 Select the Configuration tab.

Figure 154: Radio User – Configuration Tab

5 Select No for the User Enabled radio button to disable the user. (To later re-enable this user, change this setting
to Yes).
6 Click Apply.
The Radio User record is disabled.

Removing a Talkgroup from a Multigroup

The following procedure explains how to remove a talkgroup from a multigroup in the UCM.
Procedure:
1 In the UCM, select the Multigroup object.
2 In the contents pane, select the Multigroup record you wish to disable.
3 From the File menu, select Open.
The Multigroup configuration window appears.
4 Select the Configuration tab.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

214 | Operation

Figure 155: Multigroup – Configuration Tab

5 In the Talkgroup in the Multigroup list, select the talkgroup you want to delete.
6 Click Delete Row.
The row for the selected talkgroup is highlighted.
7 Click Apply.
Note: If Home Zone Mapping is not properly configured, an error message appears.

Replacing a Radio

The following table shows the specific tasks involved in replacing a radio.
Note: Once you delete an old radio ID from the system, you can reuse it. It is necessary to create a record
for this radio.

Table 31: Tasks Involved in Replacing a Radio

System Element Tasks to Be Performed

UCM Modify the records in the Radio and Radio User objects to reflect the serial
number of the new radio.
CPS Plus Program the new radio with the same features and capabilities that the old radio
had.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

Chapter

4
Reference
This part describes the configuration of objects using the User Configuration Management (UCM) window. These
objects are presented in the order they appear in the navigation pane.
For each object, the Configuration window (which appears when you select Open for a record) is shown, along with
the tabs that make up the window. A table follows each window to describe the fields on the window, including
default and valid values for each field.
Any fields that are not applicable to the current system or to the systems current configuration are grayed out and
cannot be modified. Objects related to purchasable options are not shown if the option is not purchased. For example,
Storm Plan is part of the Radio Control Manager (RCM) purchasable option.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

216 | Reference

Figure 156: User Configuration Manager Main Window

System Configuration Reference

This part describes the Basic and Configuration tabs for each object in the System Configuration object class of the
User Configuration Manager (UCM) window.

System
The System object configures parameters at the cluster level for the MSO. These parameters are common for every
zone in the Dimetra IP system.
Important: System engineers create the System record when configuring the system initially. Subsequent
users can only open and modify the existing record. Considering the ramifications when changing the
initial configuration is important.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 217

System – Basic Tab

Figure 157: System – Basic Tab

Table 32: Parameters for the System – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
System Alias SYSTE 1 to 16 Enter a name that uniquely identifies an individual
M1 characters. system.
Cannot use: | @
Note: System Alias has to be the same in all
_"%$?/\
clusters within a system.

Local Cluster ID N/A 1 to 16 Enter a number that uniquely identifies an individual

cluster.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.
System Identification Parameters
Mobile Country 0 0 to 1023 Enter the country code for the TETRA system, assigned
Code according to the country in which the network is
deployed. The number should be that defined in Annex D
of CCITT Recommendation X.121. It is broadcast by the
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

218 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

TETRA system to identify the country code of the
network.
Mobile Network 0 0 to 16383 Enter the network code for the TETRA system, normally
Code assigned by the National Administration of the country in
which the network is deployed. A unique value should be
assigned to each network within a country. It is broadcast
by the TETRA system to uniquely identify the network.
System Code 2 0 to 15 Defines the system code to identify which edition of the
TETRA Standard the network is currently adhering to. It
is broadcast by the TETRA system.
Note: Do not change this parameter from its
default value.

System – Configuration Tab

Figure 158: System – Configuration Tab

Note: Not all parameters are visible in the figure above. All of them are listed in the table below.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 219

Table 33: Parameters for the System – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Site Access Denial Both • Either Select how to handle site access denial (affiliation)
Type • Individual rejections. This field works in conjunction with the Radio
Only User Valid Sites Profile or TG/MG Capabilities Profile
records. Rejections depend on the valid sites set for each
• TG Only
radio and affiliated talkgroup. Select one of the following:
• Both
• Either rejects the radio if either the individual radio or
its affiliated talkgroup does not have access to the site.
• Individual Only rejects the radio if the individual radio
does not have access to the site, regardless of the
talkgroup setting.
• TG (Talkgroup) Only rejects the radio if its affiliated
talkgroup does not have access to the site.
• Both rejects the radio if neither the talkgroup nor the
radio has access to the site. Both the individual and the
talkgroup are not valid at this site, so the registration
request is denied.

Route Status No Yes or No • Yes enables the console to receive status event notices.
Events to Console • No disables this ability.

Emergency RCM RCM, • RCM selects RCM software for acknowledging

Acknowledged By Console, emergencies.
CADI, TG • Console selects the console for acknowledging
Selectable emergencies.
• CADI selects the CADI software for acknowledging
emergencies. If the Emergency Acknowledged By field
in the system configuration is set to RCM, CADI or
Console then this field is disabled.
• TG Selectable if selected, each TG/MG capabilities
profile can choose between values:
• RCM
• Console
• CADI
If one of the above values is selected, then this value is
used for the entire cluster. In such a case, Emergency
Acknowledged By field on TG/MG is disabled, and
displays the appropriate value.

RUI Access Off Off, On, • Off disables the RUA/RUI feature. In this state ZC
Control Automatic On operates without connection to the Alias Server.
• No enables the feature.
• Automatic On all radios are treated as being logged
on, even when a radio user had not performed the
logon (in this case, the radio is brought into the
"implicitly logged on" state). In the Automatic On state
the track of all radios in the system is kept, so only new
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

220 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

radio users will be forced to log on after changing the

state to "On". In this state ZC operates without
connection to the Alias Server.

Enable RUA/RUI No Yes or No • Yes allows for using (Protocol Identifier) PID 193 SDS
Messages with messages as RUA/RUI messages, instead of handling
PID 193 PID 193 as SDS text messages.
• No enables handling PID 193 as SDS text messages.
Important: No disables the RUA/RUI service.
This parameter must be set to Yes if RUA/RUI
service is used.
Note: This parameter is configurable only
when the RUA/RUI license is purchased.

Support for Single No Yes or No • Yes - provisioned eTetra capabilities for radio users
Band Subscribers and Talkgroups are considered when affiliations and
channel allocations are made.
• No - eTetra capabilities are not taken into account
when affiliations occur and when channels are
allocated.
Note: In order to have this field active a license
key has to be supplied. If set to Yes system will
not assign Extended band channels to single
band subscribers or talkgroups. If set to No
single band radios can work in Extended band.
Note: In order to have this field active purchase
a license key. After setting to No all e-Band
Base Radios for the site are temporarily taken
out of service to make sure that all e-Band calls
are dropped.

System Ready for No Yes or No • Yes enables the Common Secondary Control Channel
Common functionality.
Secondary Control • No disables the Common Secondary Control Channel
Channel functionality.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 221

Field Default Range Description

Note: If the System Ready for Common

Secondary Control Channel parameter is set
to No, then the Common Secondary Control
Channel feature is switched off in all sites in
the cluster, for example only Main Control
Channels are available as control channels.
Additionally, the Clean up Common
Secondary Control Channels parameter is
active and allows you to clean up the number of
C-SCCHs.
What is more, the Load Class parameter is
grayed out in the Radio User Capabilities
Profile configuration window, thus the Load
Class object cannot be added, changed, nor
deleted.
Note: Enabling this feature again does not
make the Common Secondary Control Channel
(C-SCCH) functionality operational
immediately, as the radio stays at the CCCH
they currently are until switched on/off or
having roamed.
For details on the Common Secondary Control Channel
feature, see the Configuring Features manual.
Clean up Common No Yes or No • Yes allows you to clean up the number of C-SCCHs in
Secondary Control RF Sites before turning on the Common Secondary
Channels Control channels feature again. If the number of C-
SCCHs have not been cleaned up, then it is not
possible to switch on the C-SCCH functionality.
• No does not allow for the C-SCCH cleanup.
Note: This parameter is not active if the
System Ready for Common Secondary
Control Channel is set to Yes.

Timeout Parameters
InterZone 2 2 to 30 Select the delay time before an attempt to reestablish a link
Debounce Timer is made, following a data link failure between zone
(sec) controllers.
Radio User Infinite 1 to 96 Select the time when an inactive radio is polled to
Inactivity Time (increment of determine if it is still on the system and has a user logged
4); Infinite on. If the radio does not respond, it will be deregistered
and the user logged off in the SwMI. When no user is
logged on to a radio, or if the Radio User Inactivity Time
is set to Infinite, then the Talkgroup Inactivity Time
parameter is applied instead. This parameter applies to all
radios where a user is logged on.
Note: This field is active if the RUA/RUI
license is available.

Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

222 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Call Timeout Parameters
Group Call 1.5 0.0 to 30 Select the additional time a talkgroup call is permitted to
Service Timeout continue when no radio is transmitting. This field is
(sec) commonly known as "hang time." In message trunking,
this is the time that the assigned channel resource remains
active and keyed up. Longer time-outs will generally
increase the system load.
Note: See Figure 230: TG/MG Capabilities
Profile – Configuration Tab on page 320 for
more information about setting message or
transmission mode.

Private Call (sec) 10 10.0 to 60.0 Select the hang time for a private call. This is the
additional time a private call is permitted to continue after
the radio user stops talking.
Emergency Call 30 0 to infinity; Select the hang time for an emergency call. This is the
(sec) infinity additional time an emergency call is permitted to continue
equals after the radio user stops talking.
3660seconds
Maximum Call Duration Parameters
Maximum 10 0 to 1440 Select the maximum amount of time that a dispatch call
Dispatch Call can last. After this time period has expired, the call will be
Duration (min) transmission trunked. The feature is transparent and allows
monitoring of communications continuously for up to 24
hours.
Maximum Private 10 0 to 60 Select the maximum amount of time that a private call can
Call Duration / last. After this time period has expired, the call will be
Channel transmission trunked.
Assignment (min)
Call Length Timer 5 min 0 to 30 min; Select the maximum length for a call to be active in the
Infinite radio. The configured value for the call length timer
applies to site trunking calls only, as the Master Site runs a
call length timer for wide area group, private and
interconnect calls.
Pre-emption Mode Parameters
Pre-emption Mode Forced Pre-emption Select how the user preemption interrupts the called user.
User Presentation,
• Pre-emption Presentation: the user will be prompted
Pre- Forced User
by the radio to allow interruption of the ongoing call
emption Pre-emption,
when a User Pre-emptive call is coming in.
• Forced User Pre-emption: the ongoing call will be
abruptly interrupted, and the new User Pre-emptive call
will be established without user intervention.

Security Parameters
Air Interface Yes Yes or No • Yes indicates that air interface encryption (AIE) is
Encryption enabled for the system.
Enabled
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 223

Field Default Range Description

It enables the Secure DMO OTAR Enabled field (only

when a valid license key is installed), the OTAR Retry
Interval field, and the Max Response Timer field.
• No indicates that air interface encryption is disabled for
the system.

Authentication Yes Yes or No • Yes indicates that authentication is enabled for the
Enabled system.
It enables Security Class 1 MS Authentication Enabled
field.
• No indicates that authentication is disabled for the
system.

Security Class 1 No Yes or No • Yes allows you to configure whether MS (radio)

MS outside of the encrypted ISSI range requires explicit
Authentication authentication or not.
Enabled • No indicates that it is not possible to configure radio
outside of the encrypted ISSI.

Authentication 3 1 to 60 Select the maximum number of seconds that the system

Timer (sec) will await an authentication response from a radio.
Security Class 1 No Yes or No • Yes allows radios that do not support air interface
MS Supported encryption to operate on the system.
• No does not allow radios that do not support air
interface encryption to operate on the system.

Encrypted Yes Yes or No • Yes indicates that encrypted power-on registrations and
Registrations roaming registrations are supported by the system.
• No disables this capability.

Key Change 300 1 to 900 Select the maximum number of seconds that the
Notification notification period for an Air Interface Cipher Key change
Period from current key to the future key may last.
Important: Do not change this parameter
without Motorola Solutions support, as it can
have severe implications on the system.

Security Class 5 1 to 900 Select the maximum number of seconds that the
Change notification period for a Security Class change will last to
Notification subscribers.
Period
Important: To prevent a temporary loss of
communications during the initial transition
from Security Class 2 to Security Class 3, it is
necessary to extend the Security Class Change
Notification Period (SCCNP) to 300
temporarily in order to allow mobiles time
enough to retrieve the cipher key required for
Security Class 3 operation from the system. See
the corrective procedure in the Authentication
and Encryption Overview manual.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

224 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Security Class 300 0 to 900 Select the maximum number of seconds that the hysteresis
Hysteresis Period period for a Security Class 2 to Security Class 3 transition
will last.
Important: When you increase the SCCNP
parameter value from 5 to 300 seconds for the
period that the system first transitions to
Security Class 3, it is recommended that you
reduce the Security Class Hysteresis Period
(SCHP) value temporarily from 300 to 5
seconds until the system has completed the
transition. See the corrective procedure in the
Authentication and Encryption Overview
manual.

Encrypted Yes Yes or No • Yes indicates if neighboring cell (D-NWRK

Broadcast Cell BROADCAST) and security-related information (D-
Information CK CHANGE DEMAND) are broadcast encrypted by
the system.
• No disables this capability.
Note: In a mixed system with users that are
encrypted and users that are not, set this value
to No to send broadcast information without
encryption. To set up users as encrypted or not,
see the Encrypted SSI Start Address and
Encrypted SSI End Address parameters right
below.

Tetra Encryption TEA1 TEA1, TEA2, Select the algorithm type that you want the system to use
Algorithm Type TEA3 for encryption.
Encrypted SSI 1 1 to Enter the Short Subscriber Identities (SSI) Start Address
Start Address 15999999 for Static Cipher Key (SCK) encryption.
Encrypted SSI 159999 1 to Enter the Short Subscriber Identities (SSI) End Address
End Address 99 15999999 for Static Cipher Key (SCK) encryption.
Secure DMO No Yes or No • Yes enables DMO Static Cipher Key.
OTAR Enabled
Important:
This parameter is only available with a
valid license key which has to be purchased.
License has to be installed on UCS. (See:
Backup and Restore Including FRU/FRE
manual.)
• No disables DMO Static Cipher Key.

OTAR Retry 16 4, 8, 16, 32, It determines how many hyperframes it shall wait before
Interval 64 re-trying an OTAR Demand PDU.
Max Response 7200 120 65535 Value broadcasted to radios in OTAR PDUs. This value is
Timer used by the radio to identify the maximum period over
which a radio shall randomly choose a response time to a
group addressed OTAR PDUs.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 225

Field Default Range Description

Perform DCK Yes Yes or No • Yes allows you to switch the system from Security
Update at Zone Class 2 to Security Class 3.
Roaming • No disables this capability.
Note: When set to No, reduces the load on the
air interface in high load/failure situations.

Note: Switch off this functionality only if it is

very critical for the system load, as it may take
up to 14 days before the system can be changed
to Class 3 security level.

TEDS
TEDS-related Disable • Enable • Enable TEDS-related Signaling for all sites in
Signaling for all d • Disable system allows you to enable TEDS-related signaling.
sites in system • Disable TEDS-related Signaling for all sites in
system disables this functionality.
Important: TEDS-related signaling must be
enabled before any QAM channel is configured
in the system. Conversely all QAM channels
must be removed from the system before the
TEDS-related signaling is disabled. In general,
it is recommended to have the TEDS-related
signaling enabled in the whole system to
prepare for future addition of TEDS services.
Note: Enable this functionality if the TEDS
feature is used in the system. Otherwise leave
this functionality disabled.
For more information about configuring TEDS-related
signaling for individual EBTS and MTS Sites, refer to the
Zone Configuration Manager manual.

Data System
The Data System object configures parameters related to the packet data service of the cluster level for the master
site. These parameters are common for every zone in the cluster. For more information about the packet data service,
see the System Overview manual.

Advanced Link
Advanced link is a bidirectional connection orientated path between one radio and a Packet Data Gateway (PDG)
with provision for segmentation. The parameters in the Data System object Advanced Settings Tab control the
behavior of the radio and BTS when communicating using advanced link. The parameters are automatically set during
the setup of advanced link.
The following figure illustrates the Advanced link parameters. See Data System – Advanced Settings Tab on page
230 for the help text description.
Important: It is not recommended that the parameters described in this part are modified without
engineering advice.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

226 | Reference

Figure 159: Advanced Link

IP datagram Final T.252

approx. 1500 bytes segment

AL_SETUP Segment
approx. 30 bytes AL_FINAL
T.261

Retry N.262 times Retry N.274 times

if T.261 expires if T.252 expires

AL_ACK
Transmitter restarts
AL_RNR
Receiver not ready
(usually sent by the
PDG to the MS to T.271 Transmiter tries
prevent transmission to restart
of succeeding PDUs) sending data

Tabs in the Data System Configuration Window

The following table shows the tabs in the Data System Configuration window:

Table 34: Tabs in the Data System Configuration Window

Tab Description
Basic Configures the data system alias and security group.
Settings Configures the dynamic data packet channels and system timers.
Advanced Settings Configures the link-related timers and retransmission parameters.
GGSN List Configures the list of Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) in the cluster.
GGSN Mapping Configures the mapping between the APN Network ID and the GGSN.

Data System – Basic Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 227

Figure 160: Data System – Basic Tab

Table 35: Parameters for the Data System – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Data System SYSTEM1 1 to 16 (Read only) Displays a name that uniquely identifies an
Alias characters individual data system.
APN Operator N/A 1 to 133 Enter the Access Point Name (APN) Operator ID to
ID characters. identify the radio system.
Cannot use: | @
Note: We recommend that the APN Operator
_"?%$
ID consists of three labels separated by . of
which the last one has to be gprs.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

228 | Reference

Data System – Settings Tab

Figure 161: Data System – Settings Tab

Table 36: Parameters for the Data System – Settings Tab

Field Default Range Description

Data Configuration
Data Channel Yes Yes or No Select the order of preemption between voice and packet
Preemption data channels.
• Yes indicates that voice channels preempt packet
data channels.
• No indicates that voice channels do not preempt
packet data channels.
Note: Pre-emption is determined on a call-
by-call basis according to the settings of the
preemption parameters on the TG/MG
Capabilities Profile – Configuration tab
and Radio User Capabilities Profile –
Configuration tab.

Downlink Priority No Yes or No • Yes enables downlink data priority in the system.
• No disables downlink data priority in the system.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 229

Field Default Range Description

The priority assigned to each datagram is used to control
delivery order of datagrams queued for downlink
delivery on each packet data channel. Highest priority
datagrams are delivered first.
Max Users per 25 1 to 60 Select the maximum number of simultaneous users on a
Dynamic PM Data dynamically allocated PM (TETRA1) packet data
Channel channels.
Max Users per 35 1 to 60 Select the maximum number of simultaneous users on a
Multi Slot PM multi-slot PM (TETRA1) packet data channel. The
Packet Data default number of users is larger on a multi-slot PM
Channel packet data channel than on a single slot PM packet data
channel, because the transmission periods are likely to
be shorter on a multi-slot channel.
Data Busy Queue 10 2 to 10 Select the priority of the packet data channels in the
Priority Busy Queue in the zone controller.
Minimum 16- 4-QAM (r=1/2), Select the minimum level of encoding (combination of
QAM-25 QAM 16-QAM modulation and coding scheme) that is used for
Encoding (r=1/2) (r=1/2), 64- downlink data transmission on a 25kHz QAM Tetra
QAM (r=2/3) Enhanced Data Services (TEDS) channel.
Minimum 4-QAM 4-QAM (r=1/2), Select the minimum level of encoding (combination of
QAM-50 (r=1/2) 16-QAM modulation and coding scheme) that is used for
Encoding (r=1/2), 64- downlink data transmission on a 50kHz QAM Tetra
QAM (r=2/3), Enhanced Data Services (TEDS) channel.
64-QAM (r=1)
Max Users per 25 1 to 60 Select the maximum number of simultaneous users on a
Dynamic QAM-25 dynamically allocated 25kHz QAM Tetra Enhanced
PDCH Data Services (TEDS) packet data channel.
Max Users per 25 1 to 60 Select the maximum number of simultaneous users on a
Dynamic QAM-50 dynamically allocated 50kHz QAM Tetra Enhanced
PDCH Data Services (TEDS) packet data channel.
Forward Auto 0, 1, 2, 3 and Specify how many additional uplink slots is granted for
Application Auto additional signaling associated with uplink Advanced
Acknowledgement Link Acknowledgement (AL-ACK) or Advanced Link
Grant Extended Acknowledgement (AL-X-ACK) signaling.
Sites may use these additional slots for application layer
signalling.
• Auto (recommended setting) adjusts a number of
additional uplink slots based on the anticipated
amount of resources used.
• 0, 1, 2, 3 add 0, 1, 2 or 3 uplink slots, respectively.
Use these constants only if it can be assessed how
much additional uplink resources will be used
typically by the application grants.
Note: This parameter applies only to the
QAM channels.

Timers
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

230 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Ready Time Delta 3 2 to 20 Select the minimum number of seconds between the
READY Timer that runs in the SwMI and in the radio.
Page Wait 10 5 to 50 Select the number of seconds that the PDG waits for a
Packet Data Page response.
SNDCP Queue 25 15 to 60 Select the maximum number of seconds that an
Dwell- Time (sec) outbound datagram is allowed to be queued in the PDR
before further processing to the RNG. If this time is
exceeded the message will be discarded and an ICMP
message is generated.
Standby Timer 12 6 hours, 12 Select the maximum number of hours, that an inactive
hours hours, 24 hours radio is allowed to remain registered for packet data.
The Standby Timer is reset every time packet data
activity in the radio ceases. The recommended default is
that a radio needs to register for packet data at the
beginning of the shift.

Data System – Advanced Settings Tab

Figure 162: Data System – Advanced Settings Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 231

Table 37: Parameters for the Data System – Advanced Settings Tab

Field Default Range Description

Timers and Thresholds Parameters
Mobility Query 1 1 to 10.0 Select the maximum number of seconds that the PDG
waits for a reply from the ZC, when sending a mobility
query.
Outstanding 5 1 to 5 Select the maximum number of simultaneous
Queries outstanding mobility queries that the PDG can have in
the ZC.
GTP T3 Timeout 4 1 to 30 Select the maximum number of seconds that the PDG
(sec) waits for a reply from the GGSN, when sending a
tunnel management message.
GTP N3 Attempts 4 1 to 7 Select the maximum number of simultaneous
outstanding tunnel management messages that the PDG
can have in the GGSN.
Advanced Link 9 9 to 100 Select how long the Packet Data Gateway (PDG) will
Acknowledgement frames frames wait for an acknowledgement of the datagram until it
Timer (T.252) retransmits it. The number of retransmissions is defined
in the Upper Limit on TL_SDU Re-transmissions (N.
273) field and the Upper Limit on Segment Re-
transmission (N.274) field below.
Advanced Link 4 4 to 100 Select the time between Advanced Link Setup
Setup Timer (T. frames frames retransmissions. The number of retransmissions is
261) defined below.
Advanced Link 36 10 to 200 Select how long the transmitter will wait before it
Transmitter frames frames retransmits, when a Receiver-Not-Ready message has
Receiver- Not- been received.
Ready Timer (T.
271)
Advanced Link 3 1 to 5 frames Select the number of setup attempts for the advanced
Setup Re- frames link of the Packet Data Gateway (PDG).
transmissions (N.
262)
Upper Limit on 0 times 0 to 7 times Select how many times a complete datagram will be
TL-SDU Re- retransmitted in case of an advanced link checksum
transmissions (N. failure. The actual value is negotiated with the radio
273) when the advanced link is established. The number set
here poses an upper limit to what the system will
accept.
Upper Limit on 3 times 0 to 15 times Select how many times a segment will be retransmitted
Segment Re- in case of a checksum failure for PM (TETRA1)
transmissions for channels. Each datagram consists of a number of
PM segments. If transmission of one or more segments fail,
they will be resent according to the value set here. The
actual value is negotiated with the radio when the
advanced link is established. The number set here poses
an upper limit to what the system will accept.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

232 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Upper Limit on 5 times 0 to 15 times Select how many times a segment will be retransmitted
Segment Re- in case of a checksum failure for 25kHz QAM Tetra
transmissions for Enhanced Data Services (TEDS) channels. Each
QAM-25 datagram consists of a number of segments. If
transmission of one or more segments fail, they will be
resent according to the value set here. The actual value
is negotiated with the radio when the advanced link is
established. The number set here poses an upper limit to
what the system will accept.
Upper Limit on 5 times 0 to 15 times Select how many times a segment will be retransmitted
Segment Re- in case of a checksum failure for 50kHz QAM Tetra
transmissions for Enhanced Data Services (TEDS) channels. Each
QAM-50 datagram consists of a number of segments. If
transmission of one or more segments fail, they will be
resent according to the value set here. The actual value
is negotiated with the radio when the advanced link is
established. The number set here poses an upper limit to
what the system will accept.

Data System – GGSN List Tab

Figure 163: Data System – GGSN List Tab

Table 38: Parameters for the Data System – GGSN List Tab

Field Default Range Description

Timers and Thresholds Parameters
GGSN ID N/A 1 to 40 Enter a unique identifier that refers to a Gateway GPRS
Support Node (GGSN) in the cluster. (Click Add Row to
display a list of options).
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 233

Field Default Range Description

GGSN IP Address N/A Valid IP Enter the IP address of the GGSN. It must consist of four
address numbers separated by . with up to three digits each.

Data System – GGSN Mapping Tab

Figure 164: Data System – GGSN Mapping Tab

Table 39: Parameters for the Data System – GGSN Mapping Tab

Field Default Range Description

GGSN Mapping Parameters
APN Network ID N/A 1 to 63 Enter the Access Point Name (APN) Network ID that is
characters. used by the radio user on the GGSN. The list of APN
Cannot use: | @ Network IDs identify all the home networks that radio
_"?%$ users can be configured for. APN Network ID is allowed
to consist of labels separated by .. The labels must not
start with the prefix “rac”, “lac”, or “sgsn”, and must not
end with the suffix .gprs (Click Add Row to display a
list of options).
Note: All APN Network IDs must be
configured in the GGSN for identification of
the interface to the home network in order to
obtain Packet Data service for the user. To
configure APN Network IDs for each radio
user, see the Radio User – Configuration
tab.

GGSN IP Address N/A Valid IP address Enter the IP address of the GGSN that interfaces to the
home network of the APN Network ID.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

234 | Reference

Console System
The Console System object contains configuration data common to all Console Subsystems within the radio
communication system managed by the Network Manager (NM). The information controlled by the Console System
object includes Digital Maintenance Tone Talkgroup ID and Console Voice Card Vocoder configuration. There is
only one instance of a Console System object and the NM User can only modify the configuration within the Console
System instance.
Warning: System engineers create the initial System record when they initially configure the system.
Subsequent users with the proper rights can only open and modify the existing record. Before changing the
initial System record, be sure that you fully understand the impact to the system for any changes you want
to make, and carefully consider the changes before making them.

Console System – Basic Tab

Figure 165: Console System – Basic Tab

Table 40: Parameters for the Console System – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Console System SYSTEM1 1 to 16 characters. Enter a unique name for a Console System Alias.
Alias Cannot use: | @ _ "
%$?/\
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 characters Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
record is assigned. See Security Group on page
343 for more information on determining the
Security Group alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 235

Console System – Configuration Tab

Figure 166: Console System – Configuration Tab

Table 41: Parameters for the Console System – Configuration Tab

Field De- Range Description

fault
Digital Maintenance Tone
Digital N/A 1 to 13999999 Select the talkgroup associated with the Digital
Maintenance Tone Maintenance Tone.
Group
Note: The primary talkgroup cannot be an
Object Group. Changing this parameter leads
to MGEG restart which disrupts the system
for some time. The restart is caused by the
changes in configuration.

Console Vocoder Parameters

Packet 0 0 to 300 Select the time in milliseconds from when a console
Transmission platform receives a GRANT until the first audio packet is
Hold Off Time sent.
(ms)
Note: It is strongly recommended not to
change this value except under the guidance
and direction of a service technician.

Begin Encode 0 0 to 500 Select the time in milliseconds from when a console
Buffering (ms) platform receives a call start grant until audio starts being
buffered.
Note: It is strongly recommended not to
change this value except under the guidance
and direction of a service technician.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

236 | Reference

Field De- Range Description

fault
Jitter Buffering 40 0 to 100 Select the amount of time in milliseconds that an audio
Age (ms) packet is stored in the Jitter Buffer before being decoded.
Note: It is strongly recommended not to
change this value except under the guidance
and direction of a service technician.

IGMP Hello time 80 0 to 500 Select the time in milliseconds at the beginning of an
(ms) encoded call during which the Digital Signal Processor
(DSP) sources dummy multicast packets into the network
to assure that the multicast tree is established quickly,
and that the receivers have joined the tree.
Note: It is strongly recommended not to
change this value except under the guidance
and direction of a service technician.

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the console system.

Analog Conventional System

The Analog Conventional System object contains configuration data common to all Analog Conventional Subsystems
within the radio communication system managed by the Network Manager (NM). The information controlled by the
Analog Conventional System object includes Console Voice Card Vocoder and conventional channel gateway
(CCGW) configuration. There is only one instance of an Analog Conventional System object and the NM User can
only modify the configuration within the Analog Conventional System instance. The analog conventional capabilities
are used to provide interoperability between systems during the migration of users from CentraCom consoles to MCC
7500 consoles.
Warning: System engineers create the initial System record when they initially configure the system.
Subsequent users with the proper rights can only open and modify the existing record. Before changing the
initial System record, be sure that you fully understand the impact to the system for any changes you want
to make, and carefully consider the changes before making them.

Analog Conventional System – Basic Tab

Figure 167: Analog Conventional System – Basic Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 237

Table 42: Parameters for the Analog Conventional System – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Analog Conv 1 to 16 (Read only) Displays a name that uniquely identifies an
Conventional Sys characters individual analog conventional system.
System Alias Params
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Analog Conventional System – Configuration Tab

Figure 168: Analog Conventional System – Configuration Tab

Table 43: Parameters for the Analog Conventional System – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Console Vocoder Parameters
Begin Encode 0 0 to 500 Select the amount of time from the receipt of a grant from
Buffering for the zone controller such that when this time expires the
Consoles (ms) most current buffered audio is used as part of the first
encoded audio packet sent on the network. This parameter
is used by the consoles for outbound calls.
Note: It is strongly recommended not to
change this value except under the guidance
and direction of a service technician.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

238 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Analog Conventional 100 0 to 300 Select the amount of time from the receipt of a grant from
Packet Transmission the zone controller for a transmission before sending the
Hold Off Time (ms) first audio packet on the network. This parameter is used
by the consoles for inbound calls.
Note: It is strongly recommended not to
change this value except under the guidance
and direction of a service technician.

Jitter Buffering Age 40 1 to 100 Select the amount of time that a packet sits in the jitter
(ms) buffer before being decoded. This parameter is used by the
consoles for inbound calls.
Note: It is strongly recommended not to
change this value except under the guidance
and direction of a service technician.

CCGW Vocoder Parameters

Packet Transmission 100 0 to 300 Select the amount of time from the receipt of a grant from
Hold Off Time (ms) the zone controller for a transmission before sending the
first audio packet on the network. This is the parameter
used by the CCGW for outbound calls.

Source Site Adjacent Control Channel (ACC)

The Source Site Adjacent Control Channel (ACC) object provides a means to define which sites are in close
proximity to any given site.
Important: System engineers create the Source Site ACC record when configuring the system initially.
Subsequent users can only open and modify the existing record. Considering the ramifications when
changing the initial configuration is important.
In large systems, the radio cannot contain all of the frequencies for adjacent sites to which the radio may need to
roam. Additionally, new sites may be added to the system, and you do not want to have to bring all of the radios in for
reprogramming. ACCs allow a radio to learn about the control channel frequencies, current availability status, and
service capabilities of nearby sites. The radios then use this information for ranking potential control channel
candidates that can be used in the event that the current sites control channel becomes too weak for acceptable use.
The radio would then move to one of these adjacent sites.

Using the Source Site ACC Object

Use the Source Site ACC object to configure which sites are adjacent to a particular site. To do this, you select a
Source Site ACC record, then in the Configuration tab, you specify up to 31 sites from a list of all available sites.
These sites can be from the same or different zones and clusters. Add the sites to the Adjacent Sites table.
Be aware of the fact that a newly created adjacency is one way only until you have configured adjacency the other
way.
Example of site adjacency configuration: If you add site 2 to the adjacency list of a given source site 1, this means
that the source site 1 now broadcasts information about site 2 enabling a radio to roam more easily from site 1 to site
2. If you want site 1 to be in site 2s list of adjacencies, you have to manually open site 2s source site ACC
configuration information and add site 1 there.
Note: The maximum number of adjacent sites that one site should be added to is 31, in order for the system
to work properly. If you exceed this number a warning message is displayed in the fault management
application of the PRNM Suite. It is necessary to restructure the adjacency configuration for the system, to
keep this number up to 31.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 239

Radio Configuration
When programmed, the radio is given parameters to rank the identified ACCs for site affiliation. The radio builds a
table of ACC information, which can be used as a reference in case the currently affiliated site can no longer be used.
The radio scans the listing of ACC updated sites and chooses either to stay affiliated with the current site or to attempt
to affiliate with another in the list. It keeps the radio from needless searching for other sites.

Site Configuration
Each site in the system is programmed with ACC information. The source site provides the radio with information
about its neighboring sites. You must know the coverage pattern of each site in and around a zone so that you know
which sites can provide acceptable communications services to an affiliated radio. Only these sites are added for the
source site.
By configuring the Source Site ACC object, all sites in the system are linked to one or more sites, even across zone
and cluster boundaries.

Source Site ACC Configuration

After the Source Site ACC data is configured and saved, the data is downloaded to the zone controllers. The zone
controllers then download the information to all of the sites in the zone. The sites, on the other hand, broadcast the
ACC information to all radios affiliated with them.

Source Site ACC – Basic Tab

Figure 169: Source Site ACC – Basic Tab

Table 44: Parameters for the Source Site ACC – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Displays the name of the zone in which the
characters source site is located. This field is replicated from the ZCM.
This field is editable as a New record by system engineers.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

240 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

The system appends the Zone Alias with three characters
using the Zone ID.
Site Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Displays the name of the source site. For a given
characters zone, the source site must be provided. This field is
replicated from the ZCM.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record is
characters assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Source Site ACC – Configuration Tab

Figure 170: Source Site ACC – Configuration Tab

Table 45: Parameters for the Source Site ACC – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Adjacent Sites
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select the name of the zone in which the
characters adjacent site is located. (Click Add Row to display a list
of options). This field is replicated from the ZCM.
Site Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the name of the adjacent site.
characters
Note: You can select up to 31 sites to be
added as being adjacent to a particular site.
You will receive a warning in the fault
management application if you exceed this
number.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 241

InterZone (IZ) Control Path

The InterZone (IZ) Control Path object represents the zone controller interface to the interzone network via an
Ethernet connection.
The appropriate use of the IZ Control Paths ensures that radio users and consoles can communicate across zones and
ensures proper system operation.
Important: IZ Control Path records are created automatically during system installation.

InterZone Control Path Overview

The zone controller of each zone contains two Ethernet-based Network Interface Cards (NICs) to provide the path for
interzone control. The connection between a NIC card in one zone and the NIC card in another zone constitutes a
unique IZ Control Path object in the system that you cannot reconfigure.

InterZone (IZ) Control Path Configuration Window

Figure 171: InterZone Control Path Configuration Window

Table 46: Parameters for the InterZone Control Path Configuration Window

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
First Zone ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only) Displays the ID of the zone for which the
first IZ Control Path is configured.
Second Zone ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only) Displays the ID of the zone for which the
second IZ Control Path is configured.
IZ Control Path ID N/A 1 to 2 (Read only) Displays the ID for the IZ Control Path
between a pair of zones. This is the path from one NIC
card to another.
First Zone NIC IP N/A Valid IP address (Read only) Displays the IP address for the first
Address Network Interface Card (NIC) in the zone controller.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

242 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Second Zone NIC N/A Valid IP address (Read only) Displays the IP address for the second
IP Address Network Interface Card (NIC) in the zone controller.
Primary Path Yes Yes or No • (Read only) Yes indicates the IZ Control Path is the
primary path. If the IZ Control Path ID is 1, then this
is set to Yes.
• (Read only) No indicates the IZ Control Path is the
secondary path between a pair of zones. If the IZ
Control Path ID is 2, then this is set to No.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Displays the alias of the Security Group to
characters which this record is assigned. See Security Group on
page 343 for more information on determining the
Security Group alias.

Key Variable Loader

The Key Variable Loader (KVL) object represents a portable keyload device used to distribute encryption keys to
various entities in the Dimetra IP system. Each KVL can be assigned to one or more zones and can only distribute
keys to infrastructure within its assigned zones.

Key Variable Loader – Basic Tab

Figure 172: Key Variable Loader – Basic Tab

Table 47: Parameters for the Key Variable Loader – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
KVL Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a name that
characters. uniquely identifies an individual Key Variable Loader.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 243

Field Default Range Description

KVL ID N/A 1 to 9999999 (Read only for existing records) Enter a number that
uniquely identifies an individual Key Variable Loader.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Key Variable Loader – Configuration Tab

Figure 173: Key Variable Loader – Configuration Tab

Table 48: Parameters for the Key Variable Loader – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Valid Zones
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the zones that are to be included in this Key
characters Variable Loader. (Click Add Row to display a list of
options).
Note: You can select up to seven zones.

Authentication Center
The Authentication Center object displays available AUC server. It is read only.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

244 | Reference

Authentication Center – Basic Tab

Figure 174: Authentication Center – Basic Tab

Table 49: Parameters for Authentication Center – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Authentication N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Enter a name that uniquely identifies an
Center Alias characters. individual AUC Server.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Authentication N/A 1 (Read only) It is set automatically.
Center ID
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 245

Authentication Center – Configuration Tab

Figure 175: Authentication Center – Configuration Tab

Table 50: Parameters for the Authentication Center – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and information
characters about the Authentication Center resource.

Zone to Alias Server Map

Important: This object is visible when RUA/RUI license is purchased.

The Zone to Alias Server Map object maps Zones to Alias Server objects (defined in Zone Configuration Manager).
There is always only one Alias Server per Zone but it can support more Zones. At first Alias Server is created in one
particular Zone and then more Zones can be assigned to it.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

246 | Reference

Zone to Alias Server Map – Basic Tab

Figure 176: Zone to Alias Server Map – Basic Tab

Table 51: Parameters for Zone to Alias Server Map – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Alias Server Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Enter a name that uniquely identifies an
characters. individual Alias Server.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Alias Server ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only) It is set automatically and equal the Zone
ID.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 247

Zone to Alias Server Map – Configuration Tab

Figure 177: Zone to Alias Server Map – Configuration Tab

Table 52: Parameters for the Zone to Alias Server – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Zone to AS Map
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the zones that are to be included in this Alias
characters Server. Click Add Row to display a list of options).
Note: You can select up to 56 zones.

Zone ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to the specific zone.

Zone to Short Data Router Map

The Zone to Short Data Router Map object maps Zones to the Short Data Router object (defined in the Zone
Configuration Manager). There is always only one SDR per Zone but it can support more Zones. At first the Short
Data Router is created in one particular Zone and then more Zones can be assigned to it.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

248 | Reference

Zone to Short Data Router Map – Basic Tab

Figure 178: Zone to Alias Server Map – Basic Tab

Table 53: Parameters for Zone to Short Data Router Map – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
SDR Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Enter a name that uniquely identifies an
characters. individual Short Data Router.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
SDR ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only) It is set automatically and equal the Zone
ID.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 249

Zone to Short Data Router Map – Configuration Tab

Figure 179: Zone to Short Data Router Map – Configuration Tab

Table 54: Parameters for the Zone to Short Data Router – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Zone to SDR Map
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the zones that are to be included in this Short Data
characters Router. (Click Add Row to display a list of options).
Note: You can select up to 56 zones.

Zone ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to the specific zone.

Analog Conventional Configuration

TRC Command
Tone remote control is a mechanism by which the conventional channel gateway (CCGW) generates a sequence of
tones on the 4wire analog interface for the conventional channel to command the entity (such as a base station)
attached to the conventional channel to perform some function (such as, turn repeat on). A Tone Remote Control
Command object is defined by a tone sequence that consists of an unlimited number of tone segments. Level (dB),
duration (ms/infinite), and frequency (Hz) characterizes each tone segment.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

250 | Reference

TRC Command – Basic Tab

Figure 180: TRC Command – Basic Tab

Table 55: Parameters for the TRC Command – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Command ID N/A 0 - 65535 (Read only for existing records) Displays a unique number
that refers to a specific Tone Remote Control Command
defined on the system.
Command Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select from a list of command aliases already in the database
characters
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record is
characters assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 251

TRC Command – Configuration Tab

Figure 181: TRC Command – Configuration Tab

Table 56: Parameters for the TRC Command – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and information
characters about the Tone Remote Control Command resource.

TRC Segment
The Tone Remote Control (TRC) Segment is used to define a single tone. It consists of the following information:
• Type of tone, one of: High-level Guard Tone (HLGT), low-level Guard Tone (LLGT), or Function Tone (FT)
• Frequency of the tone in Hertz (Hz)
• Tone duration in milliseconds (ms)
• Tone Offset (only selectable for LLGT) in Decibel (dB)
• TRC Segment – Basic Tab on page 252
• TRC Segment – Configuration Tab on page 253

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

252 | Reference

TRC Segment – Basic Tab

Figure 182: TRC Segment – Basic Tab

Table 57: Parameters for the TRC Segment – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Tone Segment ID N/A 1 to 500 (Read only for existing records) Displays a unique
number that refers to a specific Tone Remote Control
Segment defined on the system.
Tone Segment N/A 1 to 16 Enter a unique name associated with the Tone Remote
Alias characters. Control Segment resource.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 253

TRC Segment – Configuration Tab

Figure 183: TRC Segment – Configuration Tab

Table 58: Parameters for the TRC Segment – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Tone Type FT HLGT, Enter the tone type which alerts the Conventional
LLGT, Channel Gateway (CCGW) in a given segment and uses
this parameter to set the level on the tone generator.
or FT
HLGT – High-Level Guard Tone, the first tone segment
in a tone sequence or tone command.
LLGT – Low-Level Guard Tone, the third tone segment
in a key frequency type command.
FT – Function Tone, the second tone segment in a tone
sequence or tone command

Tone Segment HLGT: HLGT: Always Enter the offset level for the tone segment. This offset
Offset Level (dB) N/A set to +6dB level is usually referenced to the HLGT level for the FT
(Read only) and the LLGT.
LLGT:
-30dB LLGT: Set
FT: from -35dB to
-10dB -10dB
FT: Always set
to -10dB (Read
only)
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

254 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Tone Segment HLGT: HLGT: 2100, Enter the frequency for the tone segment.
Frequency (Hz) 2175 2175, or 2325
LLGT: LLGT: 2100,
2175 2175 or 2325
FT: 650 FT: 450-
2050Hz in
100Hz
increments

Tone Segment HLGT: HLGT: Set Enter the duration for the tone segment.
Duration (ms) 120ms from 60 to
120ms
LLGT:
(Increments of
N/A
20ms)
FT: 40
LLGT: Always
set to 9999
(Read only)
FT: Always set
to 40ms (Read
only)

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the Tone Remote Control Segment
resource.

TRC Sequence
The Tone Remote Control (TRC) Sequence defines the tones necessary to execute a command. The tone sequence
also contains the order in which the tones are played for a command. Tone sequences consist of 1 to 4 tone segments.
Each tone segment has a tone type, frequency, level, and duration assigned to define that tone. Generally a tone
sequence consists of a high guard tone, and the function tone. When it is a single tone command, sometimes there is a
third tone assigned for a low guard tone to be executed at the end of the command. If it is a dual function tone
command, the fourth tone executed is LLGT (Low-Level Guard Tone).

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 255

TRC Sequence – Basic Tab

Figure 184: TRC Sequence – Basic Tab

Table 59: Parameters for the TRC Sequence – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Tone Sequence ID N/A 1 to 500 (Read only for existing records) Displays a unique
number that refers to a specific Tone Remote Control
Sequence defined on the system.
Tone Sequence N/A 1 to 16 Enter a unique name associated with the Tone Remote
Alias characters. Control Sequence resource.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

256 | Reference

TRC Sequence – Configuration Tab

Figure 185: TRC Sequence – Configuration Tab

Table 60: Parameters for the TRC Sequence – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Tone Segment N/A 1 to 4 (Read-only) Displays what order the tone segments are
Order issued.
Tone Segment N/A 1 to 16 Select from a list of tone segment aliases already in the
Alias characters database or enter a unique name associated with the Tone
Remote Control Sequence.
Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the Tone Remote Control Sequence
resource.

TRC Table
The Tone Remote Control (TRC) Table Object is used to define tone sequences used for each station control
command. The system ships with a set of preconfigured TRC Tables which cannot be modified. The TRC Table maps
the station command alias to the tone sequence used by the CCGW to execute that command on a channel.
Important: It is important to ensure that the correct TRC Table is associated with the right channel. This is
not enforced by Network Manager.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 257

TRC Table – Basic Tab

Figure 186: TRC Table – Basic Tab

Table 61: Parameters for the TRC Table – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Table ID N/A 1 to 64 (Read only for existing records) Displays a unique
number that refers to a specific Tone Remote Control
Table defined on the system.
Table Alias N/A 1 to 16 Enter a unique name associated with the Tone Remote
characters. Control Table resource.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

258 | Reference

TRC Table – Configuration Tab

Figure 187: TRC Table – Configuration Tab

Table 62: Parameters for the TRC Table – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Command Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Displays a list of command aliases already in
characters. the database.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Tone Sequence N/A 1 to 16 Select from a list of tone sequence aliases already in the
Alias characters. database or enter a unique name associated with the Tone
Cannot use: | @ Remote Control Table.
_"%$?/\
Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the Tone Remote Control Table
resource.

Consoles Reference
All parameters within the Consoles object class apply to the MCC 7500 console solely.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 259

Control Room Head Number

Note: Purchase CRHN feature license to have this object enabled.

Control Room Head Number – Basic Tab

Figure 188: CRHN – Basic Tab

Table 63: Parameters for the CRHN – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifiers
Control Room N/A 1 to 16 Enter unique name within the space of Alias names for
Head Number characters. Radios and Static Console Users.
Alias Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Control Room N/A 1 to 13999999 Enter an ISSI number, unique within the space of ISSI
Head Number ID numbers for Radios, Console Users, Talk Groups, Multi
Groups, and Control Room Head Numbers
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

260 | Reference

Control Room Head Number – Configuration Tab

Figure 189: CRHN – Configuration Tab

Table 64: Parameters for the CRHN – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Control Room ICCS ICCS, Vortex Select ICCS system or Vortex console depending on
Type configuration.
Note: Once the Control Room type is selected,
the parameters for CRHN are automatically
configured with values recommended for this
type of control room. The parameters can still
be changed as needed.

Individual Calls No Yes or No • Yes allows for individual calls to be made to a console
Allowed directly even if it is linked to the CRHN.
• No does not allow for individual calls to be made
directly to a console linked with a CRHN.

Head Number as Yes Yes or No • Yes configures CRHN to present the Head Number as
Source source ID of calls originating from consoles associated
with the Head Number.
Note: If Head Number as Source is set to
Yes both the Head Number and the ISSI of
the console initiating the call will be present
in the ATIA stream.
• No does not set the Head Number as source ID of calls
originating from consoles associated with the Head
Number.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 261

Field Default Range Description

Schedule Order Lowest Lowest ISSI This parameter indicates the strategy followed for selecting
ISSI First, Round a console when there is a call request to a Head Number.
First Robin
• Lowest ISSI First the search for a free console is
started from the lowest ISSI value at each incoming
call.
• Round Robin the search for a free console continues
from where the last call was taken. When the end of the
list is reached, it continues from the beginning.

Max Retries 3 1 to 5 The ICCS may choose to redirect an incoming call to

another Console Node if the ICCS consider the chosen
Console Node occupied. This parameter defines the
maximal times such redirections may be repeated for a
single incoming call until the Zone Controller will consider
the resources occupied and reject the incoming call.
Capability Profile CONSO 1 to 16 Enter a unique name for a Console User Capabilities
Alias LE$ characters. Profile Alias. This is the Console User Capabilities Profile
DEF Cannot use: | with which this Console User is associated. The Console
@_"%$?/\ User Capabilities Profile defines the set of features
available to this console user.
Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the Control Room Head Number
resource.

Control Room Head Number – Console User Member List Tab

Figure 190: CRHN – Console User Member List Tab

Table 65: Parameters for the CRHN – Console User Member List Tab

Field Default Range Description

Console User Member List
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

262 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Console N/A 1 to 13999999 (Selecting from existing records, i.e. no need to create a
Application Unit new console record) The number of records to be added
ID is controlled by the purchased license.
Console User N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Alias name for particular Console
Alias characters Application Unit ID.

Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile

A Console Talkgroup/Multigroup (TG/MG) Capabilities Profile is available for setting TG/MG resource capabilities.
These profiles allow or limit the accessibility of these resources to specific console features.
The TG/MG Capabilities Profile object is created with the default TEMPLATE record.
For more information, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.

Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Figure 191: Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Table 66: Parameters for the Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Console Resource N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
Capabilities that refers to a specific Console TG/MG Capabilities
Profile ID Profile defined on the system. The Console Resource
Capabilities Profile ID must be unique among all
Console Resource Capabilities Profiles, where a Console
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 263

Field Default Range Description

TG/MG Capabilities Profile is considered a Console
Resource Capabilities Profile.
Alias N/A 1 to 16 Enter a unique name associated with the Console
characters. Talkgroup/Multigroup (TG/MG) Resource Capabilities
Cannot use: | @ Profile. The Alias must be unique among all Console
_"%$?/\ Resource Capabilities Profiles, where a Console TG/MG
Capabilities Profile is considered a Console Resource
Capabilities Profile.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 192: Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

264 | Reference

Table 67: Parameters for the Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Critical Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to select the criticality setting of a
Resource Select No resource in the system. This means if the system performance is
low, audio logging is still maintained on resources selected as
critical.
No disables the console user from selecting the criticality
setting of a resource in the system.

Emergency Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to acknowledge an emergency
Acknowledge No activity. Acknowledging the emergency turns off the alarm
tones and informs the other console users that an emergency
activity is currently being addressed by a console user.
No disables the console user from acknowledging an emergency
activity.
Note: If set to No, Emergency Alarm, Emergency
Setup, andInbound Emergency parameters are
automatically disabled.

Emergency Yes Yes or Yes enables the console users Emergency Alarm indications.
Alarm No
No disables the console users Emergency Alarm indications.

Emergency No Yes or Yes enables the console user to initiate an emergency call.
Setup No
No disables the console user from initiating an emergency call.

End Emergency Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to end any emergency activity that
No has been acknowledged.
No disables the console user from ending any emergency
activity that has been acknowledged.

Inbound Call Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to be informed when there is an
No incoming call.
No disables the console user from being informed when there is
an incoming call.

Inbound Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to be informed when there is an
Emergency No incoming emergency call.
No disables the console user from being informed when there is
an incoming emergency call.
Note: Is only disabled if the Emergency
Alarmparameter is set to No as well.

Inbound PTT Yes Yes or Yes enables the display of the Inbound Push-to-Talk ID
No associated with an incoming call.
No disables the display of the Inbound Push-to-Talk ID
associated with an incoming call.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 265

Field Default Range Description

Instant Transmit Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to initiate a transmission on the
No resource.
No disables the console user from initiating a transmission on
the resource.

Logging Group Yes Yes or Yes specifies that the Logging Client is informed when a radio
Call No group call is received.
No specifies that the Logging Client is not informed when a
radio group call is received.

Patch Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to add a resource to a patch group.
No
No disables the console user from adding a resource to a patch
group.
Note: If a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile is
already assigned to a multigroup, the Patch field
cannot be set to Yes. Also, if the Patch field of a
Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile is set to Yes, it
cannot be assigned to a multigroup.

Priority Select No Yes or Yes specifies that the console user can select the relative system
No access priority of the resource in the communication system.
No specifies that the console user cannot select the relative
system access priority of the resource in the communication
system.

Repeater On No Yes or Yes specifies that the console user can enable and disable the
No repeat functionality for a resource.
No specifies that the console user cannot enable and disable the
repeat functionality for a resource.

Single Select Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to select a single resource for
No monitoring and other console operations like Multi Select
(MSEL).
No disables the console user from selecting a single resource for
monitoring and other console operations like MSEL.

Volume Control Yes Yes or Yes enables the console user to control the volume level of
No individual resources.
No disables the console user from controlling the volume level
of individual resources.

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and information
characte about the console TG/MG capabilities profile.
rs

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

266 | Reference

Console User Capabilities Profile

A Console User Capabilities Profile allows or limits the MCC 7500 console features accessible by an MCC 7500
console user. This record consists of three tabs, Basic, Configuration, and Private Call.
The Console User Capabilities Profile object is created with the default CONSOLE$DEF record.
For more information, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.

Console User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Figure 193: Console User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Table 68: Parameters for the Console User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Console User N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
Capabilities that refers to a specific Console User Capabilities Profile
Profile ID defined on the system. The Console User Capabilities
Profile ID must be unique among all Console User
Capabilities Profiles and Radio User Capabilities
Profiles.
Console User N/A 1 to 16 Enter a name that is unique among all Console User
Capabilities characters. Capabilities Profiles and Radio User Capabilities
Profile Alias Cannot use: | @ Profiles.
_"%$?/\
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 267

Console User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 194: Console User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Table 69: Parameters for the Console User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Route Tones to No Yes or No Controls whether the MCC 7500 console user can hear
Headset tones in the headset or through the desktop speaker.
Yes allows the console user to hear tones in the headset.
No allows the console user to hear tones from the
desktop speaker.

Talk Prohibit No Yes or No Yes allows the console user to hear the Talk Prohibit
Tone Enabled tone.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

268 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

No does not allow the console user to hear the Talk

Prohibit tone.

Sidetone Enabled No Yes or No Yes allows the console user to hear the sidetone.
No does not allow the console user to hear the sidetone.

Patch Idle Delay 30 1 to 255 Enter a unique number that defines the number of
(sec) seconds of audio inactivity, within a patch group,
required to trigger the patch idle indication.
Number of Patch 0 0 to 16 Allows a console user to set up a communication path
Groups between two or more radio groups that are normally
unable to communicate with each other.
Number of Multi- 0 0 to 3 Allows a console user to place multiple channel resources
Select Groups into one logical group. A console user can
simultaneously transmit to all resources in a Multi Select
(MSEL) group via the All Points Bulletin (APB) feature,
the General Transmit feature, or by using the footswitch.
Number of APB 0 0 to 3 Specifies the number of APB Transmits. Each APB
Transmit allows a console user to initiate a transmission on all
resources contained within a particular MSEL group.
Monitor On Yes Yes or No Yes allows the console user to use the monitor capability.
No does not allow the console user to use the monitor
capability.

Private Call No Yes or No • Yes allows the console user to initiate private calls
Preempt Enabled that preempt lower priority calls.
• No disables this capability.

Called User Pre- Disable SwMI Invoked, Select the invocation mode for Called User Pre-emption.
emption d User Invoked or
• SwMI Invoked allows all individual calls initiated by
Disabled
the console user to preempt the called user.
• User Invoked allows only individual calls initiated by
authorized console users (configured in the radio) to
preempt the called user.
• Disabled means that all individual calls initiated by
the console user never preempt the called user.
Note: You can only set this parameter if
Private Call Preempt Enabled right above is
set to Yes.

Alert Tone Talk- 1.2 0 to 7 Allows a console user to set up the amount of time – after
Extend Time (sec) generating the alert tone – that all the resources remain
keyed. It allows the console user to transmit a voice
message on the selected channels.
Barring Parameters
BIC Profile Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a BIC Profile Alias. BIC Profile defines which
characters talkgroups the Console User is allowed (marked as
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 269

Field Default Range Description

granting) or is not allowed (marked as barring) to attach
to. It defines also which SSI numbers the Console User is
allowed (mark as granting) or is not allowed (marked as
barring) to receive calls from. This parameter is optional
and as default no profile is associated. See Barring
Profile on page 333 for more information on defining
the barred numbers.
BOC Profile Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a BOC Profile Alias. BOC Profile defines which
characters talkgroups the Console User is allowed (marked as
granting) or is not allowed (marked as barring) to PTT
(push-to-talk) on. It defines also which SSI numbers the
Console User is allowed (mark as granting) or is not
allowed (marked as barring) to call. This parameter is
optional and as default no profile is associated. See
Barring Profile on page 333 for more information on
defining the barred numbers.
All Mute Parameters
All Mute Yes Yes or No Yes allows the console user to use the all mute capability.
Capability
Enabled No does not allow the console user to use the all mute
capability.

All Mute Timeout 30 1 to 255 Enter a unique number that defines the number of
(sec) seconds that the audio is muted for the duration of the
timeout.
All Mute Level 42 0 to 42 Enter a unique number that defines the level of the muted
(dB) audio.
Alert Tone
Alert Tone ID N/A 1 to 3 Select the Alert Tone ID that identifies a predefined alert
tone to assign it to a Console User Capability Profile.
(Click Add Row to display a list of options).

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

270 | Reference

Console User Capabilities Profile – Private Call Tab

Figure 195: Console User Capabilities Profile – Private Call Tab

Table 70: Parameters for the Console User Capabilities Profile – Private Call Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Audio Destination Yes Yes or No Yes enables the console user to configure audio
destinations.
No disables the console user from configuring audio
destinations.

Critical Resource Yes Yes or No Not applicable to the current system.

Select
Show Inbound Yes Yes or No Yes enables the console user to be informed when there
Call Indicator is an incoming call.
No disables the console user from being informed when
there is an incoming call.

Inbound PTT Yes Yes or No Yes enables the display of the Inbound Push-to-Talk ID
associated with an incoming call.
No disables the display of the Inbound Push-to-Talk ID
associated with an incoming call.

Instant Transmit Yes Yes or No Yes enables the console user to initiate a transmission on
the resource.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 271

Field Default Range Description

No disables the console user from initiating a

transmission on the resource.

Patch Private Call Yes Yes or No Yes enables the console user to add a resource to a patch
group.
No disables the console user from adding a resource to a
patch group.
If a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile is already
assigned to a multigroup, the Patch field cannot be set to
Yes. Also, if the Patch field of a Console TG/MG
Capabilities Profile is set to Yes, it cannot be assigned to
a multigroup.

Single Select Yes Yes or No Yes enables the console user to select a single resource
for monitoring and other console operations.
No disables the console user from selecting a single
resource for monitoring and other console operations.

Volume Control Yes Yes or No Yes enables the console user to control the volume level
of individual resources.
No disables the console user from controlling the volume
level of individual resources.

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the console user capabilities profile.

Console Private Call Resource

The Console Private Call Resource is a resource that a Console Dispatcher uses to send and receive Private Calls.

Console Private Call Resource – Basic Tab

Figure 196: Console Private Call Resource – Basic Tab

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

272 | Reference

Table 71: Parameters for the Console Private Call Resource – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Console Private N/A 1 to 7000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
Call Resource ID that refers to a specific Console Private Call Resource on
the system.
Console Private N/A 1 to 16 Enter a unique name associated with the Console Private
Call Resource characters. Call Resource.
Alias Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Console Private Call Resource – Configuration Tab

Figure 197: Console Private Call Resource – Configuration Tab

Table 72: Parameters for the Console Private Call Resource – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the console private call resource.

Alert Tone
The Alert Tone feature allows a console operator to transmit an audible tone to all currently selected resources. Three
distinct tones can be transmitted:
• Continuous (Alert Tone ID 1)
• Pulsed (Alert Tone ID 2)
• Alternating (Alert Tone ID 3)
Note: The Alert Tone feature is supported only on the Dispatch Communications Server (DCS). See the
Zone Configuration Manager manual for more information on the DCS.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 273

Alert Tone – Basic Tab

Figure 198: Alert Tone – Basic Tab

Table 73: Parameters for the Alert Tone – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier
Alert Tone ID N/A 1 to 3 (Read-only) Displays the Alert Tone ID.
Security Group
Security Group SYSTE 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
M characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Note: Three predefined alert tone records are available in the User Configuration Manager (UCM). You
cannot define new ones.

Alert Tone – Configuration Tab

Figure 199: Alert Tone – Configuration Tab

Table 74: Parameters for the Alert Tone – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Alert Tone Parameters
Tone Length (sec) 6 1 to 10 Select the Alert Tone ID Tone Length.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

274 | Reference

Alert Tone – Notes Tab

Figure 200: Alert Tone – Notes Tab

Table 75: Parameters for the Alert Tone – Notes Tab

Field Default Range Description

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the Alert Tone.

Subscribers Reference
This part discusses the tabs for each object in the Subscribers object class of the User Configuration Manager (UCM)
window.

Using Default Records and Profiles

The UCM contains both default records and profile objects that serve as shortcuts that allow you to quickly create
new records.

Using Default Records

Default records allow you to do the following:
• Modify the default records to quickly create new records.
• Define privileges during system initialization.
• Define privilege for default access to the system.
The default records specify fields that you can use as defaults to create new records.

List of Objects with Default Records

The following table shows the list of objects with their default [Link] following figure shows an example of
default records for an object.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 275

Table 76: List of Objects with Default Records

Object Default Records

Radio User Capabilities Profile SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, TEMPLATE, CONSOLE$DEF, SZ
$RUI-MIN
Radio User Valid Sites Profile SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, TEMPLATE, SZ$RUI-MIN
Radio User Interconnect Profile SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, TEMPLATE, SZ$RUI-MIN
TG/MG Capabilities Profile SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, TEMPLATE
TG/MG Valid Sites Profile SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, TEMPLATE
Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile TEMPLATE
Console User Capabilities Profile CONSOLE$DEF
Radio SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, SZ$RUI-MIN
Radio User SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, SZ$RUI-MIN
Talkgroup SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF
Status Set STATUS-SET-1

Figure 201: Default Record Example

Defining Default Records

The following table describes the default records used by the UCM.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

276 | Reference

Table 77: Default Records

Default Record Description

SZ$INIT The SZ$INIT record appears as a default record for these objects: radio, radio
user, talkgroup, and all profiles. SZ$INIT defines privileges and default
information for users and is the default record or profile for a new user or
talkgroup whose information is not available at the zone controller during
affiliation. During this time, the zone controller has no subscriber database and
is receiving downloaded configuration data. The zone controller uses this record
as the template for any radio, radio user, or talkgroup that affiliates during
initialization (assuming default access is allowed). SZ$INIT is also used during
zone isolation (standalone mode). The standalone database that is exported to
the zone controller has the SZ$INIT record. The SZ$INIT Radio User and
Talkgroup records must only reference the SZ$INIT profile records as these are
the only records the zone controller has during initialization. Changes made to
the SZ$INIT record are not sent to zone controller at any time other than during
initialization.
Note: Do not use or assign the SZ$INIT profiles to create new
records.

SZ$DEF The SZ$DEF record appears as a default record for these objects: radio, radio
user, talkgroup, and all profiles. SZ$DEF is used as a default record that the
zone controller uses, after the subscriber database has been loaded. The record
defines guest privileges and default information for all radios, users, and
talkgroups attempting to access the system when no record is available and
default access is enabled. This situation could happen for radios, added while
the link to the master site is down, that try to register or affiliate before their
data is downloaded to the Zone Database Server (ZDS). New radios or
talkgroups created by the zone controller are a clone of the SZ$DEF record.
This includes the profile settings of this record as well. Changes made to SZ
$DEF records are always sent to the zone controller (once the subscriber
database is loaded). Once the zone controller receives user-entered records or
profiles, those records are used by the zone controller instead of the SZ$DEF
records.
Note: Do not use or assign the SZ$DEF profiles to create new
records.

SZ$RUI-MIN The SZ$RUI-MIN record appears as a default record for these objects: Radio,
Radio User, Radio User Capabilities Profile, Radio User Valid Sites Profile,
Radio User Interconnect Profile. SZ$RUI-MIN defines the rights of radio users
that have not logged on (the Minimum Access Profile). A feature is then only
available if it is set to YES in both the Minimum Access Profile and in the
object (record) for the specific radio. It is used only when the RUA/RUI license
is present, the RUI Access Control is set to ON or AUTOMATIC ON (i.e. not
OFF) and the Logon Required field is set to YES in the Radio User –
Configuration Tab. The Minimum Access Profile is defined per system and
controls the following features for not logged on radio users:
• Perform emergency calls (Dispatch Emergency Enabled parameter for SZ
$RUI-MIN Radio User Capabilities Profile record). Default value: Yes.
• Perform talkgroup calls (Dispatch Enabled parameter for SZ$RUI-MIN
Radio User Capabilities Profile record). Default value: No.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 277

Default Record Description

• Perform group-scanning (attach and listen to all scanned talkgroups) -

Group Scanning Enabled parameter for SZ$RUI-MIN Radio User
Capabilities Profile record. Default value: No.

Note: The typical use of the above mentioned features is as follow:

• All allowed Perform emergency calls Enabled; Perform
talkgroup calls Enabled; Perform group-scanning Enabled.
• Disable scan groups Perform emergency calls Enabled; Perform
talkgroup calls Enabled; Perform group-scanning Disabled. The
user may still switch and talk to/listen to another talkgroup.
• Allow only emergency calls Perform emergency calls Enabled;
Perform talkgroup calls Disabled; Perform group-scanning
Disabled. It is still possible to listen to the talkgroup which the
emergency call belongs to.
• Nothing allowed Perform emergency calls Disabled; Perform
talkgroup calls Disabled; Perform group-scanning Disabled.
• Perform private calls Private Call (PC) Enabled parameter for SZ$RUI-MIN
Radio User Capabilities Profile record). Default value: Yes.
• Perform data transfer (Packet Data Enabled parameter for SZ$RUI-MIN
Radio User record). Default value: No.
• Initiate and receive interconnect calls (Interconnect Enabled parameter for
SZ$RUI-MIN Radio User record). Default value: No.
• Perform outbound and inbound interconnect calls through a PABX gateway
(PABX Access parameter for SZ$RUI-MIN Radio User record). Default
value: No.
• Perform outbound and inbound interconnect calls through a PSTN gateway
(PSTN Access parameter for SZ$RUI-MIN Radio User record). Default
value: No.
• Initiate and receive full duplex private calls (Full Duplex Enabled parameter
for SZ$RUI-MIN Radio User record). Default value: Yes.
Note: The Full Duplex Enabled default value for SZ$RUI-MIN
record is Yes (different from the radio user configuration). This
is due to the fact that the Minimum Access Profile is only used to
reduce the radio user record values, and a full-duplex behaviour
should not be prevented.
• Send Short Data Messages using the Store and Forward service. Default
value: Yes.

The remaining parameters are not adjustable as they are not relevant for the SZ
$RUI-MIN records. After a successful logon to a radio, a radio user will have
access according to the profile defined for the radio, replaced by the dynamic
profile (if any) defined for the RUA/RUI user.
Note: Do not use or assign the SZ$RUI-MIN profile to create new
records.

TEMPLATE This record appears for each profile record. You can modify the record or use it
as a template to create new profile records. TEMPLATE is assigned to the SZ
$DEF Radio User and Talkgroup records as the initial profile settings because
the SZ$INIT or SZ$DEF profiles cannot be used.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

278 | Reference

Default Record Description

CONSOLE$DEF The CONSOLE$DEF record appears as a default record for console user
capabilities profile. CONSOLE$DEF defines privileges and default information
for users and is the default record for a new console user capabilities profile
whose information is not available at the zone controller during initialization.
STATUS-SET-1 This record is the default for the Status Set object. It is used by the SZ$INIT,
SZ$DEF, and TEMPLATE records. You can use this record as a template to
create new records.

Using Profile Objects

Like default records, profiles are also shortcuts that you use when creating new records. The Profile objects allow you
to map a group of common attributes to a set of radios, radio users, console user, and talkgroups at one time instead of
having to enter the attributes into each record. See Using Default Records on page 274 for the default records for
profile objects.
Profiles act as a way to configure a set of templates that can then be assigned to multiple records. They are useful
because classes of users in the system can share a common configuration.

Master List of Attributes and Capabilities

A profile is a master list of common attributes or capabilities used by radio users, console users, talkgroups, and
multigroups. Creating a profile allows you to enter the information one time and reference the profile from an
individual record. You do not have to enter the information separately into each record. You can create a different
profile for each type of function and group of users in your system, up to a maximum of 2000 profiles.
Using a profile helps to ensure accuracy of the data. It also reduces the amount of data that has to flow through the
network between the UCM and the zone controller.
Profile information includes data that relates to radios, radio users, console users, and talkgroups who perform the
same function. For example, all radio users associated with the Fire Department require the same capabilities, so you
can use a profile to create a master file for their records.
A record can have a one-to-one relationship with a profile, or many records can be mapped to the same profile.

Mapping between Objects and Profiles

When you configure a talkgroup, multigroup, or radio user record, you must assign profiles to each record. The
following figure shows the association of Subscriber objects to their corresponding profiles.

Figure 202: Subscriber Objects Mapped to Profiles

Home Zone Mapping

Important: Home Zone Mappings are critical to system operation. Plan and configure them with extreme
care.

The Home Zone Mapping object configures attributes related to talkgroups, multigroups, and individual radio users
for a specific zone. Each radio user and talkgroup ID is assigned to a zone based upon ID ranges configured in the
Home Zone Mapping object. The zone assigned to a particular ID is said to be that IDs home zone.
After configuring objects in the UCM, the configuration information is replicated from the User Configuration Server
(UCS) to the Zone Database Server (ZDS) in each zone along with a file that maps individual and group IDs to their
home zone.
Important: System engineers create the Home Zone Mapping record when configuring the system
initially. Subsequent users can open and modify the existing record as well as adding new Home Zone
Mapping records. Considering the ramifications when changing the initial configuration is important.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 279

Important: Home Zone Mappings must be identical in all clusters.

Important:
A change in Home Zone Mapping takes place in several steps to ensure that all information is available to
the ZC and PDG immediately after a Home Zone Mapping change. However, it means that the ZC and
PDG for a short period hold all the subscribers that have home in the zone both before and after the
remapping. This total number must not exceed the 64,000 subscriber limit. As an example, if 1,000
subscribers moves out of a zone but 1,000 subscribers moves into the zone, the total number of subscribers
in the ZC and PDG will temporarily increase by 1,000 during a remapping. The remapping can thus only
take place if the initial total number of subscribers are less than 63,000.
The same refers to talkgroups. This total number must not exceed the 16,000 talkgroups limit. For example,
if 200 talkgroups moves out of a zone but 200 talkgroups moves into the zone, the total number of
subscribers in the ZC will temporarily increase by 200 during a remapping. The remapping can thus only
take place if the initial total number of talkgroups are less than 15,800.
In case of losing any subscriber/talkgroup records, after remapping it is necessary to perform the download
of SAC. For details on how to perform this, see the Backup and Restore Including FRU/FRE manual.

Impact of Home Zones

The home zone to which the ID is assigned has the following impact on how the system operates:
• Configuration information is distributed throughout the system based on the home zone assignment of the IDs. A
zone stores the configuration information only for those individual and group IDs that are home to that zone. This
information is stored in the Home Location Register (HLR) for that zone.
• For group call services, the home zone of the group is always the controlling zone for the call, regardless of the
zone to which the group member is currently registered.

Impact on InterZone Trunking

Caution: Be careful when changing home zone maps to avoid loss of interzone trunking.

You may experience adverse system impacts when changing home zone maps, such as a loss of interzone trunking.
Until the group or individual maps have completed downloading, the following situations occur:
• A change in group mapping causes the system to drop out of interzone trunking.
• A change in the individual maps results in using default records.
If the system is set for no default access, radios get rejected until the maps have finished downloading.

Versionized Home Zone Mappings in Multicluster Systems

The home zone mapping must be identical in all clusters. A version number (actually a time stamp) identifies each
home zone map. That allows the zone controllers to check that they have identical versions of the home zone maps. If
not, interzone trunking mode will only happen within the local cluster, and not between zones in other clusters.
You assign a time stamp to a map when you submit it to the UCS. It is your responsibility as operator to make sure
that the same map version is selected for all clusters when you activate a new map.
The system provides you with a Home Zone Map Processing Status window (Home Zone Map Processing Status
Window Elements on page 76), displaying information related to the map download progress for each PDG and ZC
(subscriber agents) in the system.

Tabs in the Home Zone Mapping Configuration Window

The following table shows the tabs in the Home Zone Mapping Configuration window:

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

280 | Reference

Table 78: Tabs in the Home Zone Mapping Configuration Window

Tab Description
Basic Configures and submits maps and security group.
Individual Maps Configures the individual radio user to home zone mapping.
Group Maps Configures the talkgroup and multigroup to home zone mapping.
Short Subscriber Identity Configures SSIs to home zone mapping
Mappings

Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab

Figure 203: Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab

Table 79: Parameters for the Home Zone Mapping – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Map ID N/A 1 to 32 (Read only for existing records) Enter a number that
uniquely identifies the map.
Note: You cannot edit the map currently
being used by the system. Instead, you
submit a different map and then edit the
previous map.

Map Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique name
characters. that identifies the map.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 281

Field Default Range Description

Note: You cannot edit the map currently

being used by the system. Instead, you
submit a different map and then edit the
previous map.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.
Map Submission
Press here to N/A N/A Press this button to begin the map submission process
submit map which activates the map. Before submitting the map,
you have to exit the UCM application and then reenter.
Map Procedure Automa Automatic, Stop • Automatic submitting of HZM is without operators
Type tic Before Map interference.
Download • Stop Before Map Download after download of the
radio user and TG/MG onto ZC, in each cluster the
process of sending the map has to be done by
clicking on the button.

Map Synchronization
Synchronize Yes Yes or No • Yes Individual Maps will be copied to Short
Individual to SSI Subscriber Mappings. The user is not allowed to
Map enter Short Subscriber Identity Mappings
• No Individual Maps and Short Subscriber Mappings
are handled independently. The user must enter data
for both.

Synchronize No Yes or No • Yes Individual Maps will be copied to Group Maps.

Individual to The user is not allowed to enter Group Maps.
Group Map • No Individual Maps and Group Maps are handled
independently. The user must enter data for both.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

282 | Reference

Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab

Figure 204: Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab

Table 80: Parameters for the Home Zone Mapping – Individual Maps Tab

Field Default Range Description

Radio to Home Zone Mappings
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the Zone Alias that identifies a Home Zone for
characters the range of IDs specified in the row. (Click Add Row
to display a list of options).
Note: You can enter up to 2048 home zone
mapping ranges into the system.

Radio ID N/A 0 to 16777215 Enter the first ID in the block of Radio IDs mapped to
Mapping Start the specified zone. You must use the full range of
contiguous numbers for the ID maps. For example, if
you use 0 to 100 for the first block, the next block must
start with 101.
Important: All Radio ID mappings must be
set accurately because they are critical to
the systems operation. Although only the
range 1 to 13999999 can be used as real
radio IDs, the home zone mapping must
include the full ISSI range according to the
TETRA standard.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 283

Field Default Range Description

Radio ID N/A 0 to 16777215 Enter the last ID in the block of Radio IDs mapped to
Mapping End the specified zone. You must use the full range of
contiguous numbers for the ID maps. For example, if
you use 0 to 100 for the first block, the next block must
start with 101. The final ID will have to be 16777215.
Important: All Radio ID mappings must be
set accurately because they are critical to
the systems operation. Although only the
range 1 to 13999999 can be used as real
radio IDs, the home zone mapping must
include the full ISSI range according to the
TETRA standard.

Home Zone Mapping – Group Maps Tab

Figure 205: Home Zone Mapping Group Maps Tab

Table 81: Parameters for the Home Zone Mapping – Group Maps Tab

Field Default Range Description

Group Maps
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the Zone Alias that identifies a zone as the Home
characters Zone for the range specified in that row. (Click Add
Row to display a list of options).
Note: You can enter up to 2048 home zone
mapping ranges into the system.

TG/MG ID N/A 0 to 16777215 Enter the first ID in the block of talkgroup and
Mapping Start multigroup IDs that are mapped to the specified zone.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

284 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

You must use the full range of contiguous numbers for
the ID maps. For example, if you use 0 to 100 for the
first block, the next block must start with 101.
Important: All talkgroup and multigroup ID
mappings must be set accurately because
they are critical to the systems operation.

TG/MG ID N/A 0 to 16777215 Enter the last ID in the block of talkgroup and
Mapping End multigroup IDs that are mapped to the specified zone.
You must use the full range of contiguous numbers for
the ID maps. For example, if you use 0 to 100 for the
first block, the next block must start with 101. The final
ID will have to be 16777215.
Important: All talkgroup and multigroup ID
mappings must be set accurately because
they are critical to the systems operation.

Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab

Figure 206: Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 285

Table 82: Parameters for the Home Zone Mapping – Short Subscriber Identity Mappings Tab

Field Default Range Description

Short Subscriber Identity Mappings
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the Zone Alias that identifies a zone as the Home
characters Zone for the range specified in that row. (Click Add
Row to display a list of options).
Note: You can enter up to 2048 home zone
mapping ranges into the system.

SSI ID Mapping N/A 0 to 16777215 Enter the first ID in the block of ISSI or GSSI IDs that
Start are mapped to the specified zone. You must use the full
range of contiguous numbers for the ID maps. For
example, if you use 0 to 100 for the first block, the next
block must start with 101.
SSI ID Mapping N/A 0 to 16777215 Enter the last ID in the block of ISSI or GSSI IDs that
End are mapped to the specified zone. You must use the full
range of contiguous numbers for the ID maps. For
example, if you use 0 to 100 for the first block, the next
block must start with 101. The final ID will have to be
16777215.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

286 | Reference

IHLR Occupancy Window

Figure 207: IHLR Occupancy Window

Note: The following parameters are read only and contain values that reflect the HLR occupancy state for
Radio Users only in regards of the last submitted map.

Note: IHLR Occupancy involves only the ISSIs for Radio Users. ISSIs assigned to Console Users and
Control Room Head Numbers are not included.

Table 83: Parameters for the IHLR Occupancy Window

Field Description
Summary
Cluster ID Defines a number that uniquely identifies a local cluster
Date/Time Defines the date and time of the last created report.
Map Alias Defines unique name that identifies the last submitted map.
Map ID Defines the number of a last submitted map.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 287

Field Description
Unique ISSIs Defines the number of provisioned unique ISSIs.
Provisioned
External ISSI Defines the number of external ISSIs.
Total Number of ISSIs Defines the total number of both provisioned unique and external ISSIs.
Provisioned
Provisioned Unique ISSIs
Zone ID Defines the number that refers to a specific zone.
Number of ISSIs Defines the number of ISSIs in a given zone.

GHRL Occupancy Window

Figure 208: GHLR Occupancy Window

Note: The following parameters are read only and contain values that reflect the HLR occupancy state for
Talkgroups and Multigroups only in regards of the last submitted map.

Table 84: Parameters for the GHLR Occupancy Window

Field Description
Summary
Cluster ID Defines a number that uniquely identifies a local cluster
Date/Time Defines the date and time of the last created report.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

288 | Reference

Field Description
Map Alias Defines unique name that identifies the last submitted map.
Map ID Defines the number of a last submitted map.
Unique Talkgroups Defines the number of provisioned unique talkgroups and multigroups.
Provisioned
External Talkgroups Defines the number of external unique talkgroups and multigroups.
Total Number of Defines the total number of both provisioned unique and external talkgroups
Talkgroups Provisioned and multigroups.
Provisioned Unique Talkgroups
Zone ID Defines a number that refers to the specific zone.
Number of Talkgroups Defines a number of talkgroups and multigroups in a given zone.

Radio
The Radio object contains attributes related to the physical radio unit, such as its unique identity and serial number.
Note: The Radio object has three default records, SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF and SZ$RUI-MIN. For more
information about default records, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.

Radio to Radio User Relationship

You associate a radio to a specific user by entering the radios serial number in the radio users record. This
relationship between a radio and a radio user allows you to change which radio a user may be attached to at any
particular time. However, at any time, each radio can only have one radio user assigned to it.
Note: For more information about the radio user record, see Radio User on page 289.

Radio Configuration Window

Figure 209: Radio Configuration Window

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 289

Table 85: Parameters for the Radio Configuration Window

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Radio Serial N/A 1 to 15 (Read only for existing records) Enter the unique serial
Number characters. number of a specific radio on the system. The unique
Cannot use: | @ serial number is part of the radios programming. A
_"?%$ radio user is linked to a radio when the serial number of
the radio is entered into the radio users record.
Radio ID N/A 1 to 13999999 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
that refers to a specific radio on the system. Radios need
a unique ID in order to communicate with other radios
in the system.
Important:
You can enter up to 128,000 IDs in each
cluster, but no more than 64,000 can be
home in any one zone. They may be
anywhere in the range from 1 to 13999999.
The same pool of IDs is also used for
allocating ID numbers to console users,
talkgroups and multigroups, and the same
value cannot be assigned to both a group and
an individual.

Radio Reference N/A 1 to 21 Enter the unique reference of the radio used for
ID characters. Authentication or Encryption purposes. The Radio
Cannot use: | @ Reference ID may be a Tetra Equipment Identifier
_"?%$ (TEI), or a SIM ID in cases where the radio uses SIM
cards. TEI: T followed by 15 hexadecimal digits (09
and A-F). SIM: S followed by 20 hexadecimal digits
(09 and A-F).
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Radio User
The Radio User object contains records that identify specific users on the system and their capabilities. A radio user
record includes specific priority levels and access rights for interconnect. Configuring a radio user requires knowing
how they access the system and what capabilities they require for this access.
Note: The Radio User object has three default records, SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, and SZ$RUI-MIN. For more
information about default records, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.

Radio user records rely on the replication of data between the User Configuration Server (UCS) and the Zone
Database Server (ZDS). For example, if a site is added to a specific zone in the Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM),
it cannot be configured as a valid site in the radio user record until the information has been replicated to the UCS. If
that site is deleted from the zone, the ZCM user continues to specify it as a valid site for a radio user until the UCS is
notified of the deletion.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

290 | Reference

Radio User to Radio Relationship

A radio user can be tied to a specific radio. You associate the user with a radio by entering the radios serial number or
ID into the radio users record. This relationship between the radio user and a radio allows you to change which radio
a user may be attached to at any particular time. You can keep the radio user records though you delete the associated
radios.
Note: For more information about the Radio record, see Radio on page 288.

Radio User – Basic Tab

Figure 210: Radio User – Basic Tab

Table 86: Parameters for the Radio User – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Radio User Alias N/A 1 to 16 Enter a unique name that refers to a specific radio user on
characters. the system. It supports UTF-8 unicode.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 291

Radio User – Configuration Tab

Figure 211: Radio User – Configuration Tab

Table 87: Parameters for the Radio User – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Assigned Radio Information
Radio Serial N/A 1 to 15 Select the unique serial number of a specific radio on
Number characters the system. The unique serial number is part of the
radios programming.
Radio ID N/A 1 to 13999999 Select a unique number that refers to a specific radio on
the system. Radios need a unique ID in order to
communicate with other radios in the system.
Configuration Parameters
Emergency Alarm N/A 1 to 64 Enter text in this field that is sent out as an emergency
Comments characters. comment when the radio user initiates an emergency
Cannot use: | alarm. This field is only editable if Radio Control
@_"?%$ Manager (RCM) is purchased.
Note: The RCM displays this comment
along with the Radio Alias, Talkgroup Alias,
time the alarm was received, and the Site
Alias.

Interconnect No Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to initiate and receive
Enabled interconnect calls. This setting enables all
interconnect-related parameters on the window.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

292 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

• No prevents the radio user from initiating or

receiving interconnect calls. This setting disables all
interconnect-related parameters on the window.

Packet Data No Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to have access to the
Enabled packet data service.
• No prevents the radio user from having access to the
packet data service.

QAM Data No Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to have access to the
Enabled Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) services.
This parameter is related to the TEDS feature.
• No prevents the radio user from having access to the
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) services.

Short Data Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to have access to the short
Enabled data service.
• No prevents the radio user from having access to the
short data service.

Store and Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the user to have access to the Store and
Forward Enabled Forward service.
• No prevents the user from having access to the Store
and Forward service.
Note: The Store and Forward (SF) service
allows for the delivery of short data
messages to a temporarily unreachable radio
at a later time. The Store and Forward Server
(SFS) buffers the messages for the
unreachable radio and delivers them when
the radio is available again.
Note: The Store and Forward Enabled
parameter is active only if the SDS Store
Forward license has been purchased and the
Short Data parameter is set to Yes. This field
is always grayed out for the following
records: SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF.

Full Duplex Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to initiate and receive full
Enabled duplex private calls.
• No prevents the radio user from initiating and
receiving full duplex private calls.
Note: Telephone Interconnect calls will
always be full-duplex independent of this
parameter setting.

Extended Band No Yes or No • Yes – the radio user can attach to eTGs and be
Channels Can be assigned extended frequency band (410-430 MHz).
Assigned This parameter is related to the eTETRA feature.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 293

Field Default Range Description

• No – radio user cannot attach to eTGs and will not

be assigned extended frequency band.
Note: In order to have this field active a
license key has to be supplied.

Profile Information
Radio User N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific Radio
Capabilities characters User Capabilities Profile defined on the system.
Profile Alias
Note: SZ$INIT radio users always use SZ
$INIT profiles. The value of the Packet Data
Enabled field will always be NO.

Radio User Valid N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific Radio
Sites Profile Alias characters User Valid Sites Profile defined on the system.
Note: SZ$INIT radio users always use SZ
$INIT profiles. The value of the Packet Data
Enabled field will always be No.

Radio User N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific Radio
Interconnect characters User Interconnect Profile defined on the system.
Profile Alias
Note: SZ$INIT radio users always use SZ
$INIT profiles. The value of the Packet Data
Enabled field will always be No.

Authorization Parameters
User Enabled Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to make calls on the
system.
• No temporarily removes a radio user from the
system rather than deleting the user. The user can
receive talkgroup calls, but cannot initiate them.
Also, the user cannot initiate or receive private calls.

RUI Parameters
Logon Required No Yes or No • Yes requires from the radio user to log on to the
radio (via Alias Server).
• No does not require the radio user to log on to the
radio.
Important: To have this parameter enabled
the license for RUA/RUI feature has to be
purchased. The feature has to be also set to
ON in RUI Access Control parameter in
System object

Radio User Packet Data Parameters

Assigned IP [Link] Valid IP Enter the IP address that can be used by the radio user.
Address Address That is, when connecting a computer to the radio the
computer can use this address. This can be done either
by configuring the assigned IP address in the computer
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

294 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

as well as in the system, or by setting up the computer
to use a network assigned IP address. In the latter case
the field must be set to [Link].
Note: You may create more radio users with
the same IP address, on condition that the
value of the Access Point Name field below
differs.

APN Network ID N/A 1 to 63 Enter the Access Point Name (APN) - Network ID that
characters. can be used by the radio user. The APN identifies the
Cannot use: | home network of the radio user. It must consist of labels
@_"?%$ separated by .. The labels must not start with the prefix
“rac”, “lac”, or “sgsn”, and must not end with the
suffix .gprs.
Note: See the Data System GGSN
Mapping tab, for the list of home networks.

Assigned RAG 1 1 to 8 Select the RAG (Resource Allocation Group) that

controls the access to the air interface packet data
channels. A user is configured to belong to a call RAG.
Each packet data channel has a defined RAG access list:
in order to be able to use a packet data channel, the
RAG assigned to the user must appear in the channels
RAG access list. The RAG thus provides a basic access
control mechanism for the packet data channels.
READY Timer 10 3 to 250 Select the maximum time a radio will remain inactive
seconds seconds on the packet data channel after transmission
completed. The READY timer is thus a sort of packet
data hang timer. The optimum value for this timer
depends on the type of application the radio uses.
Note: If for example, the main application is
database lookup, the READY timer should
be set slightly longer than the anticipated
response time of the database. Setting the
timer too short will result in the radio
bouncing back to the MCCH between
datagrams belonging to the same transaction.
Setting the timer too long will result in the
radio spending too much time on the packet
data channel.

ICMP Enabled Yes Yes or No • Yes means that the system will forward Internet
Control Message Protocol (ICMP) messages to the
user across the air interface.
• No means that the system will filter out ICMP
messages.
Note: Set to No, this parameter can be used
to save air interface resources if the
applications used do not use ICMP messages
but cause them to be generated only.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 295

Field Default Range Description

Source Address Yes Yes or No • Yes means that the system will check that the
Checking Enabled datagrams originated from the radio use the assigned
IP address as source address. If the source address
does not equal the assigned address, the datagram
will be discarded.
• No means that the system will allow the radio to
initiate datagrams with any source address.

Multi Slot Packet No Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to access the multi-slot
Data Enabled packet data service.
• No disables this feature.
Note: If you have QAM services enabled,
you can access the multi-slot packet data
service regardless of the Multi Slot Packet
Data Enabled setting.

Radio Primary Talkgroup Assignment

Talkgroup Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the name of a talkgroup that is the primary
characters talkgroup of the radio user. The primary talkgroup
cannot be an Object Group. Supports UTF-8 Unicode.
Important: Primary talkgroups are
important for Radio Control Manager
(RCM) functionality. The primary talkgroup
and an RCM users list of attachment groups
are used to determine which RCM users can
issue radio commands to a radio user and
from which radio users the RCM user can
receive radio activities, such as Status
messages. If this field is left blank, Status
messages are not distributed at all. Only an
RCM user who is attached to all can send a
radio command to the radio user if this field
is left blank.
Note: For more information, see User –
Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab
on page 352.

Ambience Listening
Enable Ambience Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the dispatch console to monitor the
Listening specific radio user.
Monitoring • No disables this feature.

Enable Ambience No Yes or No • Yes allows the dispatch console to initiate an

Listening Ambience Listening (AL) call.
Initiation • No disables this feature.
Note: This parameter is disabled for radio
users per default, as only dispatch consoles
should be enabled to initiate AL calls.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

296 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Interconnect Parameters
Direct Dial N/A Valid Enter a unique telephone number that identifies the
Number telephone radio user, when called from an external telephone
number network
Note: This field must always be empty for
the default SZ$DEF radio user. Any
modification of this field for the SZ$DEF
radio user will not be saved.

PABX Access No Yes or No • Yes allows outbound and inbound interconnect calls
through a PABX gateway.
• No disables this capability.

PSTN Access No Yes or No • Yes allows outbound and inbound interconnect calls
through a PSTN gateway.
• No disables this capability.

Console User
A Console User is a user that is able to log into and use applications in the MCC 7500 console subsystem. An MCC
7500 console user has associated capabilities that allow or limit the MCC 7500 console features to which they have
access. The MCC 7500 console user object has one default record, CONSOLE$DEF.
• Console User – Basic Tab on page 297
• Console User – Configuration Tab on page 298

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 297

Console User – Basic Tab

Figure 212: Console User – Basic Tab

Table 88: Parameters for the Console User – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Console User N/A 1 to 16 Enter a name that is unique among all console users and
Alias characters. radio users on the system.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.
Login Information
User Login Name N/A 1 to 8 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique alias
characters. name that refers to a specific user logging on to the
Cannot use: | @ system. This field defines the console users who in the
_"?% system.
Spaces are not
allowed.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

298 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Password N/A 1 to 8 characters (Read only for existing records) Text that ensures the
security of the user logging on the system. The *
character appears in the field for each letter typed.
Note:
You may enter more than 8 characters but
they will not be checked during login on the
MCC 7500 console.
Passwords are case-sensitive. You can use
any keyboard character when creating a
password.

Verify Password N/A 1 to 8 characters (Read only for existing records) Reenter the password
for confirmation.

Console User – Configuration Tab

Important: Configuration parameters are editable if license is present. If there is no license field is grayed
out. In order to install purchased license, see Installing License Keys from the Installation Menu on page
91.

Figure 213: Console User – Configuration Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 299

Table 89: Parameters for the Console User – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Full Duplex Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the console user to initiate and receive full
Enabled duplex private calls from subscribers or other MCC
7500 consoles.
• No prevents the console user from initiating and
receiving full duplex private calls from subscribers or
other MCC 7500 consoles.

Supervisor Status None Primary, or Designates the supervisor status of a console position.
Secondary, or
Primary gives the console user the highest transmit
None
priority.
Secondary gives the console user the second highest
transmit priority.
None gives the console user the lowest transmit priority.

Console User CONSO 1 to 16 Enter a unique name for a Console User Capabilities
Capabilities LE$ characters. Profile Alias. This is the Console User Capabilities
Profile Alias DEF Cannot use: | @ Profile with which this Console User is associated. The
_"%$?/\ Console User Capabilities Profile defines the set of
features available to this console user.
Enable Ambience Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the MCC 7500 console user to initiate an
Listening Ambience Listening (AL) call.
Initiation • No disables capability of initiation for this console
user.

Logging Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the dynamic console user to logging
Individual Call individual and interconnect calls.
• No disables the dynamic console user to logging
individual and interconnect calls.

Logging E2EE No Yes or No • Yes allows the console user to log individual and
Call group E2EE Calls.
• No disables the console user to log individual and
group E2EE Calls.

User Based ISSI / Host Based ISSI

User ISSI Enabled No Yes or No • Yes allows you to set the console user ISSI which is
directly attached to the console user.
• No disables the console user ISSI.

Console User ISSI N/A 1 to 13999999; Enter a unique number that refers to a specific console
16777216 to user defined on the system.
16777217;
16777219
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

300 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Note: The Console User ISSI must be unique

within the space of the SSI numbers for
Radios, Talkgroup GSSI, Multigroup GSSI,
and console users (User ISSI and Unit ID).
The Console User ISSI is grayed out when the
User ISSI Enabled parameter is disabled.

Unit ID N/A 1 to 13999999 Select the Unit ID. This number uniquely identifies the
console. The Unit ID represents the console assigned to a
Dispatch Application, Archiving Interface Application,
or ICCS Gateway Application that the console user can
use to communicate with other resources in the system.
Note: The Unit ID must be unique within the
space of the SSI numbers for Radios,
Talkgroup GSSI, Multigroup GSSI, and
console users (User ISSI and Unit ID).
This parameter is grayed out when the User
ISSI Enabled parameter is set to enabled.

Valid Security Groups

Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned.
Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the console user.

User Group
User Group – Basic Tab
Figure 214: User Group Basic Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 301

Table 90: Parameters for the User Group – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
User Group ID N/A 1 to 100 Enter a unique identifier for the User Group.
User Group Alias N/A 1 to 16 Enter a user-defined alias for the User Group. The alias
characters. must be unique when compared with existing user group
Cannot use: | @ aliases in the system.
_"%$?/\
Cannot start
with SZ$ or sz$

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters. is assigned.
Cannot use: | @
_"%

User Group – Configuration Tab

Figure 215: User Group – Configuration Tab

Table 91: Parameters for the User Group – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the user group.

Radio User Capabilities Profile

The Radio User Capabilities Profile object defines the general capabilities of the radio user. Each Radio User
Capabilities Profile contains capability parameters that can be customized per configured profile. Every radio user is
assigned a Radio User Capabilities Profile.
You can use a Radio User Capabilities Profile object to define a set of parameters that are common to a specific group
of radio users.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

302 | Reference

Note: The Radio User Capabilities Profile object has default records, SZ$INIT, SZ$RUI-MIN, SZ$DEF,
and TEMPLATE. You can modify the TEMPLATE record as necessary. The SZ$INIT, SZ$RUI-MIN and
SZ$DEF records have special aliases that are the system default Radio User Capabilities Profiles. These
aliases cannot be modified. For more information, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.

Radio User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Figure 216: Radio User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Table 92: Parameters for the Radio User Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Radio User N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a name that refers
Capabilities characters. to a specific Radio User Capabilities Profile defined on
Profile Alias Cannot use: | @ the system.
_"%$?/\
Radio User N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
Capabilities that refers to a specific Radio User Capabilities Profile
Profile ID defined on the system. This profile is the mechanism by
which a radio users general capabilities are configured.
You can customize the capability parameters for a set of
radio users by creating a profile.
Note: You can create up to 2000 Radio User
Capabilities Profiles for the system.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 303

Radio User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 217: Radio User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Table 93: Parameters for the Radio User Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Status Sets
Primary Status N/A 1 to 16 Select the primary status set at which the radio users
Set Alias characters status set messages are serviced by the system.
Secondary Status N/A 1 to 16 Select the secondary status set at which the radio users
Set Alias characters status set messages are serviced by the system.
Load Class
Load Class Name Default N/A Select the unique name that refers to a specific load
Radio class defined on the system.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

304 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Note: This parameter is grayed out under

the following conditions:
• The System Ready for Common
Secondary Control Channel parameter
is set to No in the System configuration
window
• SZ$DEF and SZ$INIT records are set

Configuration Parameters
Dispatch/PC 10 2 to 10 2 is Select the priority level at which the radio users
Priority Level highest 10 is dispatch or private call requests are serviced by the
lowest system.
Note: The priority value of 1 is reserved by
the system for emergency calls.

Private Call (PC) Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to initiate and receive
Enabled private calls.
• No disables this capability.

Dispatch Enabled Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to initiate talkgroup
dispatch calls.
• No disables this capability.

Dispatch Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to initiate talkgroup
Emergency emergency calls.
Enabled • No disables this capability.

Multigroup No Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to initiate multigroup

Enabled calls.
• No disables this capability.

Multigroup No Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to initiate multigroup

Emergency emergency calls.
Enabled • No disables this capability.

Group Scanning Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to attach and listen to all
Enabled scanned talkgroups.
• No disables this capability.
Note: This parameter is related only to SZ
$RUI-MIN record. The field is always
disabled for records other than SZ$RUI-
MIN. For SZ$RUI-MIN, it is enabled only
when RUA/RUI license is available.

Dispatch/Private No Yes or No • Yes allows the radio user to initiate calls that
Call Preempt preempt lower priority calls.
Enabled • No disables this capability.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 305

Field Default Range Description

Called User Pre- Disabled SwMI Invoked, Select the invocation mode for Called User Pre-
emption User Invoked or emption. Select the invocation mode for Called User
Disabled Pre-emption.
• SwMI Invoked allows all individual calls initiated
by the radio user to preempt the called user.
• User Invoked allows only individual calls initiated
by authorized radio users (configured in the radio)
to preempt the called user.
• Disabled means that all individual calls initiated by
the radio user never preempt the called user.
Note: You can only set this parameter if
Dispatch/Private Call Preempt Enabled is
set to Yes.

Barring Parameters
BIC Profile Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a BIC Profile Alias; it defines which talkgroups
characters the Radio User is allowed (marked as granting) or is
not allowed (marked as barring) to attach to. It defines
also which SSI numbers the Radio User is allowed
(mark as granting) or is not allowed (marked as
barring) to receive calls from. This parameter is
optional and as default no profile is associated. See
Barring Profile on page 333 for more information on
defining the barred numbers.
BOC Profile Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a BOC Profile Alias; it defines which talkgroups
characters the Radio User is allowed (marked as granting) or is
not allowed (marked as barring) to PTT (push-to-talk)
on. It defines also which SSI numbers the Radio User
is allowed (mark as granting) or is not allowed
(marked as barring) to call. This parameter is optional
and as default no profile is associated. See Barring
Profile on page 333 for more information on defining
the barred numbers.
Enable Barring No Yes or No • Yes means that barring checks are applied when a
PTT On radio user makes a non-emergency PTT request on
Emergency an ongoing emergency call.
• No means that barring checks are ignored when a
radio user makes a non-emergency PTT request on
an ongoing emergency call.
Note: Barring checks are not applied for
emergency requests. For ongoing
emergency calls, barring checks are only
applied for radio PTT requestors and only if
the Enable Barring PTT On Emergency
parameter is set to Yes.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

306 | Reference

Radio User Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab

Figure 218: Radio User Capabilities Profile User Group Tab

Table 94: Parameters for the Radio User Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab

Field Default Range Description

User Group Parameters
User Group Alias DEFAU 1 to 16 Enter a unique name that refers to a specific User Group
LT characters. defined on the system.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\

Radio User Valid Sites Profile

The Radio User Valid Sites Profile object defines which sites the radio user has access permission for in the system
and consists of privilege information associated with particular sites in the system. Every radio user is assigned a
Radio User Valid Sites Profile. You can use a Radio User Valid Sites Profile record to define a set of parameters that
are common to a specific group of radio users.
Note: The Radio User Valid Sites Profile object has default records, SZ$INIT, SZ$RUI-MIN, SZ$DEF,
and TEMPLATE. You can modify the TEMPLATE record as necessary. The SZ$INIT, SZ$RUI-MIN and
SZ$DEF records have special aliases that are the system default Radio User Valid Sites Profiles. These
aliases cannot be modified. For more information, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.

Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 307

Figure 219: Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab

Table 95: Parameters for the Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Radio User Valid N/A 1 to 16 Enter a name that refers to a specific Radio User Valid
Sites Profile Alias characters. Sites Profile defined on the system.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Radio User Valid N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
Sites Profile ID that refers to a specific Radio User Valid Sites Profile
defined on the system. This profile is the mechanism by
which a radio users site access permissions are
configured. You can customize the valid sites
configuration information for a set of radio users by
creating a profile.
Note: You can create up to 2000 Radio User
Valid Sites Profiles for the system.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

308 | Reference

Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 220: Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab

Table 96: Parameters for the Radio User Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Valid Sites
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the Zone Alias that refers to a specific zone in the
characters system. (Click Add Row to display a list of options).
The system appends the Zone Alias with three characters
using the Zone ID.
Site Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the Site Alias that refers to a specific site within a
characters zone. The maximum number of sites within a zone is
100 sites.
Note: The site alias is selected from local and
external RF sites.

Exclusion Class
The exclusion class defines telephone numbers that a Radio User cannot receive calls from, or make calls to. You can
define up to 16 different exclusion classes. Each exclusion class contains some disallowed dialing patterns, typically
used to prevent dealing of international calls, premium rate numbers etc. The exclusion classes are referenced from
the "Radio User Interconnect Profile", and can both be used to prevent the mobile subscriber from placing calls to
certain telephone numbers (outbound exclusion class), and can also be used to prevent certain numbers from calling
the mobile subscribers (inbound exclusion class).

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 309

Exclusion Class – Basic Tab

Figure 221: Exclusion Class – Basic Tab

Table 97: Parameters for the Exclusion Class – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Exclusion Class N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a number by which
Number the system uniquely references an Exclusion Class.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

310 | Reference

Exclusion Class – Configuration Tab

Figure 222: Exclusion Class – Configuration Tab

Table 98: Parameters for the Exclusion Class – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Disallowed Dialling Pattern
Disallowed N/A 1 to 16 Enter up to 16 Disallowed Dialling Patterns. Radio Users
Dialling Pattern characters. who are assigned this dialling pattern as an Inbound
Cannot use: | @ Exclusion Class will not be able to receive telephone
_"?%$ calls from phone numbers that begin with this dialling
pattern. Radio Users who are assigned this dialling
pattern as an Outbound Exclusion Class will not be able
to make telephone calls to phone numbers that begin
with this dialling pattern. See Radio User Interconnect
Profile – Configuration Tab on page 312. (Click Add
Row to enter a Disallowed Dialling Pattern field).

Radio User Interconnect Profile

The Radio User Interconnect Profile object defines the interconnect call capabilities for the radio user. Every radio
user is assigned a Radio User Interconnect Profile. You can use the Radio User Interconnect Profile record to define a
set of parameters that are common to a specific group of radio users.
Note: The Radio User Interconnect Profile object has default records, SZ$INIT, SZ$RUI-MIN, SZ$DEF,
and TEMPLATE. You can modify the TEMPLATE record as necessary. The SZ$INIT, SZ$RUI-MIN and
SZ$DEF records have special aliases that are the system default Radio User Interconnect Profiles. These
aliases cannot be modified. For more information, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 311

Radio User Interconnect Profile – Basic Tab

Figure 223: Radio User Interconnect Profile – Basic Tab

Table 99: Parameters for the Radio User Interconnect Profile – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Radio User N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a name that refers
Interconnect characters. to a specific Radio User Interconnect Profile defined on
Profile Alias Cannot use: | @ the system.
_"%$?/\
Radio User N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
Interconnect that refers to a specific Radio User Interconnect Profile
Profile ID defined on the system. This profile is the mechanism by
which a radio users interconnect capabilities are
configured. You can customize the interconnect
configuration information for a set of radio users by
creating a profile.
Note: You can have up to 2000 Radio User
Interconnect Profiles for the system.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

312 | Reference

Radio User Interconnect Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 224: Radio User Interconnect Profile – Configuration Tab

Table 100: Parameters for the Radio User Interconnect Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Priority Level 10 2 to 10 Select the priority level at which the radio users
interconnect call requests are serviced by the system.
• 2=Highest
level
• 10=Lowest
level
• 1=Reserved
for system
emergency
calls

Exclusion Class
Inbound Exclusion N/A 1 to 16 Select the number of the exclusion class to which the
Class Number radio user is assigned. An Inbound Exclusion Class
specifies the telephone numbers the radio user cannot
receive telephone interconnect calls from.
Outbound N/A 1 to 16 Select the number of the exclusion class to which the
Exclusion Class radio user is assigned. An Outbound Exclusion Class
Number specifies the telephone numbers the radio user cannot
make telephone interconnect calls to.
Valid Call Routes
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 313

Field Default Range Description

Zone ID N/A 1 to 16 Select a Zone ID that refers to a specific zone in the
characters system. (Click Add Row to display a list of options).
Call Route Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a Call Route Alias that refers to a specific call
characters route in the system. All PABX routes are accessible.
Note: You can refer to maximum 20 call
routes.

Talkgroup
The Talkgroup object consists of information that identifies a group of radios that communicate and interact together
on the system. This group can also be a subset of a multigroup.
Note:
The Talkgroup object has two default records, SZ$INIT and SZ$DEF. For more information about default
records, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.
You can create a total of 16,384 talkgroups and multigroups on a system. They can be anywhere in the
range from 1 to 13999999.
When an Object Group Subject is created the definitions of automatically derived talkgroups/multigroups
appear in the talkgroup/multigroup list. You cannot delete nor edit such groups. See the Object Call manual
for more information on the dynamically created talkgroups.

Talkgroup – Basic Tab

Figure 225: Talkgroup – Basic Tab

Table 101: Parameters for the Talkgroup – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Talkgroup Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique name that
characters. refers to a specific talkgroup defined on the system.
Supports UTF-8 unicode.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

314 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Talkgroup ID N/A 1 to 13999999 Enter a unique number that refers to a specific talkgroup
defined on the system.
Note: The same pool of IDs is also used for
allocating ID numbers to Multigroups and
Radios, and the same value cannot be
assigned to both a group and an individual.
You can create a total of 16,384 talkgroups
and multigroups on a system.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Talkgroup – Configuration Tab

Figure 226: Talkgroup – Configuration Tab

Table 102: Parameters for the Talkgroup – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Profile Information
Console TG/MG TEMPL 1 to 16 Select a unique name associated with the Console
Capabilities ATE characters Talkgroup/Multigroup (TG/MG) Resource Capabilities
Profile Alias Profile. The Alias must be unique among all Console
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 315

Field Default Range Description

Resource Capabilities Profiles, where a Console TG/MG
Capabilities Profile is considered a Console Resource
Capabilities Profile. If a Console TG/MG Capabilities
Profile is already assigned to a multigroup, the Patch field
cannot be set to Yes. Also, if the Patch field of a Console
TG/MG Capabilities Profile is set to Yes, it cannot be
assigned to a multigroup.
TG/MG N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Capabilities characters Capabilities Profile defined on the system.
Profile Alias
TG/MG Valid N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Sites Profile Alias characters Access Profile defined on the system.
Configuration Parameters
Preempt Capable No Yes or No • Yes allows all group calls initiated in this talkgroup to
preempt lower priority calls both on voice and data
channels.
• No disables this capability.

Extended Band No Yes or No • Yes allows for assigning the channels, which use both
Channels Can be the standard (380-400 MHz) and the extended
Assigned (410-430 MHz) frequency band. This parameter is
related to the eTETRA feature.
• No disallows for assigning the channels, which use the
extended frequency band. Only the standard frequency
band (380-400 MHz) is used.
Note: In order to have this field active
purchase a license key.

Authorization Parameters
Talkgroup Yes Yes or No • Yes enables this talkgroup to be regrouped with other
Regroupable talkgroups, allowing the resulting supergroup to
transmit using only one repeater.
• No prevents this talkgroup from regrouping.

Group Enabled Yes Yes or No • Yes enables the talkgroup for use on the system.
• No disables the talkgroup for use on the system.
However a radio can still initiate an Emergency Call
on this talkgroup but other radios will have to enter
Emergency Mode to be able to reply, any affiliated
consoles will be able receive the Emergency Alarm
and audio from the radios but will not be able to reply.

Multigroup
The Multigroup object consists of information identifying a group of talkgroups that periodically need to
communicate and interact together on the system.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

316 | Reference

Note:
You can create a total of 16,384 talkgroups and multigroups on a system using this set of decimal numbers.
They can be anywhere in the range from 1 to 13999999.
When an Object Group Subject is created the definitions of automatically derived talkgroups/multigroups
appear in the talkgroup/multigroup list. You cannot delete nor edit such groups. See the Object Call manual
for more information on the dynamically created talkgroups.

Multigroup – Basic Tab

Figure 227: Multigroup – Basic Tab

Table 103: Parameters for the Multigroup – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Multigroup Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique name
characters. that refers to a specific multigroup defined on the
Cannot use: | system. Supports UTF-8 unicode.
@_"%$?/\
Multigroup ID N/A 1 to 13999999 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
that refers to a specific multigroup defined on the
system.
Note: The same pool of IDs is also used for
allocating ID numbers to Talkgroups and
Radios, and the same value cannot be
assigned to both a group and an individual.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 317

Multigroup – Configuration Tab

Figure 228: Multigroup – Configuration Tab

Table 104: Parameters for the Multigroup – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Profile Information
Console TG/MG TEMPL 1 to 16 Select a unique name associated with the Console
Capabilities ATE characters Talkgroup/Multigroup (TG/MG) Resource Capabilities
Profile Alias Profile. The Alias must be unique among all Console
Resource Capabilities Profiles, where a Console
TG/MG Capabilities Profile is considered a Console
Resource Capabilities Profile. If a Console TG/MG
Capabilities Profile is already assigned to a multigroup,
the Patch field cannot be set to Yes. Also, if the Patch
field of a Console TG/MG Capabilities Profile is set to
Yes, it cannot be assigned to a multigroup.
TG/MG N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Capabilities characters Capabilities Profile defined on the system.
Profile Alias
TG/MG Valid N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Sites Profile Alias characters Valid Sites Profile defined on the system.
Configuration Parameters
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

318 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Preempt Capable No Yes or No • Yes allows all group calls initiated in this multigroup
to preempt lower priority calls for both voice and
data channels.
• No disables this capability.

Interrupt or Wait Wait Interrupt or • Interrupt enables a multigroup to interrupt talkgroup

Mode Wait calls currently in conversation to include them in a
multigroup call, regardless if all talkgroup members
are available.
• Wait allows a talkgroup call in progress to end
before a multigroup call begins, so the multigroup
waits for all talkgroup members to be available.

Extended Band No Yes or No • Yes allows for assigning the channels, which use
Channels Can be both the standard (380-400 MHz) and the extended
Assigned (410-430 MHz) frequency band. This parameter is
related to the eTETRA feature.
• No disallows for assigning the channels, which use
the extended frequency band. Only the standard
frequency band (380-400 MHz) is used.
Note: In order to have this field active
purchase a license key.

Authorization Parameters
Multigroup Yes Yes or No • Yes enables the multigroup for use on the system.
Enabled • No disables the multigroup for use on the system,
except for emergency calls.

Talkgroups in Multigroup
Talkgroup in N/A 1 to 16 Select a talkgroup from the list of talkgroups associated
Multigroup characters with the specified Multigroup ID and Alias. (Click Add
Row to display a list of options).
Note: For more information about home
zone mapping, see Home Zone Mapping on
page 278.

Note: The UCM limit is 128 talkgroups per

multigroup. You should program the radio
and UCM talkgroup to multigroup mappings
identically.

TG/MG Capabilities Profile

The TG/MG Capabilities Profile object defines the capabilities for a talkgroup or multigroup. You can use the
TG/MG Capabilities Profile record to define a set of parameters that are common to a specific talkgroup or
multigroup. Each TG/MG Capabilities Profile contains capability parameters that can be customized per configured
profile. Every talkgroup and multigroup is assigned a TG/MG Capabilities Profile.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 319

Note: The TG/MG Capabilities Profile object has default records, SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, and TEMPLATE.
You can modify the TEMPLATE record as necessary. The SZ$INIT and SZ$DEF records have special
aliases that are the system default TG/MG Capabilities Profile. These aliases cannot be modified. For more
information, see Using Default Records and Profiles on page 274.

TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Figure 229: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Table 105: Parameters for the TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
TG/MG N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique name that
Capabilities characters. refers to a specific TG/MG Capabilities Profile defined
Profile Alias Cannot use: | @ on the system.
_"%$?/\
TG/MG N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
Capabilities that refers to a specific TG/MG Capabilities Profile
Profile ID defined on the system. This profile is the mechanism by
which a talkgroup or multigroups capabilities are
configured. You can customize the talkgroup or
multigroup capability parameters for a set of talkgroups
or multigroups by creating a profile.
Note: You can create up to 2000 TG/MG
Capabilities Profiles on the system.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

320 | Reference

TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 230: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Table 106: Parameters for the TG/MG Capabilities Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Conversation PTT-ID PTTID or Select one of the following:
Type Transmission
• PTTID indicates that the group call has a hang time,
which improves call continuity for the conversation,
that is the call is not assigned a new channel per
transmission.
• Transmission indicates that the call lasts for the
duration of a single transmission, that is a new
channel is assigned per transmission. Typically
transmission trunking is better on a very busy
system where the calls are of short duration.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 321

Field Default Range Description

Note: This applies only to group calls.

Private calls are always message trunked.

Busy Override AllStart AllStart or Select one of the following:

FASTStart
• AllStart indicates that the group cannot override
busies, but will instead be queued until busies are
cleared. This means that the call begins when ALL
channels on sites with affiliated talkgroup members,
consoles, critical sites, and other required resources
are available for a requested call.
• FASTStart indicates that the group will
automatically override busies for this group. This
means that the call begins even if there are no
channels available on non-critical sites (they are
busy and cannot be preempted). The call proceeds
even if those sites have an affiliated radio.
FASTStart ensures the participation of all critical
resources (requested sites and critical sites) and the
affiliated consoles before the call can begin.

Emergency Yes Yes or No • Yes enables radio users in the talkgroup to initiate
Enabled emergency calls or alarms.
• No disables this capability. Emergency calls are
processed under normal priority level control.

Emergency at Not Yes Yes or No • Yes allows emergency calls to be placed at non-
Valid Sites valid sites for the talkgroup as determined by the
selection of valid sites in the TG/MG Valid Sites
Profile.
• No disables this capability.

Dispatch Priority 10 2 to 10 Select a priority level to determine how the system

Level handles talkgroup call requests if all resources are not
• 2=Highest
immediately available and the call must be busied.
level
• 10=Lowest Note: The priority value of 1 is reserved by
level the system for emergency calls.

Priority Monitor No Yes or No • Yes allows a radio user with Priority Monitor
capability to monitor a talkgroup call. Information
regarding activity on this talkgroup is sent out on
voice channels assigned to other talkgroup calls.
Radios monitoring talkgroup calls can detect this
information and use it to scan over to more
important talkgroup conversations on other
channels. Radios must be set up as follows:
• Be programmed for Priority Monitor scan.
• Have a configured scan list.
• Be in scan mode to access this functionality.
• No disables this capability.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

322 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Note: You should only enable Priority

Monitor on a small subset of the total
talkgroups in the system due to the limited
bandwidth of the embedded voice channel
signalling. This increases the speed with
which a radio is notified of a priority
message.
Note: Radios monitoring Private Call or
Interconnect calls are not interrupted by
Priority Monitor talkgroup activity.

Talkgroup 12 4 to 72 or Select the time when an inactive radio or console

Inactivity Time hours Infinite Channel Control window affiliated to the current
(Hours) (increments of talkgroup or multigroup is polled to determine if it is
4) no longer on the system. Infinite means that it is never
polled.
Route Status N/A Yes or No (Read only) Enables the console to receive status event
Events to Console notices. This field is set in the System object.
Status CADI Zone Controller, • Zone Controller selects the zone controller for
Acknowledged By CADI acknowledging status.
• CADI selects the CADI software for
acknowledging status. If the Route Status Events to
Console field in the system configuration is set to
No then this field is disabled.

Emergency RCM RCM, Console • RCM selects RCM software for acknowledging
Acknowledged By or CADI emergencies.
• Console selects the console for acknowledging
emergencies.
• CADI selects the CADI software for
acknowledging emergencies. If the Emergency
Acknowledged By field in the system configuration
is set to RCM, CADI or Console then this field is
disabled.

Audio Interrupt Never Never or Select one of the following:

Mode Always
• Never prevents all audio interrupt requests.
• Always lets the system automatically grant
preemptive audio interrupt requests on the same
talkgroup.

Data Channel No Yes or No Select one of the following:

Preemption
• Yes means that voice group calls initiated in this
talkgroup preempt the allocation for dynamic
packet data in case there are no free resources for
the call.
• No means that dynamic data channels are not
preempted in favour of voice.

Barring Parameters
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 323

Field Default Range Description

BIC Profile Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a BIC Profile Alias. BIC Profile defines which
characters SSI numbers are allowed (marked as granting), and
which are not allowed (marked as barring) to PTT
(push-to-talk) on the talkgroup. This parameter is
optional and as default no profile is associated. See
Barring Profile on page 333 for more information on
defining the barred numbers.
BOC Profile Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a BOC Profile Alias. BOC Profile defines which
characters SSI numbers are allowed (marked as granting), and
which are not allowed (marked as barring) to attach to
talkgroup. This parameter is optional and as default no
profile is associated. See Barring Profile on page 333
for more information on defining the barred numbers.

TG/MG Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab

Figure 231: TG/MG Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab

Table 107: Parameters for the TG/MG Capabilities Profile – User Group Tab

Field Default Range Description

User Group Parameters
User Group Alias DEFAU 1 to 16 Enter a unique name that refers to a specific User Group
LT characters. defined on the system.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\

TG/MG Valid Sites Profile

The TG/MG Valid Sites Profile object defines which sites the talkgroup or multigroup has access permission for in
the system. Every talkgroup and multigroup is assigned a TG/MG Valid Sites Profile. You can use the TG/MG Valid
Sites Profile record to define a set of parameters that are common to a specific talkgroup or multigroup.
Note: The TG/MG Valid Sites Profile object has default records, SZ$INIT, SZ$DEF, and TEMPLATE.
You can modify the TEMPLATE record as necessary. The SZ$INIT and SZ$DEF records have special
aliases that are the system default TG/MG Valid Sites Profile.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

324 | Reference

Note: These aliases cannot be modified. For more information, see Using Default Records and Profiles on
page 274.

TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab

Figure 232: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab

Table 108: Parameters for the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
TG/MG Valid N/A 1 to 16 Enter a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Sites Profile Alias characters. Valid Sites Profile defined on the system.
Cannot use: | @
Note: You can create up to 2000 TG/MG
_"%$?/\
Valid Sites Profiles for the system.

TG/MG Valid N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
Sites Profile ID that refers to a specific TG/MG Valid Sites Profile
defined on the system. This profile is the mechanism by
which a talkgroup or multigroups site access
permissions are configured. You can customize the valid
sites configuration information for a set of talkgroups or
multigroups by creating a profile.
Note: You can create up to 2000 TG/MG
Valid Sites Profiles for the system.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 325

TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 233: TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab

Table 109: Parameters for the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Valid Sites
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select a Zone Alias that refers to a specific
characters zone in the system. (Click Add Row to display a list of
options). The system appends the Zone Alias with three
characters using the Zone ID.
Site Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select a Site Alias that refers to a specific
characters site within a zone. The maximum number of sites within
a zone is 100 sites.
Note: The site alias is selected from local and
external RF sites.

Requested No Yes or No Select Yes or No:

• Yes indicates that this site must be included in any
talkgroup or multigroup call that involves this
talkgroup or multigroup, if a channel is available.
These sites can be busy-overridden and available
channels are not reserved in a busy call.
• No indicates that you are not forcing a talkgroup
affiliation to this site.
Note: This field supports scanning radios that
do not automatically affiliate when they scan.

Critical No Yes or No Select Yes or No:

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

326 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

• Yes indicates that this site must be included for a

talkgroup call to be granted, regardless of whether
the site has affiliated users. This site will not be busy-
overridden when FASTStart is selected in the
TG/MG Profile. A channel is required at this site if a
voice channel is in service at this site when the call is
requested.
• No indicates that normal assignment rules apply.

Status Set
The Status Set object lets you create up to 100 status messages which the radio user can reference. These status
messages are displayed at the console after the radio user selects an assigned radio button that corresponds to a status
message.
The Status Set object uses the STATUS-SET-1 default record.
You may create up to 2000 status sets.

Status Set – Basic Tab

Figure 234: Status Set – Basic Tab

Table 110: Parameters for the Status Set – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Status Set Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique name
characters. that refers to a specific status set profile defined on the
Cannot use: | @ system. A default record, STATUS-SET-1, is provided
_"%$?/\ for convenience.
Status Set ID N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique id that
refers to a specific status set profile defined on the
system.
Security Group
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 327

Field Default Range Description

Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Status Set – Configuration Tab

Figure 235: Status Set – Configuration Tab

Table 111: Parameters for the Status Set – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Status Number N/A 1 to 65535 Enter a number that refers to a specific status message
defined on the system. You can create up to 100 status
messages.
Note: Although you can enter values in the
range 1 to 65535, the valid range for Dimetra
is 32768 to 65535.

Status Text N/A 1 to 60 Enter a text associated with a specific Status Set Number
characters. that is displayed when the radio user selects and transmits
Cannot use: | @ that number.
_"?%$

Storm Plan

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

328 | Reference

The Storm Plan object allows you to create a quick and easy identification for predefined Storm Plans.
A Storm Plan is used in disaster management to dynamically regroup different groups or organizations so that they
can communicate with each other.
Creating Storm Plans is a two-step process:
1 Create the Storm Plans alias and list of authorized Radio Control Manager (RCM) users who can issue the storm
plan using the Storm Plan object.
2 Create the Storm Plan Command, which involves the number of commands in the storm plan, the talkgroup to
which radios are regrouped, and the radio users associated with the Storm Plan. See Storm Plan Commands on
page 329.

Storm Plan – Basic Tab

Figure 236: Storm Plan – Basic Tab

Table 112: Parameters for the Storm Plan – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Storm Plan Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter a name that refers
characters. to a specific Storm Plan defined on the system.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Purpose N/A 1 to 60 Enter text that clearly describes what situations a specific
characters. Storm Plan handles. Together with the Storm Plan Alias,
Cannot use: | @ this provides a clear idea of the purpose of the plan and
_"?%$ how it is to be used.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 329

Storm Plan – Configuration Tab

Figure 237: Storm Plan – Configuration Tab

Table 113: Parameters for the Storm Plan – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Login Name N/A 1 to 8 Select the unique alias name that refers to a specific user
characters logging on to the system. This field defines the Radio
Control Manager (RCM) users who can execute the
storm plan. (Click Add Row to display a list of options).

Storm Plan Commands

The Storm Plan Commands object allows you to create a detailed plan for regrouping talkgroups to handle situations,
such as crowd control and weather disasters. You can also control a radio by inhibiting or locking the radio.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

330 | Reference

Storm Plan Commands – Basic Tab

Figure 238: Storm Plan Commands – Basic Tab

Table 114: Parameters for the Storm Plan Commands – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Storm Plan Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Select a name that refers
characters to a specific Storm Plan defined in the system. This field
associates the Storm Plan Commands record with a
Storm Plan.
Command ID N/A 1 to 4 (Read only for existing records) Enter a number
indication the command ID in the storm plan.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 331

Storm Plan Commands – Configuration Tab

Figure 239: Storm Plan Commands – Configuration Tab

Table 115: Parameters for the Storm Plan Commands – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Talkgroup Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select the name of a talkgroup to which the radios are
characters associated with when this storm plan is executed. The
primary talkgroup cannot be an Object Group. Supports
UTF-8 unicode.
Radio Users
Radio User Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select the unique name of the radio user
characters associated with the specified storm plan. A dynamic list
of radio user aliases is created as they are entered. (Click
Add Row to display a list of options.)

Load Class
Load Class object allows you to define a class (type) of radios which have a given expected contribution to the load
on the Common Control Channel (CCCH). Load class is associated with a specific radio. It is possible to create up to
30 load classes, but for maintainability purposes it is recommended to use the following predefined load classes:
• Default Radio
• Stationary Radio
• High Activity Radio
• Very High Activity Radio
Note: The names of the predefined load classes cannot be modified. Other parameters, for example load
class weight, can be set according to your preferences.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

332 | Reference

Note: When creating a load class record, each load class name must be unique.

Load classes are defined in the Radio User Capabilities Profile object. An entry for a load class cannot be removed if
it is used in any radio user record profile.

Load Class – Basic Tab

Figure 240: Load Class – Basic Tab

Table 116: Parameters for the Load Class – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Load Class Name N/A 1 to 40 Enter a unique name that refers to a specific load class
characters. defined on the system.
Cannot use: | @
Note: When you create a load class, its name
\";?%*
must be unique.

There are four predefined load classes defined on the

system:
• Default Radio
• Stationary Radio
• High Activity Radio
• Very High Activity Radio
The name of the predefined load class cannot be
modified, only its parameters can be changed, for
example the load class weight. Predefined load classes
can also be deleted, except for the Default Radio load
class.
Load Class ID N/A 1 to 30 Enter a unique number that refers to a specific load class.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 333

Field Default Range Description

more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Load Class – Configuration Tab

Figure 241: Load Class – Configuration Tab

Table 117: Parameters for the Load Class – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Load Weight
Load Class 1 0.2 to 20 Select the number of a load class weight. A Load Class
Weight Weight specifies the load which is expected to be
generated by the particular radio on the CCCH.
Description
Load Class N/A 1 to 256 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
Description characters information about the load class.

Barring Profile
Barring Profile specifies a subset of SSI numbers for which calls are barred. You can associate the profiles with a
specific Console User Capabilities Profile, Radio User Capabilities Profile, and TG/MG Capabilities Profile.
You can create up to 64 entries in each profile and up to 200 profiles per cluster. See Barring of Incoming/Outgoing
Calls for information on using this object.
Note: This object is active only when the Barring of Incoming/Outgoing Calls feature license is purchased.
For licensing details, see the Backup and Restore Including FRU/FRE volume.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

334 | Reference

Barring Profile – Basic Tab

Figure 242: Barring Profile – Basic Tab

Table 118: Parameters for the Barring Profile – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Barring Profile ID N/A 1 to 200 A unique value should be assigned to each profile within
a cluster.
Barring Profile N/A 1 to 16 A unique value should be assigned to each profile alias
Alias characters within a cluster. Supports UTF-8 unicode.

Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 335

Barring Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 243: Barring Profile – Configuration Tab

The order of entries is maintained for user convenience and does not affect the BIC/BOC functionality.

Table 119: Parameters for the Barring Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Entry Type N/A Barring or The effect depends on whether it is a BOC or a BIC
Granting Profile and which object (Radio User, Console User,
Talkgroup, Multigroup, Object Group Subject, Object
Group Instance, and CRHN) it is associated with.
• Barring stops SSI numbers listed in the SSI Subset to
connect.
• Granting allows the SSI numbers listed in the SSI
Subset to connect.
If an SSI is both covered by a Barring Entry and a
Granting Entry, then a call will be granted.
SSI Subset N/A 1 to 17 A range or pattern identifying the SSI subset.
characters:
• Range: two numbers from 1 to 13999999 separated
• Range by a hyphen (-). The second number must be larger
• Pattern than or equal to the first.
• Pattern: a sequence of up to 8 characters containing
digits (0–9) and “?” (wildcard for any single digit). A
“0” cannot be the leftmost character. A “?” as the
leftmost character cannot match “0”.
If an SSI is not covered by any entry in the SSI Subset,
then a call is granted.
Send Alarm N/A Yes or No If Entry Type is set to “Granting”, the check box is
disabled. If Entry Type is set to “Barring” and the
checkbox is selected, a transient alarm appears on UEM
after an attempt of making a barred talkgroup attachment.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

336 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

The alarm contains the ISSI number of the user, GSSI of
the talkgroup, and an indication of whether the barring
occurred due to BIC or BOC. When you move the mouse
pointer over the Send Alarm checkbox, a tooltip appears
with an explanation of the checkbox effect.

Object Group Definition

The Object Group Definition object allows you to create dynamic talkgroups or multigroups identified as Object
Group and defines Object Group configuration parameters. Object Groups are defined in a two-dimensional structure
consisting of Subjects and Instances. See the Object Call manual for more information on using this object.
Note:
You cannot create nor delete the Object Group Definition.
You can modify the object only if there are no Subjects or Instances created in the system.
This object and its sub-objects (Object Group Subject and Object Group Instance) are active only when the
Object Call feature license is purchased. For licensing details, see the Backup and Restore Including
FRU/FRE volume.

Object Group Definition – Basic Tab

Figure 244: Object Group Definition – Basic Tab

Table 120: Parameters for the Object Group Definition – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Object Group Object N/A (Read only) Identifies the Object Group among
Definition Group talkgroup/multigroup list.
Paramet
ers
Activated No Yes or No • Yes activates the Object Call feature.
• No deactivates the Object Call feature.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 337

Field Default Range Description

Note: When the parameter is set to No you

can change the Configuration Parameters, but
the changes will not be applied on the system
until you activate the feature.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Object Group Definition – Configuration Tab

Figure 245: Object Group Definition – Configuration Tab

Table 121: Parameters for the Object Group Definition – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Length of Prefix 0 0 to 2 Specifies how many digits the Object Group Prefix and
Temporary Object Call Prefix have.
• If the Object Call feature license is not purchased and
enabled, the field is grayed out and the value set to 0.
• If the Object Call feature license is purchased and
enabled (not necessarily activated), enter 1 or 2.

Object Group 0 0 to 99 The value of the Object Group Prefix OGp> depends on
Prefix Length of Prefix and the total number of digits (Length
of Prefix + Length of Subject + Length of Instance):
• If the Length of Prefix is 1, select OGp> from the
range 1–9.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

338 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

• If the Length of Prefix is 2 and the total number of

digits is less than 8, select OGp> from the range 01–
99.
• If the Length of Prefix is 2 and the total number of
digits is 8, select OGp> from the range 01–13.
The Object Group Prefix must have different value than
Temporary Object Call Prefix.
Temporary Object 0 0 to 99 The Temporary Object Call Prefix TOCp> is used
Call Prefix instead of the Object Group Prefix OGp> when a user is
initiating a Temporary Object Call.
The value of the Temporary Object Call Prefix TOCp>
depends on Length of Prefix and the total number of
digits (Length of Prefix + Length of Subject + Length of
Instance):
• If the Length of Prefix is 1, select TOCp> from the
range 1–9.
• If the Length of Prefix is 2 and the total number of
digits is less than 8, select TOCp> from the range 01–
99.
• If the Length of Prefix is 2 and the total number of
digits is 8, select TOCp> from the range 01–13.
The Temporary Object Call Prefix must have different
value than Object Group Prefix.
Length of Subject 4 1 to 5 Specifies how many digits the Subject ID has. The sum
of the Length of Subject and the Length of Instance must
be less than or equal to 6, otherwise an error appears.
Length of Instance 2 1 to 5 Specifies how many digits the Instance ID has. The sum
of the Length of Subject and the Length of Instance must
be less than or equal to 6, otherwise an error appears.

Object Group Subject

The Object Group Subject identifies the part of the Object Group which represents for example a flight number or a
bus line. The Object Group Subject consists of all necessary information that a trunking system requires for a
talkgroup/multigroup on the system. For each Subject, there is a set of talkgroups created automatically. The set
covers all combinations of Object Group Prefix, Subject and Instance. When you create a new Instance, the list of
talkgroups in the Talkgroup object is updated. See the Object Call manual for more information on using this object.
Note: Values of the parameters defined for an Object Group Subject are inherited by the talkgroups created
for the Object Group Subject (that is OGp>Subject>Instance> and OGp>Subject>Instance wildcard>).

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 339

Object Group Subject – Basic Tab

Figure 246: Object Group Subject – Basic Tab

Table 122: Parameters for the Object Group Subject – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Subject Alias N/A 1 to 8 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique name that
characters refers to a specific Object Group Subject defined on the
system. Supports UTF-8 unicode.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Cannot start
with SZ$ or ZC
$

Subject ID N/A 1 – 99999 (Read only for existing records) Enter a number that
refers to a specific Object Group Subject. The number
depends on the value given in the Length of Subject on
the Configuration tab of Object Group Definition.
Subject Activated Yes Yes or No • Yes creates and enables the talkgroups created for the
Subject to be used on the system.
• No removes the talkgroups created for the Subject.
The talkgroups cannot be used until the Subject is
activated again.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

340 | Reference

Object Group Subject – Configuration Tab

Figure 247: Object Group Subject – Configuration Tab

Table 123: Parameters for the Object Group Subject – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Profile Information
Console TG/MG TEMPL 1 to 16 Select a unique name associated with the Console
Capabilities ATE characters Talkgroup/Multigroup (TG/MG) Resource Capabilities
Profile Alias Profile. The Alias must be unique among all Console
Resource Capabilities Profiles, where a Console TG/MG
Capabilities Profile is considered a Console Resource
Capabilities Profile. If a Console TG/MG Capabilities
Profile is already assigned to a multigroup, the Patch field
cannot be set to Yes. Also, if the Patch field of a Console
TG/MG Capabilities Profile is set to Yes, it cannot be
assigned to a multigroup.
TG/MG N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Capabilities characters Capabilities Profile defined on the system.
Profile Alias
TG/MG Valid N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Sites Profile Alias characters Access Profile defined on the system.
Configuration Parameters
Preempt Capable No Yes or No • Yes allows all group calls initiated in this talkgroup to
preempt lower priority calls both on voice and data
channels.
• No disables this capability.

Interrupt or Wait Wait Interrupt or • Interrupt enables a multigroup to interrupt talkgroup

Mode Wait calls currently in conversation to include them in a
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 341

Field Default Range Description

multigroup call, regardless if all talkgroup members

are available.
• Wait allows a talkgroup call in progress to end before
a multigroup call begins, so the multigroup waits for
all talkgroup members to be available.

Extended Band No Yes or No • Yes allows for assigning the channels, which use both
Channels Can be the standard (380-400 MHz) and the extended
Assigned (410-430 MHz) frequency band. This parameter is
related to the eTETRA feature.
• No disallows for assigning the channels, which use the
extended frequency band. Only the standard frequency
band (380-400 MHz) is used.
Note: In order to have this field active
purchase a license key.

Object Group Instance

The Object Group Instance identifies the part of the Object Group which represents, for example, a certain workgroup
within a flight or certain tour of a bus line. See the Object Call manual for more information on using this object.
Note: Values of the parameters defined for an Object Group Instance are inherited by the talkgroup
OGp>Subject wildcard>Instance>.

Object Group Instance – Basic Tab

Figure 248: Object Group Instance – Basic Tab

Table 124: Parameters for the Object Group Instance – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

342 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Instance Alias N/A 1 to 7 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique name that
characters refers to a specific Object Group Instance defined in the
system. Supports UTF-8 unicode.
Cannot use: | @
_"%$?/\
Cannot start
with SZ$ or ZC
$

Instance ID N/A 1 – 99999 (Read only for existing records) Enter a number that
refers to a specific Object Group Instance. The number
depends on the value given in the Length of Instance on
the Configuration tab of Object Group Definition.
Instance Activated Yes Yes or No • Yes creates and enables the talkgroup created for the
Instance to be used on the system.
• No removes the talkgroup created for the Instance.
The talkgroup cannot be used until the Instance is
activated again.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Object Group Instance – Configuration Tab

Figure 249: Object Group Instance – Configuration Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 343

Table 125: Parameters for the Object Group Instance – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Profile Information
Console TG/MG TEMPL 1 to 16 Select a unique name associated with the Console
Capabilities ATE characters Talkgroup/Multigroup (TG/MG) Resource Capabilities
Profile Alias Profile. The Alias must be unique among all Console
Resource Capabilities Profiles, where a Console TG/MG
Capabilities Profile is considered a Console Resource
Capabilities Profile.
TG/MG N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Capabilities characters Capabilities Profile defined on the system.
Profile Alias
TG/MG Valid N/A 1 to 16 Select a unique name that refers to a specific TG/MG
Sites Profile Alias characters Access Profile defined on the system.
Configuration Parameters
Preempt Capable No Yes or No • Yes allows all group calls initiated in this talkgroup to
preempt lower priority calls both on voice and data
channels.
• No disables this capability.

Extended Band No Yes or No • Yes allows for assigning the channels, which use both
Channels Can be the standard (380-400 MHz) and the extended
Assigned (410-430 MHz) frequency band. This parameter is
related to the eTETRA feature.
• No disallows for assigning the channels, which use the
extended frequency band. Only the standard frequency
band (380-400 MHz) is used.
Note: In order to have this field active
purchase a license key.

Security Reference
This part discusses the Basic and Configuration tabs for each object in the Security object class of the User
Configuration Manager (UCM) window.

Security Group
The Security Group object allows you to create a logical grouping of radios and infrastructure components to partition
the system. Every object record is assigned a security group.
SYSTEM is the default record for the Security Group object. You cannot delete or modify the SYSTEM security
group, but you can use it to quickly create new records.
Note: You cannot delete a security group record, so be careful when creating this type of record. You can
create as many security group records as you need.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

344 | Reference

Refreshing the Security Group List

The list of Security Groups is determined at the time of logon. If a new Security Group is added, it is important to
close and reopen the application for the new group to appear in the available list.

Figure 250: Security Group Configuration Window

Table 126: Parameters for the Security Group Configuration Window

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Enter a name that refers to a specific security group
characters. defined on the system. The security groups that you
Cannot use: | @ create are used to logically group radios and
_"?%$ infrastructure components to partition the system.
Note: You cannot delete a security group
record. Be careful when creating this type of
record.

Security Group ID N/A 1 to 2000 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique number
that refers to a specific Security Group defined on the
system.

User
The User object manages all users who have access to the Dimetra IP system, and what privileges are associated with
a particular user. This includes all users and management users for the UCM and ZCM as well as for other
applications.
The default supermgr record enables you to quickly create new records.

Tabs in the User Configuration Window

The following table shows the tabs in the User Configuration window.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 345

Table 127: Tabs in the User Configuration Window

Tab Description
Basic Configures the login and password information.
Configuration Specifies permissions to create records for Subscriber objects, Infrastructure
objects, other users, and security groups. Enables you to save the password so
that the user can log in without entering a password.
Zone Access Allows access to all zones or to specified zones.
Application Access Allows access to all applications or to specified Motorola Radio Network
Management applications. For example, you could assign access to Radio
Control Manager (RCM), Zone Control Manager (ZCM), or Software
Download.
Security Group Access Allows access to specified security groups and the permissions for each security
group.
Radio Control Manager Configures Radio Control Manager (RCM) information and attachment lists.
Configuration

User – Basic Tab

Figure 251: User – Basic Tab

Table 128: Parameters for the User – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

User Information
User Name N/A 1 to 32 Enter a unique alias name that refers to a specific user
characters. logging on to the system.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

346 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.
Login Information
Login Name N/A 1 to 8 Enter a unique name that identifies the user to the
characters. system.
Cannot use: | @
Note: Do not confuse this name with the User
_"?%
Name. The User Name is the alias that the
Spaces are not user is known as.
allowed.

Password N/A 6 to 12 Enter text that ensures the security of the user logging on
characters the system.
Note: The * character appears in the field for
each letter typed.

Only the first 8 characters are significant.

Verify Password N/A 6 to 12 Enter the text specified in the Password field.
characters

User – Configuration Tab

Figure 252: User – Configuration Tab

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 347

Table 129: Parameters for the User – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Create Subscriber No Yes or No • Yes lets the user create records for Subscriber objects
Objects in the UCM, such as radios, radio users, talkgroups,
and multigroups.
• No disables this capability.

Create No Yes or No • Yes lets the user create records for Radio System
Infrastructure Infrastructure objects in the ZCM, such as BTS Sites.
Objects • No disables this capability.

Create Users No Yes or No • Yes lets the user create or modify other users in the
UCM.
• No disables this capability.

Create Security No Yes or No • Yes lets the user create or modify Security Groups in
Groups the UCM.
• No disables this capability.

Allow Password Yes Yes or No • Yes indicates that the system saves the users
Saving passwords. Users can save their passwords in the
Windows workstation, and the next time they log in
to a management application no password is required.
Plus, they are automatically logged in to the default
subsystem.
• No indicates that passwords are not saved. The user
must enter a password during each logon.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

348 | Reference

User – Zone Access Tab

Figure 253: User – Zone Access Tab

Table 130: Parameters for the User – Zone Access Tab

Field Default Range Description

Zone Access Configuration
Allow Access To No Yes or No • Yes indicates that the user can access all zones in the
All Zones? system.
• No indicates that the user can only access zones
specified in the Subsystem Access tab.

Valid Zones
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select a name that refers to a specific zone.
characters (Click Add Row to display a list of options).

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 349

User – Application Access Tab

Figure 254: User – Application Access Tab

Table 131: Parameters for the User – Application Access Tab

Field Default Range Description

Application Access Configuration
Allow Access To No Yes or No • Yes indicates that the user can access all
All Applications? applications.
• No indicates that the user can only access the
applications specified in the Application Access tab.

Valid Applications
Application Name N/A N/A (Read only) Select the management applications that the
user can access. (Click Add Row to display a list of
options).

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

350 | Reference

User – Security Group Access Tab

Figure 255: User – Security Group Access Tab

Table 132: Parameters for the User – Security Group Access Tab

Field Default Range Description

Security Group Access Configuration
Allow Diagnostics No Yes or No • Yes lets the user have access to change the state of a
For All Security device through diagnostics.
Groups • No disables this capability.

Valid Security Groups

Security Group N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select a Security Group from a list of all
characters Security Groups that the user can access. (Click Add
Row to display a list of options). See Security Group on
page 343 for more information on determining the
Security Group alias.
Insert Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.
• Yes lets the user add records that belong to the
specified Security Group. The user must have Update
access as well.
• No disables this capability.

Update Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the user modify the information in a record
that belongs to the specified Security Group.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 351

Field Default Range Description

• No disables this capability.

Delete Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the user delete a record that belongs to the
specified Security Group.
• No disables this capability.

Diagnostics Yes Yes or No (Read only) Select or clear the check box.
• Yes lets the user acknowledge and delete alerts, and
perform diagnostics for objects that belong to the
specified Security Group.
• No disables this capability.
Note: This access applies to infrastructure
objects in the ZCM.

Attach Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the user make attachment group assignments
for talkgroups that belong to a Security Group when
creating RCM users.
• No disables this capability.

DGNA Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the user regroup a radio that belongs to that
security group. The user must have Regroup access to
that talkgroups security group within the RCM
Dynamic Regrouping application.
• No disables this capability.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

352 | Reference

User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab

Figure 256: User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab

Table 133: Parameters for the User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Radio Control Management Configuration
Receive No Yes or No • Yes lets the RCM user receive and respond to
Unattended Emergency Alarms that do not belong to any
Emergency particular user.
Alarms • No disables this capability.

Attach All No Yes or No • Yes allows the RCM user to view all events and
Talkgroups attach to all talkgroups. The RCM user can then send
radio commands to all radio users.
• No disables this capability.
Note: The Radio Control Attachments form is
grayed out if this option is set to Yes.

Valid Attachment Groups

Attachment Group N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select an attachment group for which the
characters RCM user has access. Attachment group refers to a
specific talkgroup or multigroup defined in the system.
(Click Add Row to display a list of options.) Attachment
groups allow the following:
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 353

Field Default Range Description

• An RCM user can issue radio commands to the

selected attachment group(s) or radio users in the
group.
• Radio users can send radio activities to the RCM user
who is assigned to their attachment group.
If this field is blank, all critical radio activities (such as
emergency alarms) are sent to all logged on and enabled
RCM users.
Note: An attachment group is not
programmed into the radio.

Emergency Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

Alarms
• Yes lets the RCM user receive Emergency Alarms
from radio users who belong to this attachment group.
• No disables this capability.
Note: Emergency Alarms are displayed to all
RCM users who are attached to the current
affiliation group of the requesting radio and
who are logged into the requesting zone, the
home zone of the requesting radios current
affiliation group, or any zone with a current
talkgroup member affiliated.

DGNA Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the RCM users select the talkgroup if they
have Regroup access to that talkgroups Security
Group.
• No disables this capability.
Note: This capability requires the RCM
Dynamic Regrouping option. The RCM user
must have regroup rights for the target
talkgroup.

Disable Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the RCM user send Temporary Subscription
Disable commands to radio users who belong to this
attachment group.
• No disables this capability.
Note: If the radio is inhibited, it cannot
transmit voice communications. Typically this
task is performed on a lost or stolen radio.

Permanent Disable No Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the RCM user send Permanent Subscription
Disable commands to radio users who belong to this
attachment group
• No disables this capability.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

354 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Important:
This feature is only available with license key
which has to be purchased.
Permanent Disable feature license has to be
installed on UCS. (See: Backup Restore
Including FRU/FRE manual.)

Snap Shot Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the RCM user send a snapshot of the radio
status for any radio user who belongs to this
attachment group.
• No disables this capability.

Radio Check Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes lets the RCM user perform a Radio Check on any
radio user who belongs to this attachment group.
• No disables this capability.
• No disables this capability.

CAD User
The CAD User object creates and manages all Computer Aided Dispatch users who have access to the system,
including assigning access rights and responsibilities.

Tabs in the CAD User Configuration Window

The following table shows the tabs in the CAD User Configuration window.

Table 134: Tabs in the CAD User Configuration Window

Tab Description
Basic Configures the login and password information.
Security Group Access Allows access to specified security groups and the permissions for each security
group.
Radio Control Manager Configures Radio Control Manager (RCM) attachment lists and permissions.
Configuration

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 355

CAD User – Basic Tab

Figure 257: CAD User – Basic Tab

Table 135: Parameters for the CAD User – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

User Information
User Name N/A 1 to 32 Enter a unique alias name that refers to a specific user
characters. logging on to the CADI API system. This name, in
Cannot use: | @ combination with the password, forms the CAD users
_"?%$ unique identification to the system.
Note: This User Name is only valid via the
CADI API interface.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.
Login Information
Login Name N/A 1 to 8 (Read only for existing records) Enter a unique name
characters. that identifies the user to the system.
Cannot use: | @ Note: Do not confuse this name with the
_"?% User Name. The User Name is the alias that
Spaces are not the user is known as.
allowed.

Password N/A 6 to 12 (Read only for existing records) Enter unique text that
characters. ensures the security of the user logging on the system.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

356 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Note: The * character appears in the field for

each letter you type.

Verify Password N/A 6 to 12 (Read only for existing records) Enter the text specified
characters. in the Password field.

CAD User – Security Group Access Tab

Figure 258: CAD User – Security Group Access Tab

Table 136: Parameters for the CAD User – Security Group Access Tab

Field Default Range Description

Security Group Attachments
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the Security Group to which this record is
characters assigned. (Click Add Row to display a list of options).
See Security Group on page 343 for more information
on determining the Security Group alias.
Push-To-Talk Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.
• Yes enables this user to view Push-To-Talk (PTT)
for all radios in the Security Group.
• No prevents this user to perform any other type of
operation in the Security Group.

Affiliation Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes enables this user to view affiliations (AFF) for
all radios in the attachment group in the RCM
management application.
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 357

Field Default Range Description

• No disables the Radio Check command issued from a

CAD host so that both the user and CAD host do not
receive any affiliation information.

Emergency Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

Alarms
• Yes enables this user to receive Emergency Alarm
(EA) events within this talkgroup.
• No disables this capability.

Status Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes enables this user to receive Status events within
this talkgroup.
• No disables this capability.

CAD User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab

Figure 259: CAD User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab

Table 137: Parameters for the CAD User – Radio Control Manager Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Attachment Group Form
Attachment Group N/A 1 to 16 Select a name that refers to a specific attachment group
characters to which the user has access. (Click Add Row to display
a list of options.)
Push-To-Talk Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

358 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

• Yes enables this user to view Push-To-Talk (PTT)

for all radios in the Security Group.
• No prevents this user to perform any other type of
operation in the Security Group.

Affiliation Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes allows the user to view affiliations (AFF) for all
radios in the attachment group.
• No disables the radio check command issued from a
CAD host so the user does not receive any affiliation
information.

Emergency Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

Alarms
• Yes enables this user to receive Emergency Alarm
(EA) events within this talkgroup.
• No disables this capability.

Status Yes Yes or No Select or clear the check box.

• Yes enables this user to receive Status events within
this talkgroup.
• No disables this capability.

User Password
The User Password object allows you to change the password for a previously configured user. If they have
permissions, users can also change their own passwords.

Figure 260: User Password Configuration Window

Table 138: Parameters for the User Password Configuration Window

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 359

Field Default Range Description

Login Name N/A 1 to 32 (Read only for existing records) Displays the unique alias
characters name that refers to a specific user on the system. This
name and the password are the users unique identification
on the system.
User Password
Password N/A 6 to 12 Enter a unique text that ensures the security of the user
characters logging on the system. This is the primary security door
to the system. Passwords should not be obvious. Only the
first 8 characters are significant.
Note: The * character appears in the field for
each letter typed to prevent others from seeing
the password.

Verify Password N/A 6 to 12 Enter the text specified in the Password field.
characters

ZoneWatch Configuration Reference

This part discusses the Basic and Configuration tabs for each object in the ZoneWatch object class of the User
Configuration Manager (UCM) window.
Note: See the ZoneWatch Online Help for information about ZoneWatch.

How to Use ZoneWatch Filters

ZoneWatch receives all data packets flowing through the system. Filters determine which user sees the information.
The filters limit the information being displayed in ZoneWatch to the messages that are pertinent to you and remove
unwanted messages.
All fields are used as filters to show specified information (Yes setting) or to filter out and not show information (No
setting). For example, if you set the Is Secure? field to No , you filter out that parameter so you cannot view secure
calls.
When you create a ZW Watch Window Definition, you can choose to assign filters to it, but filters are not required.

Levels of Data
To run ZoneWatch, you must have a predefined profile that describes the types of windows used to display data and
the types of data that you can view in one or more windows. You define these profiles by building levels of data
through the ZoneWatch Configuration objects.
Profiles contain three levels of data:

Table 139: Profile Levels of Data

Profile Level of Data

ZoneWatch Filters Filters determine the different types of data that you want to display in a
ZoneWatch window. You can also choose the data that you do not want to
view.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

360 | Reference

Profile Level of Data

ZW Watch Window You associate predefined windows with zero or more filters to define what
Definition types of data are displayed in the ZoneWatch application. This definition
incorporates the filters associated with it.
ZW Watch Profile Incorporates both the filters and window definitions and defines the type of
user who needs to access this information through ZoneWatch.
Note: A Watch Profile must refer to ZW Watch Window
Definitions and Filters from the same security group.

From lowest to highest, the level of data hierarchy is as follows. You cannot create Watch Profiles until you have
created Window Definitions, and you cannot create Window Definitions until you have created Filters:
1. ZoneWatch Filters (lowest component level)
2. ZW Watch Window Definition (contains zero or more filters)
3. ZW Watch Profile (contains one or more ZW Watch Window Definitions)

ZW Message Qualifier Filter

ZW Message Qualifier Filter object filters emergency messages. Filtering by specific message determines what is
displayed based on the activity type of each received message.

ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 261: ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Basic Tab

Table 140: Parameters for the ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Message Qualifier N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies a specific Message
Filter Name characters. Qualifier Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 361

Field Default Range Description

Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Configuration Tab

Figure 262: ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Configuration Tab

Table 141: Parameters for the ZW Message Qualifier Filter – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Is Emergency? No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view emergency
calls and alarms.
• No filters out emergency calls and alarms, so you do
not see this information.

ZW Message Set Filter

The ZW Message Set Filter object filters information to show sets of messages that you select. Filtering by message
set is like filtering by a specific message, except that the activity types are grouped within a large number of
overlapping logical message sets (subscriber, dispatcher, and infrastructure).

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

362 | Reference

ZW Message Set Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 263: ZW Message Set Filter – Basic Tab

Table 142: Parameters for the ZW Message Set Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Message Set Filter N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies a specific Message
Name characters. Set Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 363

ZW Message Set Filter – Subscriber Tab

Figure 264: ZW Message Set Filter – Subscriber Tab

Table 143: Parameters for the ZW Message Set Filter – Subscriber Tab

Field Default Range Description

Subscriber Messages
All Call No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view all calls at a
zone level and interzone calls involving your zone.
This includes private calls, talkgroup and multigroup
calls, and telephone calls.
• No filters out all calls, so you do not see this
information. You set this field to No if you only want
to see a certain type of call, for example, only
telephone interconnect calls to determine if
telephone use is excessive. In this example, you
would then set the Phone Call Activity setting to
Yes.

All Busy No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view all busies.
• No filters out all busies, so you do not see this
information.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

364 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Talkgroup No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view talkgroup
Activity activity. You can combine this filter with a ZW
TG/MG ID Filter or ZW TG/MG Range Filter to
view talkgroup activity on selected talkgroups.
• No filters out all talkgroup activity, so you do not see
this information.

Multigroup No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view multigroup

Activity activity. You can combine this filter with a ZW
TG/MG ID Filter or ZW TG/MG Range Filter to
view multigroup activity on selected multigroups.
• No filters out all multigroup activity, so you do not
see this information.

Patch Activity No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view patch
activity from consoles. Console operators create
patches between radios.
• No filters out all patch activity, so you do not see this
information.

MSEL Activity No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view MSEL
activity from consoles. Console operators create
multiple select calls.
• No filters out all MSEL activity, so you do not see
this information.

Private Call No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view private call
Activity activity. For example, if you set All Calls to No, and
set this field to Yes, then you only see private calls.
• No filters out all private call activity, so you do not
see this information.

Phone Call No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view interconnect
Activity phone calls. For example, if you set All Calls to No,
and set this field to Yes, then you only see
interconnect calls.
• No filters out all interconnect calls, so you do not see
this information.

Data Activity No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view data call
activity over the data channel.
• No filters out all data calls, so you do not see this
information.

Affiliations No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view affiliation

messages from radio users to the zone.
• No filters out all affiliation messages, so you do not
see this information.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 365

ZW Message Set Filter – Dispatcher Tab

Figure 265: ZW Message Set Filter – Dispatcher Tab

Table 144: Parameters for the ZW Message Set Filter – Dispatcher Tab

Field Default Range Description

Dispatcher Messages
Emergency No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view activity
Activity messages for Emergency Calls and Emergency
Alarms.
• No filters out all emergency activity messages, so
you do not see this information.

Status No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view status events
issued by the radio to the RCM.
• No filters out all status events, so you do not see this
information.

RCM Activity No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view all RCM
activity messages. This includes Status, Regrouping,
Selector, Disable, and Remoter Monitor Radio Trace
(Radio Check).
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

366 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

• No filters out all RCM Activity, so you do not see

this information. You set this field to No if you only
want to see a certain type of RCM activity, for
example, only Disables. In this example, you would
then set the Disable setting to Yes.

Dynamic Activity No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view dynamic
activity messages.
• No filters out all dynamic activity, so you do not see
this information.

Regrouping No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view regroup

commands issued by the RCM. For example, if you
set RCM Activity to No and set this field to Yes, then
you only see Regrouping commands.
• No filters out all Regrouping activity, so you do not
see this information.

Disable No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view Temporary

Subscription Disable commands issued by the RCM.
For example, if you set RCM Activity to No and set
this field to Yes, then you only see Disable
commands.
• No filters out all Temporary Subscription Disable
commands, so you do not see this information.

Remote Monitor No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view Radio Check
Radio Trace commands issued by the RCM. For example, if you
set RCM Activity to No and set this field to Yes, then
you only see Remote Monitor Radio Trace
commands.
• No filters out all Radio Check commands, so you do
not see this information.

Rejects No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view reject

messages from unsuccessful or invalid RCM
commands and call rejects.
• No filters out all rejects, so you do not see this
information.

Patch MSEL No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view patch MSEL
Update update messages from consoles.
• No filters out all patch MSEL updates, so you do not
see this information.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 367

ZW Message Set Filter – Infrastructure Tab

Figure 266: ZW Message Set Filter – Infrastructure Tab

Table 145: Parameters for the ZW Message Set Filter – Infrastructure Tab

Field Default Range Description

Infrastructure Messages
Controlling Zone No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view controlling
Update zone update messages from the infrastructure. This
operates on a system-wide basis, so even if you filter
calls by sites, you see this information.
• No filters out all controlling zone update messages,
so you do not see this information.

Zone Controller No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view zone
Status controller status messages from the infrastructure.
• No filters out all zone controller status messages, so
you do not see this information.

Resource Failed No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view resource
failed messages from the infrastructure. During call
setup, if your call does not have sufficient resources,
a resource failed message is sent.
• No filters out all resource failed messages, so you do
not see this information.

Resource No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view resource

Preempted pre-empted messages from the infrastructure. During
call setup, if a resource was pre-empted by a higher
priority call, a resource pre-empted message is sent.
• No filters out all resource pre-empted messages, so
you do not see this information.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

368 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Unknown No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view unknown
messages from the infrastructure.
• No filters out all unknown messages, so you do not
see this information.
Note: If an Unknown message appears, you
should contact Motorola Solutions support as
this could indicate a software upgrade is
necessary.

ZW Raw Data Filter

The ZW Raw Data Filter object filters detailed packet information sent by the system. You can filter out specific
types of data using this object. For example, you can exclude all radio commands.

ZW Raw Data Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 267: ZW Raw Data Filter – Basic Tab

Table 146: Parameters for the ZW Raw Data Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Raw Data Filter N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies a specific Raw Data
Name characters. Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 369

ZW Raw Data Filter – Subscriber Tab

Figure 268: ZW Raw Data Filter – Subscriber Tab

Table 147: Parameters for the ZW Raw Data Filter – Subscriber Tab

Field Default Range Description

Subscriber Data
Radio Command No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view radio
command data from the RCM or console to the radio.
• No filters out all radio command data, so you do not
see this information.

Command Status No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view command
status data. RCM or CAD users can check on the
status of a command.
• No filters out all command status data, so you do not
see this information.

Command Control No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view command
control data sent from the RCM or CADI to query the
zone controller for the status of a command.
• No filters out all command control data, so you do not
see this information.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

370 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Call Activity No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view call activity
Update update data. This data includes the beginning and
transition of a call.
• No filters out all call activity update data, so you do
not see this information.

End of Call No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view end-of-call
data. This data includes when a call ends.
• No filters out all end-of-call data, so you do not see
this information.

Radio Status No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view radio status
Traffic traffic data. This traffic is from the radio to another
radio, the RCM, or a console.
• No filters out all radio status traffic data, so you do
not see this information.

Mobility Update No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view mobility
update data. This is the TETRA affiliation
information.
• No filters out all mobility update data, so you do not
see this information.

Interconnect Call No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view interconnect
Info call data.
• No filters out all interconnect call data, so you do not
see this information.

Site Monitor No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view ATIA filter
Update packets data. This data includes an update of the site
load monitoring.
• No filters out all packets data, so you do not see this
information.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 371

ZW Raw Data Filter – Infrastructure Tab

Figure 269: ZW Raw Data Filter – Infrastructure Tab

Table 148: Parameters for the ZW Raw Data Filter – Infrastructure Tab

Field Default Range Description

Infrastructure Data
Database Request No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view a database
SnapShot request from the RCM to the zone
controller.
• No filters out all database request data, so you do
not see this information.

Database No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view a database

Response response from the zone controller to the RCM to
respond to a SnapShot request.
• No filters out all database response data, so you do
not see this information.

System Activity No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view system
Update activity update data from the infrastructure to see if
the system status has changed.
• No filters out all system activity update data, so you
do not see this information.

System Activity No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view system
Request activity request data from the infrastructure, for
example, a request for a control channel or the status
of the zone controller.
• No filters out all system activity request data, so you
do not see this information.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

372 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Resource No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view resource
Removed Update removed update data from the infrastructure. For
example, if you remove a channel, the zone
controller sends a message to notify the system.
• No filters out all resource removed update data, so
you do not see this information.

ZW Site Filter
The ZW Site Filter object allows you to specify the RF or console site that the ZoneWatch user wants to monitor. You
can filter one or more sites per the Site Filter record.
You must select a site within your zone to view ZoneWatch activity on the site. The ZW Site Filter essentially limits
the view to only a specific site in a zone. Seeing this information is not possible on this window from other sites (see
Exception on page 372). You can, however, have other windows open to show that information. In ZoneWatch, an
error message appears if you attempt to use a ZW Site Filter that has no sites in the selected zone.

Exception
The site that you are viewing does show radios that receive a talkgroup call from a different site if your site includes a
radio that is involved in the talkgroup call. For example:
You are only viewing Site2, but a radio in Site2 is part of the Police talkgroup. If a radio in Site1 who is also part of
the Police talkgroup sends a talkgroup call, the call shows in Site2 even though you filtered out all other sites.

ZW Site Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 270: ZW Site Filter – Basic Tab

Table 149: Parameters for the ZW Site Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 373

Field Default Range Description

Site Filter Name N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies a specific Site Filter
characters. Name.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

ZW Site Filter – Configuration Tab

Figure 271: ZW Site Filter – Configuration Tab

Table 150: Parameters for the ZW Site Filter – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Sites in Filter
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a Zone Alias that refers to a specific zone in the
characters system. (Click Add Row to display a list of options.)
Note: The system appends the Zone Alias
with three characters using the Zone ID.

Site Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a Site Alias that refers to a specific site within a
characters zone. You can enter multiple sites to monitor. The
maximum number of sites within a zone is 100 sites.
Note: The site alias is selected from local RF
sites or console sites.

ZW Channel Filter
The ZW Channel Filter object allows you to specify the channels that the ZoneWatch user wants to monitor. You can
filter one or more channels per the Channel Filter record. You can select channels in different sites.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

374 | Reference

You must select a channel within a site to view ZoneWatch activity on the channel. The ZW Channel Filter
essentially limits the view to only a specific channel for a site. Seeing this information is not possible on this window
from other channels. You can, however, have other windows open to show that information. In ZoneWatch, an error
message appears if you attempt to use a ZW Channel Filter that has no channels for the sites in that zone.

ZW Channel Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 272: ZW Channel Filter – Basic Tab

Table 151: Parameters for the ZW Channel Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Channel Filter N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies a specific Channel
Name characters. Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 375

ZW Channel Filter – Configuration Tab

Figure 273: ZW Channel Filter – Configuration Tab

Table 152: Parameters for the ZW Channel Filter – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Channels in Filter
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a Zone Alias that refers to a specific zone in the
characters system. (Click Add Row to display a list of options.)
Note: The system appends the Zone Alias
with three characters using the Zone ID.

Site Alias N/A 1 to 16 Select a name that refers to a specific site within a zone.
characters You can enter multiple sites to monitor. The maximum
number of sites within a zone is 100 sites.
Note: The site alias is selected from local RF
sites or console sites.

Channel ID N/A 1 to 32 Select the ID of the channel that you want to monitor.

ZW Radio ID Filter
The ZW Radio ID Filter object allows you to specify the radios that the ZoneWatch user wants to monitor. You can
filter one or more radios per the Radio ID filter record.
This filter is useful if you want to view only a certain radios interconnect calls to determine excessive usage.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

376 | Reference

ZW Radio ID Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 274: ZW Radio ID Filter – Basic Tab

Table 153: Parameters for the ZW Radio ID Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Radio ID Filter N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies the Radio ID Filter
Name characters. Name.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 377

ZW Radio ID Filter – Configuration Tab

Figure 275: ZW Radio ID Filter – Configuration Tab

Table 154: Parameters for the ZW Radio ID Filter – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Radio IDs in Filter
Radio ID N/A 1 to 13999999 Select a radio ID that refers to a specific radio in the
zone. (Click Add Row to display a list of options).

ZW Radio Range Filter

The ZW Radio Range Filter object allows you to specify a range of radios that the ZoneWatch user wants to monitor.
This object provides a shortcut that you can use instead of selecting the radio IDs individually.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

378 | Reference

ZW Radio Range Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 276: ZW Radio Range Filter – Basic Tab

Table 155: Parameters for the ZW Radio Range Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Radio Range N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies a specific Radio
Filter Name characters. Range Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 379

ZW Radio Range Filter – Configuration Tab

Figure 277: ZW Radio Range Filter – Configuration Tab

Table 156: Parameters for the ZW Radio Range Filter – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Radio ID Range in Filter
Start At N/A 1 to 13999999 Enter a radio ID to be the start of the range.
End At N/A 1 to 13999999 Enter a radio ID to be the end of the range.
Note: The ID for the End At field must be
higher than the ID for the Start At field.

ZW TG/MG ID Filter
The ZW TG/MG ID Filter object allows you to specify the talkgroups and multigroups that the ZoneWatch user
wants to monitor. You can filter one or more talkgroups or multigroups per ZW TG/MG ID Filter record.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

380 | Reference

ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 278: ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Basic Tab

Table 157: Parameters for the ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
TG/MG ID Filter N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies the Talkgroup and
Name characters. Multigroup ID Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 381

ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Configuration Tab

Figure 279: ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Configuration Tab

Table 158: Parameters for the ZW TG/MG ID Filter – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

TG/MG IDs in Filter
TG/MG ID N/A 1 to 13999999 Select a Talkgroup ID or Multigroup ID that refers to a
specific talkgroup or multigroup in the zone. (Click Add
Row to display a list of options).

ZW TG/MG Range Filter

The ZW TG/MG Range Filter object allows you to specify a range of talkgroups and multigroups that the ZoneWatch
user wants to monitor. This object provides a shortcut that you can use instead of selecting the talkgroup and
multigroup IDs individually.

ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Basic Tab

Figure 280: ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Basic Tab

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

382 | Reference

Table 159: Parameters for the ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
TG/MG Range N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies a specific Talkgroup
Filter Name characters. or Multigroup Range Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Configuration Tab

Figure 281: ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Configuration Tab

Table 160: Parameters for the ZW TG/MG Range Filter – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

TG/MG ID Range in Filter
Start At N/A 1 to 13999999 Enter a Talkgroup or Multigroup ID to be the start of the
range.
End At N/A 1 to 13999999 Enter a Talkgroup or Multigroup ID to be the end of the
range.
Note: The ID for the End At field must be
higher than the ID for the Start At field.

ZW Watch Window Definition

Note: Setting up a ZW Watch Window Definition is a requirement to allow ZoneWatch users to monitor
the data that they need. Define windows for ZoneWatch users through the ZW Watch Window Definition
before using ZoneWatch.
The ZW Watch Window Definition object consists of configuration parameters that define a Watch Window. A
Watch Window is the physical data display window for ZoneWatch.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 383

You can apply zero to many filters to the Watch Window, but filters must be from the same security group.

Displaying Windows in ZoneWatch

When a Watch Window is open on the Network Manager Client, it always has an associated ZW Watch Window
Definition.
Multiple Watch Windows can be open simultaneously. Typically, each window uses a different definition. It allows
both a channel grid window to be open as well as a scroll window. ZoneWatch users may also have multiple scroll
windows open, each showing a different site or with different filtering.

Changing Definitions
You define each type of window possible for ZoneWatch. This definition describes how data is displayed to the user.
You can easily change the settings that stipulate which of the saved definitions are used by that Watch Window.
Changing this setting immediately changes the Watch Window. It includes the type of data displayed, and in some
cases the physical size of the window.

Tabs in the ZW Watch Window Definition Configuration Window

The following table shows the tabs in the ZW Watch Window Definition Configuration window.

Table 161: Tabs on the ZW Watch Window Definition Configuration Window

Tab Description
Basic Names the Watch Window and assigns the type of watch window.
Configuration Tracks by ID or alias.
Message/Raw Data Filters Assigns Message Raw Data Filters.
Single Site Scroll Configures the single site parameters.
Raw Data Display Configures the raw data display parameters.
Site Filters Selects the sites to filter from a list of sites.
Channel Filters Selects the channels to filter from a list of channels.
Radio ID Filters Selects the radios to filter from a list of radio IDs.
Radio Range Filters Selects the radios to filter from a list of radio ranges.
TG/MG ID Filters Selects the talkgroups and multigroups to filter from a list of talkgroups and
multigroups IDs.
TG/MG Range Filters Selects the talkgroups and multigroups to filter from a list of talkgroup and
multigroup ranges.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

384 | Reference

ZW Watch Window Definition – Basic Tab

Figure 282: ZW Watch Window Definition – Basic Tab

Table 162: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Watch Window N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies the Watch Window.
Name characters.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Watch Window Multi • Site (Read only for existing records) Select one of the
Type Site • Multi Site following:
Scroll Scroll • Site configures the watch window type for a single
• Channel site. Disables the Site Filters tab. Enables the
Grid Site/Raw Display tab so that you can configure the
• Busy Queue information for the site.
• Raw • Multi Site Scroll configures the watch window type
Display for multiple sites. Enables the Site Filters tab.
Disables the Site/Raw Display tab.
• Channel Grid configures the watch window type as
channel grid. Enables the Site Filters tab. Disables the
Site/Raw Display tab.
• Busy Queue configures the watch window type as a
busy queue. Enables the Site Filters tab. Disables the
Site/Raw Display tab.
• Raw Display configures the watch window type as
raw display. Enables the Site Filters tab. Enables the
Raw Data Display Configuration group on the
Site/Raw Display tab.

Security Group
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 385

Field Default Range Description

Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this record
characters is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for more
information on determining the Security Group alias.

ZW Watch Window Definition – Configuration Tab

Figure 283: ZW Watch Window Definition – Configuration Tab

Table 163: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Configuration Parameters
Track by ID ID or Alias • ID displays the data using ID numbers.
• Alias displays the data using alias names.
Note: If you choose Alias and the alias is not
available, the ID numbers are used instead.
Whenever an ID number is displayed, the
pound sign (#) proceeds the number.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

386 | Reference

ZW Watch Window Definition – Message/Raw Data Tab

Figure 284: ZW Watch Window Definition – Message/Raw Data Tab

Table 164: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Message/Raw Data Tab

Field Default Range Description

Message/Raw Data Filters
Message Qualifier N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies the Message
Filter Name characters. Qualifier Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Message Set Filter N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies the Message Set
Name characters. Filter.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Raw Data Filter N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies the Raw Data Filter.
Name characters.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 387

ZW Watch Window Definition – Single Site Scroll Tab

Figure 285: ZW Watch Window Definition – Single Site Scroll Tab

Table 165: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Single Site Scroll Tab

Field Default Range Description

Single Site Scroll Configuration
RF Site Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select a name that refers to a specific site
characters within a zone. You can enter multiple sites to monitor.
The maximum number of sites within a zone is 100 sites.
Note: The site alias must be unique across RF
sites.

Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only) Select a name that refers to a specific zone
characters in the system.
Note: The system appends the Zone Alias
with three characters using the Zone ID.

Grid Display Yes Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view information
in a grid display format for the site.
• No disables this capability, so you would view
information in either a Scroll Display or Busy Queue,
depending on the settings in those fields.

Scroll Display No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view information
in a scroll display format for the site.
• No disables this capability, so you would view
information in either a Grid Display or Busy Queue,
depending on the settings in those fields.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

388 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Busy Queue No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view information
in a busy queue format for the site.
• No disables this capability, so you would view
information in either a Grid Display or Scroll
Display, depending on the settings in those fields.

ZW Watch Window Definition – Raw Data Display Tab

Figure 286: ZW Watch Window Definition – Raw Data Display Tab

Table 166: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Raw Data Display Tab

Field Default Range Description

Raw Data Display Configuration
All Fields No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view all fields in
the raw data display that breaks down the data by
bytes.
• No disables this capability. When disabled, an
abbreviated format for raw display is used.

Raw Data Bytes No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view raw data
bytes in the raw data display.
• No disables this capability.

Decoded No Yes or No • Yes allows the ZoneWatch user to view the

Messages information in a formatted message that is easier to
read. This format is the same as what appears in the
Site or Multi Site Scroll windows.
• No disables this capability.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 389

ZW Watch Window Definition – Site Filters Tab

Figure 287: ZW Watch Window Definition – Site Filters Tab

Table 167: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Site Filters Tab

Field Default Range Description

Site Filters
Site Filter Name N/A 1 to 31 Select a unique name that identifies a specific Site Filter.
characters (Click Add Row to display a list of options.)

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

390 | Reference

ZW Watch Window Definition – Channel Filters Tab

Figure 288: ZW Watch Window Definition – Channel Filters Tab

Table 168: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Channel Filters Tab

Field Default Range Description

Channel Filters
Channel Filter N/A 1 to 31 Select a unique name that identifies a specific Channel
Name characters Filter. (Click Add Row to display a list of options).

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 391

ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio ID Filters Tab

Figure 289: ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio ID Filters Tab

Table 169: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio ID Filters Tab

Field Default Range Description

Radio ID Filters
Radio ID Filter N/A 1 to 31 Select a unique name that identifies a specific Radio ID
Name characters Filter. (Click Add Row to display a list of options).

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

392 | Reference

ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio Range Filters Tab

Figure 290: ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio Range Filters Tab

Table 170: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – Radio Range Filters Tab

Field Default Range Description

Radio Range Filters
Radio Range N/A 1 to 31 Select a unique name that identifies the Radio Range
Filter Name characters Filter Name. (Click Add Row to display a list of
options).

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 393

ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG ID Filters Tab

Figure 291: ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG ID Filters Tab

Table 171: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG ID Filters Tab

Field Default Range Description

TG/MG ID Filters
TG/MG ID Filter N/A 1 to 31 Select a unique name that identifies a specific
Name characters Talkgroup or Multigroup ID Filter. (Click Add Row to
display a list of options).

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

394 | Reference

ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG Range Filters Tab

Figure 292: ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG Range Filters Tab

Table 172: Parameters for the ZW Watch Window Definition – TG/MG Range Filters Tab

Field Default Range Description

TG/MG Range Filters
TG/MG Range N/A 1 to 31 Select a unique name that identifies a specific Talkgroup
Filter Name characters or Multigroup Range Filter. (Click Add Row to display a
list of options).

ZW Watch Profile
The ZW Watch Profile object contains one or more ZW Watch Window Definitions. ZW Watch profiles must contain
watch window definitions from the same security group. Watch profiles determine how that ZoneWatch presents
information.
• Watch Profiles are containers for different Watch Window Definitions.
• Watch Window Definitions are made up of combinations of Filters.
• Filters determine the type of system traffic that is directed to the watch windows.
For example, you may create a site filter to show only Site #1, and then apply that filter to a multi- site scroll window,
and then include that watch window definition in your watch [Link] following figure shows the relationship
between watch profiles, watch window definitions, and filters.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 395

Figure 293: Watch Profiles

Filter
Filter

Watch Window
Definition
Watch Window
Filterr
Definition Filter

Filter Watch Window

Definition
Watch Window
Definition

Watch Profile
This watch profile contains five different window definitions. Each of the watch windows displays a different type of
information. Complete at least one profile to open ZoneWatch.

ZW Watch Profile – Basic Tab

Figure 294: ZW Watch Profile – Basic Tab

Table 173: Parameters for the ZW Watch Profile - Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Watch Profile N/A 1 to 31 Enter a unique name that identifies a specific Watch
Name characters. Profile.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

396 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

ZW Watch Profile – Configuration Tab

Figure 295: ZW Watch Profile – Configuration Tab

Table 174: Parameters for the ZW Watch Profile – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Watch Windows in Profile
Watch Window N/A 1 to 31 Select a unique name that identifies a specific Watch
Name characters Window Definition. (Click Add Row to display a list of
options).

ZW Global Configuration
The ZW Global configuration allows you to define load indicators and its thresholds, which are used to indicate to
what extend a Common Control Channel (CCCH) is considered used (loaded) within a certain time interval. The
purpose of the indicator is to make it possible to directly highlight abnormal behaviour at a site and then react on it
e.g. by adding/removing a Common Secondary Control Channel (C-SCCH).

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 397

ZW Global Configuration – Basic Tab

Figure 296: ZW Global Configuration – Basic Tab

Table 175: Parameters for the ZW Global Configuration – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
ID N/A 1–1 Defines a unique number that determines the ZW Global
Configuration object
Note: This ID cannot be modified nor
deleted. It is set by default.

Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

398 | Reference

ZW Global Configuration – Configuration Tab

Figure 297: ZW Global Configuration – Configuration Tab

Table 176: Parameters for the ZW Configuration – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Load Indicator Mapping
Name N/A 1 to 31 Enter a name of the load indicator.
characters.
Cannot use: | @
_"?%$
Start Range N/A 1 to 100 Enter a threshold to be the start of the range load
indicator.
Note: The numbering must be a continuous
sequence and contain no spacing.

End Range N/A 1 to 100 Enter a threshold to be the end of the range load
indicator.
Colour N/A Green, Yellow, Colors reflect the perceived severity of current RAO
Red (Random Access Opportunity) usage value in the
control channel. Each load level is associated with the
following colour:
• Normal load – green
• High load (above normal) – yellow
• Very high load (potentially overload) – red
Note: The colours are set by default and
cannot be changed.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 399

External Configuration Reference

The External Configuration class of objects is applicable for multicluster systems only. To enable multicluster
operation, it is necessary to register all the zones, BTS sites and call routes that have been configured in the other
clusters of the system.

External Zones
The External Zone object registers a zone in another cluster. All zones must be known in all clusters in a multicluster
system.
The External Zone object is an object in the External Configuration class of objects.

Creating and Deleting

The following applies to creating and deleting the External Zones record.
• You can create and delete External Zones record after the system is operational as needed.
Note: To delete, you have to delete references to the Zone in all Home Zone maps and reboot the zone
controller afterwards. External sites belonging to the zone, external sites in the Source Site ACC plus
configured profiles are deleted automatically.

External Zones Configuration Window

Figure 298: External Zones – Basic Tab

Table 177: Parameters for the External Zones – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Zone Alias N/A 1 to 16 This field is not editable.
characters.
Zone ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to a specific external zone in the system.
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

400 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

Cluster ID N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to the cluster of a specific external zone in the
system.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See UCM Main Window Elements on
page 56 for more information on security groups.

External RF Sites
The External RF Sites object configures an individual BTS Site within a zone, setting the parameters for a site so that
it functions correctly in the system.
The External RF Sites registers the BTS sites in all other clusters of the system.
The External RF Sites object is a sub-object of the External Zones object.

Creating and Deleting

You can create or delete External RF Sites records as needed.

External RF Sites Configuration Window

Figure 299: External RF Sites Configuration Window

Table 178: Parameters for the External RF Sites Configuration Window

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 401

Field Default Range Description

Zone ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to the specific zone of an external BTS site in the
system.
RF Site Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter the name that
characters. refers to an external BTS site within the specific external
Cannot use: | @ zone.
_"%$?/\
RF Site ID N/A 1 to 100 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to an external BTS site within the specific external
zone.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

External Call Routes

Call routes are created in the individual zones within a cluster. They are replicated automatically to the UCS, and
from the UCS to the other zones within a single cluster.
In a multicluster system, the call routes need to be distributed to all clusters within a system. Redirect call routes do
not need to be distributed to other clusters.
The External Call Route object is a sub-object of the External Zones object.

Creating and Deleting

The following applies to creating and deleting External Call Route records.
• You can create and delete the records as needed.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

402 | Reference

External Call Routes – Basic Tab

Figure 300: External Call Route – Basic Tab

Table 179: Parameters for the External Call Route – Basic Tab

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Zone ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to the specific zone of an external Call Route in
the system.
Call Route Alias N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter the name that
characters. refers to an external Call Route within the specific
Cannot use: | @ external zone.
_"%$?/\
Call Route ID N/A 00 to 99 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to an external Call Route within the specific
external zone.
Security Groups
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See UCM Main Window Elements on
page 56 for more information on security groups.

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 403

External Call Routes – Configuration Tab

Figure 301: External Call Routes – Configuration Tab

Table 180: Parameters for the External Call Routes – Configuration Tab

Field Default Range Description

Redirect Selection
Redirect Call No Yes or No You cannot set this parameter.
Route
Common Parameters
Route Type PABX PABX or PSTN Select the connecting type to be PABX networks or
PSTN networks. Calling to either of these network types
may be enabled or disabled per radio user.
Gateway ID 167771 16000000 to (Read only for existing records). Enter TETRA ISSI that
84 16777199 is signalled over the air indicating which call route is
requested by the radio user.
Outgoing Prefix N/A 1 to 6 numeric Enter which outgoing prefix numbers shall be added to
characters the called telephone number. This prefix may be used by
network equipment connected to the TIG (typically a
PABX) to route the call.
Incoming Prefix N/A 00 to 99 or Enter which prefix numbers the external network
blank (typically a PABX) adds to the incoming telephone
number in order to indicate which external network
route the call followed. This is used when multiple
Table continued…

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback

404 | Reference

Field Default Range Description

networks are connected using PABX as a routing
mechanism.
Note: If this field is left blank, only one call
route may be defined.

Redirect Parameters
Redirect Zone N/A 1 to 16 You cannot set this parameter.
Alias characters
Redirect Route N/A 1 to 16 You cannot set this parameter.
Alias characters
Notes
Notes N/A 0 to 300 Enter text that provides a relevant description and
characters information about the external call route.

External Short Data Router

Creating and Deleting
You can create or delete External SDR records as needed.

External Short Data Router Configuration Window

Figure 302: External Short Data Router Configuration Window

Table 181: Parameters for the External Short Data Router Configuration Window

Field Default Range Description

Unique Identifier(s)
Table continued…

Send Feedback | March 2014 | MN000462A01-A

 Reference | 405

Field Default Range Description

Zone ID N/A 1 to 56 (Read only for existing records) Enter the number that
refers to the specific zone of an external SDR in the
system.
Short Data Router N/A 1 to 16 (Read only for existing records) Enter the name that
Alias characters. refers to an external SDR within the specific external
Cannot use: | @ zone.
_"%$?/\
Short Data Router N/A 1 to 56 (Read only for existing records) The number that refers
ID to an external SDR within the specific external zone,
added automatically.
Security Group
Security Group N/A 1 to 16 Select the alias of the Security Group to which this
characters record is assigned. See Security Group on page 343 for
more information on determining the Security Group
alias.

MN000462A01-A | March 2014 | Send Feedback